JP2018171210A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress occurrence of an excessive burden to a hall.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game board including a game area; shooting means for shooting game balls toward the game area; lottery means for holding a lottery regarding a jackpot based on entry of game balls into a predetermined start pocket provided in the game area; advantage game state control means for controlling to an advantageous game state for opening a variable winning hole when obtaining a result that becomes a jackpot by a lottery by using the lottery means; and putout means for putting out a first number of game balls based on entry of game balls into a predetermined winning hole provided in a position that the game balls shot toward a right area in the game area can enter, and for putting out a second number of game balls larger than the first number of game balls based on entry of game balls into a variable winning hole provided in a position that game balls shot toward the right area can enter. The predetermined winning hole is provided in a position for suppressing the number of game balls toward a variable winning hole.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 209

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  In a conventional gaming machine, when a game ball launched into the game area of the game board enters the start opening (hereinafter also referred to as “start prize”), a big hit lottery is executed with this start prize as a trigger. , Shift to jackpot game. In each round of the big hit game, a predetermined number of times when a predetermined time elapses and one of the predetermined number of game balls entering the big prize opening is established, and the game balls are awarded to the big prize opening. Game balls are paid out.

JP 2012-125264 A

  For example, if all of the game balls that were launched toward the big prize opening win the big prize opening while the big prize opening of the big hit game round is open, there will be a large number of game balls exceeding the specified number in that round. There is a possibility of winning a prize opening, which will place an excessive burden on the hall.

  In view of the above, an object of one embodiment of the present invention is to suppress generation of an excessive burden on a hole.

  In order to solve the above problems, one embodiment of the present invention employs the following configuration.

A game board having a game area;
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for a big hit based on a game ball entering a predetermined start opening provided in the game area;
Advantageous game state control means for controlling to an advantageous gaming state in which the variable prize opening is opened when a result that is a big hit is obtained by lottery by the lottery means;
A first number of game balls are paid out based on a game ball entering a predetermined winning opening provided at a position where a game ball launched toward the right region of the game area can enter, and the game A second number of game balls that is greater than the first number based on the number of game balls entering the variable winning opening provided at a position where game balls launched toward the right region of the area can enter. A game machine comprising a payout means for paying out
The predetermined winning opening is provided at a position to suppress the number of game balls heading to the variable winning opening,
When the jackpot lottery result is obtained by lottery by the lottery means, determine one advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states,
The predetermined starting port is a first starting port into which a game ball launched toward the right region of the gaming area enters and a second starting ball into which the game ball launched toward the left region of the gaming area enters. A gaming machine having a start opening.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, generation of an excessive burden on a hole can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 101 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. In the pachinko machine, it is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which game balls are circulated with the game panel opaque. It is a front view which expands and shows the attacker unit vicinity in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main member and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board in the state where the game panel is made transparent. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the decorative pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nail are shown. It is a front view of the front structural member and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front structural member and the game panel from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from back. (A) is a front view which shows the panel board in a game panel, an upper left panel decoration board, and a lower left panel decoration board, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the panel board in the site | part of a specific obstruction nail, (c) It is a fragmentary sectional view of the panel board in the site | part of the obstruction nail which has overlapped with the decoration pattern. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern and obstacle nail in a game panel. (A) is a front view which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern in the panel board of a game panel, and the back front decoration board of the back front effect unit in a back unit, (b) is the panel decoration LED of a panel board and a panel decoration board It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center role object and front effect unit of the front unit of a game board, and was seen from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 1st pattern in the table | surface production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light emission decoration of the 2nd pattern in the table | surface production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the back unit of a game board which emphasizes and shows a back front decoration board and a back front right decoration board. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back back direction production unit in a back unit from the front. It is a front view of a back back direction production unit which emphasizes a back back movable mechanism in a normal position with a back back movable decoration object. It is a front view of the back back direction production | presentation unit which shows the state by which the back back movable decoration body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing a state in which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to the vicinity of the descending end. FIG. 136 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 135 and the back and back movable decorative body is dropped. It is a front view of a back back direction production | generation unit which shows the state which is moving the back back movable decoration body to an up-down direction with a slide guide. It is a front view of the back back direction production | generation unit which shows the state which the lock member is rotating from the lock position to the cancellation | release position side by the upward movement of the back back movable decoration body by a slide guide. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the rear back decoration production unit in the back rear production unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a rear view of the back decoration production unit in the back rear production unit as seen from behind. It is a disassembled perspective view. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 5th pattern in the back decoration production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 6th pattern in the back back decoration production | presentation unit. (A) is the exploded perspective view which looked at the back middle production unit of the back unit for every main member, and (b) exploded the back middle production unit of the back unit for every main member. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 3rd pattern in the inside production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the state which carried out the light decoration of the 4th pattern in the inside production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the back right production unit in a back unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back right production | presentation unit in a back unit from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back right production unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is a front view of the back right production unit which emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in the normal state where the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is located at the rising end. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state where the bearing slider is positioned at the descending end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 147; FIG. 147 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 148; 149 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state where the bearing slider is positioned at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 149. FIG. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back and back movable decorative body of the back and back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the standby position. FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board showing a state where the rear back movable decorative body is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to the lowered position; FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back and rear movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between the standby position and the lowered position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back right movable decorative body of the back right production unit in the back unit is moved from the initial state to the first state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state which moved the back right movable decoration body from the state of FIG. 154 to the 2nd state. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 155 to the third state. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back movable decorative body of the back top production unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back bottom movable decorative body of the back bottom production unit in the back unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. The back rear movable decorative body of the back rear production unit in the back unit is moved to the lowered position, the back right movable decorative body of the back right production unit is moved to the second state, the back movable movable body of the back upper production unit is moved to the appearance position, and It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the back bottom movable decorative body of the back bottom production unit is moved to the raised position. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the second pattern is light-decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. It is a game board front view shown in the state which made the 3rd pattern light-emit on the back first light-guide plate of a back middle production | presentation unit. It is a game board front view shown in the state which made the 4th pattern light emission decoration in the back first light-guide plate of a back middle production | presentation unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 5th pattern was light-decorated on the back 2nd light guide plate of the back back decoration production unit in a back back production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 6th pattern was light-decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back back decoration production unit in the back back production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission effect of the animation style by the multiple pattern using a front light-guide plate, a back 1st light-guide plate, and a back 2nd light-guide plate. It is the front view of the game board shown in the state which made the 1st design light-emit on the front light guide plate of a front production unit, and moved the back right movable decoration body of a back right production unit to the 2nd state. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame earth substrate. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is the interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit determination process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for a lottery process for jackpots, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for a lottery process for jackpot types. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big hit control process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd receiving port opening / closing process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms regular process performed by the periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a gray scale effect. FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 194. FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 195. It is a time chart which shows the prohibition period of the volume adjustment at the time of execution of the operation effect using a rotation operation part. It is a time chart which shows the prohibition period of volume adjustment at the time of execution of the drive effect using a rotation operation part. It is a time chart which shows the prohibition period of the volume adjustment at the time of execution of the operation effect using a press operation part. It is an example of the effect display of the effect display apparatus at the time of volume adjustment by rotation operation of a rotation operation part. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of another embodiment from the right front. It is a front view which shows the several light emission area | region in a back 2nd light-guide plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change of the light emission area at the time of execution of the light guide effect using a back 2nd light-guide plate. It is the specific effect example at the time of execution of the light guide effect using the back second light guide plate. It is a side sectional view for explaining the positional relationship among the effect display device, the plurality of light guide plates, and the plurality of movable decorative bodies. It is a time chart which shows the light emission state of a some light-guide plate, and the operation state of a movable decoration body. It is a front view which shows the permeation | transmission area | region formed in the decoration body main body of a back right movable decoration body. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. In a pachinko machine, it is the front view of another example of the game board which shows the inside of the game area | region where a game ball distribute | circulates by making a game panel opaque. It is a block diagram which shows another example of an outline of the control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the symbol determination table used for the lottery process about jackpot, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the symbol determination table used for the lottery process about jackpot. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a round distribution table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a big winning opening open | release pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table at the time of big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the prefetch effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a L5 effect promotion pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of L5 effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of L5 effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of L5 effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of L5 effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of L5 effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the L5 effect promotion pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of the end effect of L5 effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline | summary of a secret timer notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the time table of secret timer notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of a secret timer notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows another example of the outline | summary of a secret timer notice effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 12 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and a game board attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of, and includes an outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and defines the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a periphery disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 Control unit 1500 (see FIG. 12) and an effect display device that is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and can display a predetermined effect image 600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege (for the player by receiving or passing the game ball B) ( For example, a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005 for giving a predetermined number of game balls B) are provided. The obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. A general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  A player can drive a game ball B into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy driving the handle 182.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the front effect unit 2600 and the rear effect. The unit 3100, the back middle production unit 3200, the back right production unit 3300, the back upper production unit 3400, the back lower production unit 3500, the back front production unit 3600, etc. are allowed to perform a movable production and a light production production, etc. Can entertain.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 21B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Accordingly, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. This is for playing games.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and a handle rear relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114 a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper dish ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b is aligned with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and the pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front of the ball feeding unit, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from behind. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 168) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed to the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142. A tamper-proof member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with a front view extending left and right, and an upper piece 148a that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 148b, and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C-chamfered shape on the distal end side (right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b facing each other. . The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 148b extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 148. Thus, in plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 142a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 148, the illegal game ball B with the string attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and attached to the illegal game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B fired (hit) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act is performed in which the illegal string is manipulated to allow the illegal game ball B to be taken in and out of the first starting port, etc. The string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then formed into a V shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed part of the game, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball B to which a string is attached.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) that has been launched by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202, and is delivered from the payout device 580. The game ball B is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and a through ball passage 150a that communicates the normal guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit; A full sphere receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front and communicates with a full tank guide path of the lower full ball path unit of the main body frame 4 is provided. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that opens forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received in the full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. A ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower tray ball supply port of the tray unit is provided.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The through-sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 97).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, the glass unit 160 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear protrusion 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and the player can drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 when operated. Is.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 as viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end 181b projecting radially from the front end of the base 181a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the counter-rotation around the opposite side The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side face in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side face in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 rotates most in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is most strongly struck into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the fourth protrusion 182d is formed on the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state, It is possible to reduce a player's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the back after being disassembled for each of the main members. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252 in the left and right directions, and The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5-1. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, the front end is retracted backward, and the depth of the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (see FIG. 46). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. Static electricity charged on B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the rear. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5-3d. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorated board 278, the dish lower left decorated board 283, and the dish lower right decorated board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 45 and 46. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Accordingly, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. 47 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the plate decoration unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252 separately from each other on the left and right. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction projects forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish lower left decoration unit 280, the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower right decoration unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  In addition, the dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is notched upward from the front lower end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decoration part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5-4d. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit viewed from the back. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. And a dish central lower decorative board 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left edge of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are caused to emit light, each of them can be light-decorated substantially uniformly and can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5-5c. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 55A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 55B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotary drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, and includes a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Accordingly, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such that the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320 so that the output direction is directed upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as sound, sound effects, music, and the like by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player will feel as if the production operation unit 300 has trembled. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present more various effects to the player.

  The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information and vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, when resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variation in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (sweep) eight times in one cycle for about 1 second in units of 1 Hz. This is intermittently performed by sweeping for 1 second and inputting again after 1 second.

  In the assembly work of the gaming machine, for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated. Based on that. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the gaming machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the gaming machine with the RAM clear switch operated), the main control board A command to clear and initialize the RAM 1310 is transmitted (output) to a peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs vibration speaker operation confirmation processing for performing inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibration speaker. The inspector can confirm sound (sound) such as voice and music from the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation processing, and can also confirm vibration of the presentation operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front and above, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 62A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a position that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through in the center, And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is biased upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Accordingly, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 is substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65C).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62 (b), the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the outer button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 65B, etc.). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. 62B, the third cam 371e that is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5-5j. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as seen from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 63 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decoration board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 65A, the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation portion 303 together with the elevating base 364 vigorously protrudes upward to be in the raised position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is substantially the same as the top surface (see FIG. 65C). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is substantially in the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. ing. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and thus attention can be drawn to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450 door. It is formed to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window interior decoration part decoration board 413 is attached to a portion of the front side of the door frame right side base 411 that is behind the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape on the top, bottom, left, and right around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically, and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three side window decoration portions 410b in 410a. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 72B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. A door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front projecting portions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the front end upper portions of the left and right front projecting portions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative board 455 is formed in a strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a band plate shape extending left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are arranged on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 81 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550 A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and a rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame base unit 5 0 viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, A second rail cover 555 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 so as to be separated from the one rail cover 554 to the left in a front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, A ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553; It is equipped with a.

  The payout unit 560 is based on instructions from the payout control board 633 for the ball guide unit 570 for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner and the game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570. The payout device 580 for paying out one by one, the upper full ball path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full ball path unit 600 on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lower full sphere path unit 610 for guiding to the substrate unit 620 side is provided.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 is a flat guide body 502a that extends to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84B).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  In the present embodiment, the door passes more than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103 around the center axis (axial axis) of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 on the door frame through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502. The angle at which the tangent line that touches the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial center) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower door hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. The configuration is as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in a state where the ball is in the state, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hit ball 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  When the game ball B that has been hit does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Is dropped to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150 and is discharged to the lower plate 202 through the foul cover unit 150.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a with the same width as the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end of the width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and the left plate portion 551b From the front of the lower side to the right It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and has a horizontal direction that is approximately half the horizontal width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 from the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is opened downward with a size slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guide passage 570 a in the ball guide unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white. The end of one rail cover 554 is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that circulates in two upper and lower stages by this rectifying piece 556a, the flow is rectified so as to flow in a single stage on the downstream side, so that the inside of the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque red color, and is slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front. , The opening at the bottom left end of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit downstream.

  Further, the payout base unit 550 is formed with a substrate housing portion 551aa for attaching the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 to the left of the ball tank 552 in front view of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded from a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from behind). And 10 external terminals of XCN10 are provided.))) And the substrate is accommodated so that its mounting surface is vertical toward the rear of the payout base 551 when the payout base 551 is viewed from the front. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontally oriented with its mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are mounted) facing downward. As seen from the front, the payout base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558 and attached to the board housing portion 551aa and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in a space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be viewed from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm). In contrast, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm). When the frame ground substrate 559 is accommodated and attached inside the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is seen. Is hidden due to the presence of the external terminal plate 558, but it is difficult to visually recognize, but of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. 1 can be visually recognized from the back side (see, for example, FIG. 77). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is as high as 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the ground terminal ECN3 is hidden by the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a low height of 7 mm and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is used for once collecting electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 and 88. 87A is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the game balls B aligned in a line by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600, and the ball full path 580b is operated by the ball pull lever 593. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B toward the payout device 580. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 92).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-movable movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. It is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-like drive gear 585 attached, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 and the second transmission gear 587 are meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. A spur gear-like payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a and between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A payout gear member 588 that is rotatably attached, and a plurality of blade pieces 589a that integrally rotate with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 and project into the payout passage 580a. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position leftward from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 includes three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 90).

  When the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 becomes the ball removal movable piece 592. Will flow down to the ball passage 580b side. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592. Therefore, more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7-3. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 92).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens rightward in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled with the discharge unit 560, and the lower normal discharge path 610a, the lower full tank discharge path 610b, and the lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear, It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper bulb discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, from the game hall island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, a predetermined number of balls are detected based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570 A game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the main body frame substrate unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end thereof coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 has a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Accordingly, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 97). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, an unauthorized modification to the payout control board 633 can be detected, and the deterrent against fraud is increased.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape such that the right side of a flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same plane as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view showing an upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front top with the tank rail and the like assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front bottom. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 106 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrilateral shape in plan view that extends in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front wall and a rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. . In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature at the downstream side than at the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical spot can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's interest in the game by the interruption of the game can be enhanced. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, the gear, the belt, etc. can be confirmed with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The effect of this can be achieved.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from the lower side to the rear side from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically, from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower in front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end thereof is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end that is inclined so that the circulation direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Accordingly, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearwardly can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 has a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape as described above and the end of the right end side on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side in plan view. The region surrounded by and has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction and the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and on the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can be grasped at the tip of the electric wiring by opening the grip portion by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lower as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The left step 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower, and the right step 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 104). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball grind) due to the engagement of the game balls B with each other.

  Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 105, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the direction of the pressure applied to the game ball B can be prevented, so that the game balls B can be prevented from being pressed against each other, and the game ball B can be blocked. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 104) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 104, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to the inclination thereof, and the game ball B spills outside the main body frame 4 to cause a problem. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 107 is a front view of a game board showing the inside of a game area in which game balls are distributed with the game panel made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 108 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board. FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the right front, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the left front, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from behind. FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the game board that is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board with the game panel made transparent. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing the decoration pattern of the game panel and the obstacle nails.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning port 2001, a first start port 2002, and a gate unit that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by accepting or passing the game ball B 2003, a second start port 2004, and a prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. As described above, the game is performed to entertain the driving operation of the handle 182 and the circulation of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 108) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 97, FIG. 168, etc.) for controlling the contents.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 The driving board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 are further provided.

  An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 113) to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to a command from the panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. An effect drive board 1720 that drives the decorative board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 that houses the panel relay board 1710 and the effect drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 so that the left side of the back view can be rotated by a hinge, and the right side of the drive board box 1730 is detachably attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 has a plurality of (four here) general winning ports 2001 that are always open so as to be able to receive the game balls B that have been driven into the gaming region 5a, and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are a gaming region. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a; a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; According to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, the game ball B can be received, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 The prize winning hole 2005 that allows the game ball B to be accepted in accordance with the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, and the game balls accepted in the prize winning hole 2005 are distributed The A receiving space 2006 of a predetermined size, and a first receiving port 2007 and the second receiving port 2008 for receiving the game ball receiving space 2006 either, a.

  In addition, the front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general winning ports 2001, and is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 and the start opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a are attached to the right side of the front view. 2005, attacker unit 240 having receiving space 2006, first receiving port 2007, and second receiving port 2008 And a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is mounted slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 is closed. As shown, a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500 is provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 168).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back rear effect unit 3100 attached to the rear of the back box 3010, a back middle effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back rear effect unit 3100, and a back middle effect unit 3200. The back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, the back effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the front upper part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the lower front part of the back middle effect unit 3200. A back bottom effect unit 3500, a back right effect unit 3300, a back top effect unit 3400, and a back front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back bottom effect unit 3500 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 116 to 120. 116 is a front view of the front component member and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front component member and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 118 is a view of the front component member and the game panel from the rear. FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel as seen from the front, and FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel as seen from the rear.

  The front component member 1000 is formed to be transparent as a whole. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001 and has a stop part 1006 with which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding part 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guiding portion 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1010 coincides with a notch portion of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate sticking portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. Yes.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 to 123 and the like. FIG. 121 (a) is a front view showing a panel board, an upper left panel decorative board, and a lower left panel decorative board in a game panel, and FIG. 121 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at a specific obstacle nail. ) Is a partial cross-sectional view of the panel board at the site of the obstacle nail overlapping the decorative pattern. FIG. 122 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel. FIG. 123 (a) is a front view showing the relationship between the decorative pattern on the panel board of the gaming panel and the front decorative board of the front effect unit in the back unit, and (b) is the panel decoration of the panel board and the panel decorative board. FIG.

  The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  In addition, the gaming panel 1100 includes a panel decoration board 1130 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130 a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are mounted, and a board on which the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the panel holder 1120. And a cover 1135. The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 disposed at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 disposed at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. The substrate cover 1135 includes an upper left substrate cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left substrate cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel board 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component member 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a thin plate thickness by separating the plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole penetrating forward and backward and a short long hole, and an upper edge and a lower edge in the left-right direction. A plurality of engaging step portions 1114. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engagement claws 1125 and the engagement pieces 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

  As shown in FIG. 121A and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset from the center to the upper right in front view. Thereby, the panel board 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the frame-shaped circumferential direction) has a plurality of games on the left side and the lower side from the center. The balls B are wide enough to be arranged, and the upper and right sides are narrow enough that a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged. In the present embodiment, in the panel plate 1110, as shown in FIG. 121 (a), a portion having a large width is used as a decorative pattern forming region 1101, and a portion having a small width is enclosed. A decoration pattern non-formation region 1102 is set.

  This panel board 1110 is provided with a decoration pattern 1150 in which a predetermined pattern is formed by a plurality of linear grooves (that is, a plurality of grooves recessed linearly) in the decoration pattern forming area 1101 on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment is a pattern such as a crack in the glass. The decorative pattern 1150 has a V-shaped cross section. The decoration pattern 1150 can be seen from the player side ahead even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not emitting light, and decorates the game area 5a. In addition, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light and the light is incident on the inside of the panel board 1110, the panel board 1110 causes the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a pattern such as a crack to emit light. Can do.

  The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 includes a radiating portion 1151 that mainly reflects light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 to the inside, and light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 to the inside. And a radiation light guide 1152 that reflects and guides light along a linear shape. The radiation light guiding unit 1152 satisfies at least one of the depth of the groove and the long circumferential length in the cross section as compared with the radiation unit 1151. The radiation light guide unit 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) the plurality of radiation units 1151, and diffusely reflects the light irradiated from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 within the panel plate 1110. The light can be guided in the extending direction of the groove. That is, the radiation light guide unit 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiation units 1151 connected to itself to the other. Within a limited range, the overall photosensitivity of the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 (the ratio of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) is increased. More specifically, the radiation light guide unit 1152 is normally connected from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 121 (a). Light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 arranged outside the light guide region 1103 to cause the radiating portion 1151 to emit light, and the overall photosensitivity of the decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

  As a result, the radiation light guide unit 1152 has more radiation parts 1151 than the radiation part 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a part where light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is difficult to reach (usually a part outside the light guide region 1103). Light can reach and the radiating portion 1151 can be decorated with a sufficient amount of light. Accordingly, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light, the light incident on the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152, and has a pattern such as a crack. The decoration pattern 1150 thus formed can be decorated with light emission with uniform brightness over substantially the whole.

  The panel board 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails N planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N has a specific obstacle nail N1 that has an important role for the game. As shown in FIG. 122, the specific obstacle nail N1 is disposed in the vicinity of the warp inlet 2501, the general winning opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, and the gate portion 2003. Since these specific obstacle nails N1 are distorted or bent when the game ball B comes into contact with each other, the probability that the game ball B will be accepted into the warp entrance 2501, the general winning port 2001, or the like changes. This is a subject that is always subject to maintenance so that there is no distortion or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 121 (b) and FIG. 122, a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) is defined as a decoration prohibition area 1104 with the specific obstacle nail N1 as the center. The radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 of the decoration pattern 1150 are not formed inside. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Further, since the grooves of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guide portion 1152 are not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1140 around the specific obstacle nail N1, it is necessary to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 during maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is struck, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiating portion 1151 and the radiation light guiding portion 1152, and the panel plate 1110 can be prevented from being cracked or cracked.

  Moreover, the obstacle nail N planted in the part overlapping the decoration pattern 1150 among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1 is implanted in the panel plate 1110 as shown in FIG. 121 (c). The projected tip protrudes into the groove (radiation light guide 1152 in the figure) constituting the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is caused to emit light and light is incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110, light is irradiated from the groove of the decoration pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding into the groove. Then, the light is reflected at the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be shined. Thereby, the obstacle nail N can be made to shine, and the player can show the player a light emitting effect that has not been available in conventional pachinko machines. In the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N planted in a special part, and thereby, together with the light emitting decoration of the decorative pattern 1150. The special nail N in the special part can be illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the special nail N in the special part, and the game ball B can be driven into the special nail N. The operation can be performed.

  In addition, the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is such that a part of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152 formed in the linear groove is in the back unit 3000 described later, as shown in FIG. It is formed so as to be along the inner outer edge facing the center side of the front front decorative board 3603 front view game area 5a of the front front effect unit 3600. Accordingly, when the decoration pattern 1150 (the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152) is caused to emit light by the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, the outer edge inside the back decorative substrate 3603 is viewed from the player side. Can be decorated with luminescence. In addition, this allows the outer edge of the front decorative board 3603 to be illuminated and decorated in front view, so that the front decorative board 3603 can be made relatively dark and difficult to see. The appearance in 5a can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 including linear grooves is formed on the panel plate 1110 by cutting. The decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the cutting waste discharged by the formation of the decoration pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and the obstacle nail N can be planted in a good state.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1123 that is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and the holding step portion 1123 is substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. A through-hole 1121 is provided.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1012 and the notch are penetrated to pass through the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion 1123, and is disposed outside the holding step portion 1123 and a plurality of protruding pins 1124 that are inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. Three engaging claws 1125 that elastically engage with the engaging step portion 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and a panel protruding from the lower outer side of the holding step portion 1123 upward. A pair of engagement pieces 1126 respectively engaged with two engagement step portions 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110 are provided. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece 1126 from the diagonally upper front side, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to move the upper and lower left sides. By engaging the engaging step portion 1114 at the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125 elastically, the panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached in a state of being accommodated in the holding step portion 1123. At this time, the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120 is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel holder 1120 includes two board mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear in the upper left corner and the upper right corner when viewed from the front outside the holding step 1123, and the rear side of each board mounting recess 1127. And two connecting recesses 1128 that are recessed forward. An upper left board cover 1136 to which an upper left panel decoration board 1131 is attached and a lower left board cover 1137 to which a lower left panel decoration board 1132 is attached are attached to the two board attachment recesses 1127 from the front. The upper substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. In addition, the lower substrate mounting recess 1127 is located behind the certificate sticking portion 1012 in the front component member 1000. In the lower substrate mounting recess 1127, an engaging claw 1125 that engages with an engaging step portion 1114 at a lower left oblique portion of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the boundary side with the holding step portion 1123.

  In the connection recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connection connector 1131 a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 attached to the board attachment recess 1127 and the connection connector 1132 a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 pass through the rear wall of the board attachment recess 1127. Thus, the space is formed in such a size that a sufficiently large space is formed so that a finger can be inserted around the connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b. Thereby, the connection cable (illustration abbreviation is omitted) and connection work to the connection connector 1131b and the connection connector 1132b can be easily performed.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132. The upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 are arranged along the upper left diagonal portion of the peripheral edge of the panel plate 1110, with the uppermost side facing right and the lowermost side facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and is mounted so as to irradiate light downward to the right so that the remainder is perpendicular to the upper left diagonal portion of the panel plate 1110. The upper left panel decoration board 1131 has a connection connector 1131a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The lower left panel decoration board 1132 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The lower left panel decoration board 1132 is cut away so as to avoid the lower engaging claws 1125 in the panel holder 1120, and the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a are arranged on the upper and right sides while avoiding the cutout portion. On the other hand, it is mounted so as to emit light toward the upper right. The lower left panel decorative board 1132 has a connection connector 1132a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member so as not to stand out from the front. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side-view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can irradiate light forward.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged such that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side view type panel decoration LED 1130 a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. Yes. Thereby, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the panel decoration board 1130 can be made thinner than the panel board 1110, the panel decoration board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100). The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be decorated with light emission while suppressing an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110 and is too large for the size of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). The plate surface. In other words, the panel decoration substrate 1130 has other areas (excessive) in which the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted are not mounted. Area). Thereby, the attachment strength of the panel decoration board 1130 can be increased, and even if the vibration or impact generated during the transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 is applied, the panel decoration board 1130 and the panel board 1110 It is possible to make it difficult to cause the positional relationship deviation, and it is possible to suppress the deviation of the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a and to prevent the occurrence of a defect in the incidence of light on the panel plate 1110.

  Further, since the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are possible. However, it is difficult to be transmitted to the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, vibrations and the like acting on the panel decoration substrate 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) can be reduced, and a decrease in the durability of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be suppressed. And the panel board 1110 can be prevented from being misaligned, and the optical axis misalignment of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be suppressed to prevent the incident of light on the panel board 1110. .

  A panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 1135. The board cover 1135 is formed in a frosted glass-like translucent so that the panel decoration board 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so that light from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be diffused. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to reduce that the light irradiated (leaked) forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player and makes the player feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  The gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment has a cracked decorative pattern 1150 formed in a decorative pattern forming region 1101 of a transparent panel board 1110, which is more transparent and three-dimensional than a conventional decoration using a printed sheet. You can show the player a certain decoration. Then, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is caused to emit light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated and decorated, and the game ball B in the game area 5a that has not been seen in the past pachinko machines It is possible to show the player the light emitting decorations in the distribution area.

  In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed only in the decoration pattern formation area 1101 in which the game balls B in the game area 5a circulate through various flow paths, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed throughout the game area 5a. Compared with the case where it forms, the cost concerning formation of the decoration pattern 1150 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment has the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is caused to emit light, the function display unit 1400 is displayed. The player can illuminate from behind, and can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit) not present in the conventional pachinko machine is decorated with light emission.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is disposed behind the certificate sticking part 1012. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is caused to emit light, the card sticking part 1012 The attached sticker (not shown) can be illuminated from behind, and the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which a sticker that is not in a conventional pachinko machine is illuminated.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment, a condensing lens, a diffusing lens, or the like is not disposed between the panel decoration LED 1130 a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. As a result, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is directly radiated to the side surface of the panel plate 1110 in a wide range, and the light can be incident on a wide range inside the panel plate 1110. It can be decorated with beautiful luminous.

  Furthermore, the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment is provided with a panel decoration board 1130 (LED for panel decoration 1130a) on the panel holder 1120 for light-decorating the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110. In order to change the model of the game board 5 or make a minor change to the model, when changing to a panel board 1110 with other different decoration patterns, it can be handled by simply replacing the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component member 1000, the panel decoration substrate 1130, and the substrate cover 1135 can be used as common components. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 on which the other decoration pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of this embodiment, the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the board attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the board cover 1135, and the panel decoration board 1130 and the panel board 1110 are separately provided. I try to install it. Thereby, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 are removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 to which the decoration pattern 1150 is not applied. 1120 and the front component member 1000 can be a common part. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel board 1110 on which the other decoration pattern 1150 is applied, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. be able to. When used in a model having a panel plate 1110 not provided with the decorative pattern 1150, a dummy substrate cover 1135 may be attached to the substrate attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. The substrate cover 1135 and the panel decoration substrate 1130 may be used while attached.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 112 and 113. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. Can be discharged from the discharge portion 1201 formed to the lower discharge ball receiving portion 628.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 168) that controls game contents, payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And.

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a big prize port sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2404, a second receiving port sensor 2405, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker. A solenoid 2414, a distribution solenoid 2416, a general winning port sensor 3001, a first start port sensor 3002, and a magnetic sensor 3003 are connected.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The function display unit 1400 is not shown in detail, but the two shins display a status indicator composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs, and a normal hold display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate part 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port 2002. The first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the game, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for display, and a second special reservation number display composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second start port 2004. ing.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. Display.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 168) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. A box 1505. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the rendering display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the upper surface and a lower fixing piece 1602 projecting outward from the lower surface. This effect display device 1600 has a back box in two fixed grooves 3010c opened in an upper inner peripheral surface in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1601 from obliquely behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the back. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 107, FIG. 108, FIG. 112, FIG. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. And protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B that has been driven into the game area 5a, and is always open (in this case, a plurality of general winning ports 2001) and the plurality of general winning ports 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B; , To the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that allow the game ball B to be received according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game ball B to be received in accordance with the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality (four in this case) of general winning awards 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and three are arranged on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is disposed below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in front view in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 at the upper right of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side from the center in the left-right direction.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a and immediately above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a front left of the start port unit 2100. The side unit 2200 is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning holes 2001, and the side slope is attached along the inner rail 1002 in the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 and a general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, a big winning port 2005, which are attached to the right side of the front port of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner when viewed from the front in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 having a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2008; A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to the upper side of the game area 5a and slightly above the center in front of the moving mouth unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500 And a table effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500.

[5-8-1. Starting port unit]
The start port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed in the gaming area 5a near the lower end at the center in the left-right direction and immediately above the out port 1008, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received. The start port unit 2100 is formed so that a portion excluding the front surface of the first start port 2002 is transparent, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

  The start port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, so that the general winning port 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first start port 2002 is a center described later. It is located immediately below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Accordingly, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability. The start port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the front front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is detected by a first start port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8-2. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that the game ball B can be always received. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side in the left-right direction is Is open upward at a position higher than the general prize opening 2001, and the leftmost general prize opening 2001 is opened at a position higher than the intermediate general prize opening 2001 toward the upper left in the front view. Yes.

  The side unit 2200 is formed so that the portions other than the front surfaces of the three general winning ports 2001 are transparent, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized. By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning holes 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general prize opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and transfer it to the guide path of the front front effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000. The game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 are detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 168).

[5-8-3. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lowered when viewed from the front. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left area of the center accessory 2500 to the right. The entire side slope 2300 is transparent, and the rear side (the back unit 3000 through the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100) can be visually recognized.

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes one general winning port 2001 of four general winning ports 2001, a gate unit 2003, a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, a receiving space 2006, a first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port 2007. A receiving port 2008 is provided (see FIG. 108 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 has an outer shape in a front view, which is formed in an L shape in which the upper end on the right side extends upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, a gate portion 2003 through which the game ball B flows (passes) vertically is arranged in the upper right corner, and a second starting port 2004 that can be opened forward is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. Has been. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004, and is always open obliquely to the lower right at the lower left of the large winning opening 2005. One general winning opening 2001 is arranged. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a receiving space 2006 having a predetermined size in which the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 circulates is disposed below the special winning opening 2005. The attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward in the receiving space 2006, and is always open upward on the right side of the first receiving port 2007. Two receiving ports 2008 are arranged.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than the game ball B, and the gate portion 2003 penetrates vertically with a size slightly larger than the game ball B. In the attacker unit 2400, the second start opening 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and opens forward, and the big winning opening 2005 is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It opens upwards with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a grand prize opening 2005. A big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a first reception sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball B received in the first reception port 2007, and a game ball received in the second reception port 2008 And a second receiving port sensor 2405 for detecting B (see FIG. 168).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second start port door 2411 that can open and close the second start port 2004, and opens and closes the second start port door 2411 according to the normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate part 2003. The start opening solenoid 2412, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B in the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or a second special lottery result and the first receiving port 2007 are opened and closed (the first game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 and circulating in the receiving space 2006 is first The distribution piece 2415 and the distribution piece 2415 are assigned to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2. And sorting solenoid 2416 to open and close in response to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is the lottery by accepting game balls B to 04, and a.

  The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 arranged at the upper and lower ends, respectively, and a gate passage 2421 through which the game ball B can flow. The left side passage 2422 that extends up and down below the second start port 2004 on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and through which the game ball B can flow, and the second start port 2004 after extending up and down on the right side of the gate portion 2003. Above the right side passage 2423 through which the game ball B can be circulated and below the gate passage 2421 and the left side passage 2422 and above the winning prize opening 2005. An attacker passage extending from the lower side of the gate passage 2421 to the left so that the left end side is lowered and through which the game ball B can flow And 424, the left side from the left end of the winning opening 2005 and a, and the discharge ledge 2425 extends leftward to be lower.

  As shown in FIG. 108, the gate passage 2421 is connected to the left side passage 2422 and the right side passage 2423 so that the game ball B can pass between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004. Yes. Accordingly, the game ball B that has entered the gate passage 2421 from above passes through the gate portion 2003 and then flows down to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second starting port 2004. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the left side passage 2422 from above passes through the left side of the gate part 2003 and the second starting port 2004 to the attacker passage 2424, and after passing through the left side of the gate part 2003. There is a pattern that bends to the right, enters the gate passage 2421, passes through the front of the second starting port 2004, and flows down to the attacker passage 2424. On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the right side passage 2423 from above passes through the right side of the gate portion 2003, then bends to the left, enters the gate passage 2421, passes through the front of the second start port 2004, and the attacker passage. It flows down to 2424. If the second start port 2004 is opened when the game ball B passes in front of the second start port 2004, the game ball B is received in the second start port 2004.

  The second starting port door 2411 can close the second starting port 2004 opened forward from the front, and can rotate around an axis whose lower side extends to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end of the second starting port 2004. Installed. The second start port door 2411 rotates (turns) so that the upper side moves forward by driving the start port solenoid 2412, thereby opening the second start port 2004 and closing the gate passage 2421. The game ball B flowing down to the front of the second start port 2004 can be guided to the second start port 2004 side and received in the second start port 2004. The second start opening door 2411 closes the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second start opening 2004 when the start opening solenoid is ON (when energizing). Let

  The grand prize opening door 2413 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so that the left end is lowered, and opens and closes the big prize opening 2005 that opens upward by moving forward and backward. It is possible. The grand prize opening door 2413 closes the grand prize opening 2005 by moving forward, and can deliver the game ball B that has circulated through the attacker passage 2424 to the left side after being guided to the left. . The special prize opening door 2413 is retracted by driving the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the special prize opening 2005, and after passing through any one of the gate passage 2421, the left side passage 2422, and the right side passage 2423, the attacker The game ball B that has circulated through the passage 2424 can be received in the special prize opening 2005. The special prize opening door 2413 closes the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when no power is supplied), and opens the special prize opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when current is supplied).

  In the receiving space 2006, the sorting piece 2415 extends in the front-rear direction and is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction so that the right end is lowered, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning port) can be opened and closed. The sorting piece 2415 moves forward to close the first receiving port 2007, guides the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 to the right, and is always opened upward. It can be accepted in 2008. Further, the sorting piece 2415 retreats by the driving of the sorting solenoid 2416 to open the first receiving port 2007, and the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is highly probable for the first receiving port 2007. Can be accepted. The sorting piece 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let In other words, the sorting piece 2415 can sort the game balls B received in the special winning opening 2005 so as to be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008.

  In the state where the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the gate passage 2421 is positioned below the opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 described later (slightly to the left of directly below). In addition, the gate portion 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are positioned above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the general winning opening 2001 is located at substantially the same height as the first start opening 2002. Further, in the state of being attached to the panel plate 1110, there are a plurality of obstacle nails N between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (gate portion 2003).

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the gate unit 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the assembled state on the game board 5, even if the game ball B is released from the stage 2503, the gate unit 2003 Never go through. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (right guide path 2510) of the center accessory 2500 may pass through the gate portion 2003. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510, a left side passage 2422, a gate passage 2421, and a right side passage 2423 are opened side by side from the left, and the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is any of them. You will enter the crab.

  Then, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is discharged from the gate passage 2421 to the attacker passage 2424 through the front of the second start opening door 2411 that closes the second start opening 2004 immediately below it. At this time, if the second starter door 2411 rotates forward and is in the open position, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 comes into contact with the back surface of the second starter door 2411 and The second starting port 2004 is guided to the second starting port 2004 and received. The second start door 2411 is in accordance with the normal lottery result (the normal lottery result is “normal hit” when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 (the game ball B is detected by the gate sensor 2401). The game ball B itself having the lottery “normal hit” is set to the second start port 2004 by appropriately setting the lottery time of the normal lottery result, the opening / closing timing of the second start port door 2411, and the like. Can also be accepted.

  The game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402 and then discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

  The gate passage 2421 communicates with the downstream end of the right side passage 2423 on the right side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004. The entered game ball B is allowed to flow to the front side of the second starting port 2004 without passing through the gate part 2003. Therefore, in a state where the second start port 2411 has moved to the open position and the second start port 2004 is ready to be received, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game that has circulated through the right side passage 2423. The sphere B can be received into the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. The gate passage 2421 is connected to the left side passage 2422 on the left side of the gate portion 2003 because the left side of the portion between the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004 communicates with the middle of the left side passage 2422. There is a possibility that the game ball B that has entered may be received in the second starting port 2004.

  When the game ball that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second start port 2004, the game ball is discharged from the lower end of the gate passage 2421 or the left side passage 2422 to the attacker passage 2424.

  The game ball B discharged to the attacker passage 2424 is guided to the left along the inclination, and is released downward from the left end of the discharge shelf 2425 through the large winning opening door 2413 closing the large winning opening 2005. Is done. At this time, if the big prize opening door 2413 closing the big prize opening 2005 is retreated and the big prize opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B released into the attacker passage 2424 has a high probability. Accepted in mouth 2005. The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 and then sent to the receiving space 2006, and either of the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 by the sorting piece 2415. It is distributed to.

  The game ball B received in the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2404 or the second receiving port sensor 2405, and is moved downward (substrate) It is discharged onto the holder 1200).

  There is a possibility that the game ball B released downward from the release shelf 2425 is received by one general winning opening 2001 arranged below. The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided to the rear side of the panel board 1110 and then transferred to the guide path of the front front effect unit 3600 of the back unit 3000. On the other hand, the game balls that have not been accepted into the general winning opening 2001 pass through the out opening 1008 at the lower end of the gaming area 5a and are discharged downward (on the board holder 1200) on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center character]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, etc., and is located slightly above the center of the front view. It is attached to the front surface of 1110. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. it can.

  In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a Can not invade.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp inlet 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, and the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be released. A warp outlet 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction.

  The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape that is depressed in the center in the left-right direction, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start opening 2002 of the start opening unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110), a substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined such that a portion (top) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction and a portion (valley) that is the lowest on both left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Thus, the game ball B can be released from these parts into the game area 5a.

  In the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the elevated portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a right guide passage 2510 that guides the game ball B that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side when viewed from the front to the left and then releases the game ball B downward. The right guide passage 2510 is formed so that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly on the right side of the attacker unit 2400 immediately above the gate portion 2003 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. Yes.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral surface on the right side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball from the right rail 1005 in the front component member 1000 when assembled to the game board 5. Accordingly, when the game ball B circulates on the right side of the center accessory 2500, it circulates along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and all the game balls B that circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are in the right guide passage. Enter 2510 and be guided. As a result, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center object 2500 (so-called right hit), the game ball B is passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. In addition, the game ball B can be received into the big winning opening 2005 that is opened (open) with a high probability.

[5-8-6. Table production unit]
Next, the table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 124 to 126 and the like. FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the center unit and the front effect unit of the front unit of the game board, as viewed from the front. 125 is a front view showing a state where the first design is light-decorated in the front effect unit, and FIG. 126 is a front view showing a state where the second design is light-decorated in the table effect unit.

  The front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500, and is directed toward the right side surface of the front light guide plate 2610 and a transparent flat front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and light can be irradiated toward the first pattern substrate 2611 attached to the rear side of the center object 2500 and the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a are mounted, and a second pattern substrate 2612 attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 is provided.

  The front light guide plate 2610 has a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 125) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex first reflecting portions that reflect only light from the vertical direction forward, and only light from the left and right directions. And a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex second reflecting portions that reflect forward. That is, the front effect unit 2600 can cause the first pattern 2621 to emit light when the LED for the light guide plate of the first pattern substrate 2611 emits light by 2611a, and emit light from the LED 2612a for the light guide plate of the second pattern substrate 2612. Then, the second pattern 2622 can be displayed in a light emitting manner.

  The front light guide plate 2610 has innumerable first and second reflection parts forming the first pattern 2621 and innumerable second reflection parts forming the second pattern 2622 and each unevenness is finely formed. In the state where the light guide plate LED 2611a of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2612a of the second pattern substrate 2612 are not emitting light, various types of the rear unit 3000 arranged on the rear side appear transparent. It is possible to visually recognize the decorative image and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 125, the first pattern 2621 is a pattern imitating the surroundings of one eye of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which radial and concentric cracks enter the glass, as shown in FIG. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are full-color LEDs.

  In the front effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment, the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 have their plate surfaces parallel to the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610, and their plate thicknesses. Is arranged in a direction parallel to the surface of the front light guide plate 2610, so that the first picture board 2611 and the second picture board 2612 are difficult to see when viewed from the front (player side). It is possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 to 131 and the like. FIG. 127 is a front view of the back unit of the game board, with the back front decorative board and the back front right decorative board highlighted. 128 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the back unit is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit when the back unit is disassembled and viewed from the back. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. Further, the back unit 3000 has a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. A mouth sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 168).

  The back unit 3000 includes a back rear effect unit 3100 attached to the rear of the back box 3010, a back middle effect unit 3200 attached to the front side of the back rear effect unit 3100, and a back middle effect unit 3200. The back right effect unit 3300 attached to the front right part, the back effect unit 3400 attached to the left side of the front upper part of the back middle effect unit 3200, and the lower front part of the back middle effect unit 3200. A back bottom effect unit 3500, a back right effect unit 3300, a back top effect unit 3400, and a back front effect unit 3600 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 in front of the back bottom effect unit 3500 are provided.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b A notch 3010d to which a lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being notched from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the lower side.

  Opening 3010a of back box 3010 is formed to have approximately the same size as the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable left and right.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the movable effect units and the like.

[5-9-1. Backward production unit]
Next, the back rear effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 132 to 141 and the like. FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the back rear effect unit in the back unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 133 is a front view of the back rear effect unit in which the back back movable decorative body highlights the back back movable mechanism at the normal position. FIG. 134 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing the state in which the back and back movable decorative body is locked by the lock member from the state of FIG. 133. FIG. 135 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing a state in which the slide guide is moved downward from the state of FIG. 134 to near the descending end. 136 is a front view of the back and rear effect unit showing a state where the back and back movable decorative body is dropped by rotating the lock member to the release position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. FIG. 137 is a front view of the back and back effect unit showing a state in which the back and back movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction by the slide guide. FIG. 138 is a front view of the back rear effect unit showing a state in which the lock member is rotated from the lock position to the release position side by the upward movement of the back back movable decorative body by the slide guide.

  FIG. 139 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the rear back decoration effect unit in the back rear effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. FIG. 140 is a front view showing a state in which the fifth pattern is light-decorated in the back decoration effect unit, and FIG. 141 is a front view showing a state in which the sixth pattern is light-decorated in the back decoration effect unit.

  The back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the rearmost part in the back box 3010. The back rear effect unit 3100 has a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The rear rear effect unit 3100 is attached to the rear rear movable effect unit 3110 having a rectangular outer shape and a frame shape, and the rear rear effect unit 3110 attached to the rear box 3010 and the rear rear movable effect unit 3110. A decoration production unit 3150.

  First, the back rear movable effect unit 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 will be described in detail. The rear rear movable effect unit 3110 extends in the left-right direction with substantially the same length as the full width in the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600, and is formed in a shape imitating an item as an item in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. The back and back movable decorative body 3120 and the back and back movable decorative body 3130 that attaches the back and back movable decorative body 3120 so as to be movable in the vertical direction are provided.

  The back rear movable decorative body 3120 extends in the left-right direction, protrudes outward from both the left and right ends of the decorative body main body 3121 imitating the nata and the decorative body main body 3121, and a pair of back rear movable mechanism 3130 described later. A left slider 3122 and a right slider 3123 that are slidably attached to the slide shaft 3132 in the vertical direction are provided. Further, although not shown, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is attached to the rear side of the decorative body main body 3121 and a plurality of LEDs (full color LEDs) are mounted on the front and rear surfaces. Before diffusing light from the LED, which is attached between the substrate, the back movable decorative body decorative substrate, and the decorative body main body 3121 and is attached to the front surface of the back movable decorative body decorative substrate A lens and a part of the lower part of the decorative body main body 3121 that is attached to the rear side of the decorative body for the back movable decorative body and guides light from the LED that is attached to the rear surface of the decorative body for the back movable decorative body. And a rear lens for irradiating from the rear to the front.

  The decorative body 3121 of the back movable decorative body 3120 is formed in a shape resembling nata, and the left end side is the front end of the nata in the front view and the lower side is the nata blade. The decorative body main body 3121 is formed so that the part imitating the blade of the nut is transparent. In addition, the decorative body 3121 is formed with a crack-patterned decoration that spreads radially and concentrically around a portion near the lower end in the center in the left-right direction.

  The left slider 3122 protrudes forward from the front surface, and includes a lock protrusion 3122a that can come into contact with a restriction portion 3141c and a guide portion 3141d of a lock member 3141 of a back-and-back movable mechanism 3130 described later. Although not shown, the left slider 3122 includes a pair of sliding bushes that are spaced apart vertically and into which the slide shaft 3132 on the left side of the rear back movable mechanism 3130 is slidably inserted. The sliding bush has a plurality of bearing steel balls in contact with the slide shaft 3132 inside, and can slide smoothly with respect to the inserted slide shaft 3132 without rattling. The left slider 3122 can smoothly move the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 in the vertical direction only on the left side by a pair of sliding bushes. The left slider 3122 includes a detection piece that protrudes rearward, although not shown. The detection piece of the left slider 3122 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back decorative effect production unit 3150.

  The right slider 3123 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the decorative body main body 3121 in the vertical direction, and has a rectangular cross section that sandwiches the right slide shaft 3132 of the back rear movable mechanism 3130 from the left and right. Is formed.

  The back movable decorative body decorative board is attached above the portion of the decorative body main body 3121 that imitates the blade of the nata. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable decorative body decorative substrate are arranged concentrically around the lower side of the approximate center in the left-right direction, and each is radially outward from the center. It is attached in the direction in which light is irradiated. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface of the back movable ornament decorative board are arranged along the lower side and the right side of the rear view, and parallel to the rear surface of the back movable decorative body decorative substrate. It is attached so that light is irradiated toward the side.

  The back movable decorative body 3120 can visually recognize the back through a portion that imitates the blade of the decorative body 3121. Further, when the back movable ornament 3120 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the back movable ornament decoration board, a crack pattern decoration is formed on the front surface of the ornament body 3121 via the front lens. The illuminated portion can be decorated with light emission, and when the plurality of LEDs mounted on the rear surface are caused to emit light, the front end of the decorative body 3121 and the blade portion can be decorated with light emission via the rear lens. .

  The back rear movable mechanism 3130 in the back rear movable production unit 3110 of the back rear production unit 3100 is formed of a metal plate and has a rectangular outer shape and a frame-like unit frame 3131, and extends vertically and is separated in the left-right direction. Each of them has a pair of slide shafts 3132 attached to the unit frame 3131 and extends vertically in parallel to the left of the left slide shaft 3132 in a front view, and has a spiral groove formed on the outer periphery. A spiral shaft 3133 that is rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131, a slide guide 3134 that is screwed into the spiral shaft 3133 and that can be brought into contact with the lower surface of the back movable decorative body 3120, and a rotation shaft that is positioned upward. Towards the bottom left corner of the unit frame 3131 A rear rear drive motor 3135 attached, a spur gear-like motor gear (not shown) attached to the rotating shaft of the rear rear drive motor 3135, and meshed with the motor gear and attached to the lower end of the spiral shaft 3133. And a spur gear-like drive gear (not shown).

  Further, the rear rear movable mechanism 3130 includes a lock member 3141 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a slightly lower portion from the upper left corner of the unit frame 3131 when viewed from the front, and extends vertically and is unit frame. A transmission slider 3142 for rotating the lock member 3141, a lock spring 3143 biasing the transmission slider 3142 upward, and a unit frame 3131 above the lock member 3141. And a rotation restricting member 3144 that restricts the rotation of the lock member 3141.

  Further, the rear rear movable mechanism 3130 is attached to the unit frame 3131 and has a rear rear drive motor 3135 attached to the lower surface thereof, and a box-shaped gear box 3145 in which the motor gear and the drive gear are housed. A damper 3146 attached to the gear box 3145 upward and a protective stopper 3147 projecting upward from the gear box 3145 so as to surround the outer periphery of the damper 3146 are provided.

  The unit frame 3131 is formed in a frame shape by four band plate-like members constituting the respective sides. The unit frame 3131 has a vertical height that is substantially the same as the height in the back box 3010, and a left and right length that is substantially the same as the left and right width in the back box 3010. The pair of slide shafts 3132 are columnar metal shafts that extend in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the unit frame 3131. Each of the pair of slide shafts 3132 has an upper end and a lower end attached to the unit frame 3131.

  The spiral shaft 3133 is rotatably attached to the unit frame 3131 at both upper and lower ends on the left side of the left slide shaft 3132. The spiral shaft 3133 is made of metal.

  The slide guide 3134 includes a guide main body 3134a to which the spiral shaft 3133 is screwed, and a guide protrusion 3134b that protrudes from the guide main body 3134a to the right in front view and can come into contact with the lower surface of the back movable decorative body 3120. I have. Although not shown, the slide guide 3134 is recessed from the front end surface of the guide projection 3134b to the left in front view and penetrates vertically, and from the guide body 3134a into which the left slide shaft 3132 is inserted. And a detection piece protruding rearward.

  The slide guide 3134 is prevented from rotating around the axis of the spiral shaft 3133 when the slide shaft 3132 is inserted into the guide groove at the tip of the guide protrusion 3134b, and the slide guide 3134 depends on the direction of rotation of the spiral shaft 3133. Can be moved upward or downward. The slide guide 3134 is configured such that the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 can be brought into contact with the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b. The detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by a plurality (two) of slide detection sensors 3155 provided in the back decoration effect unit 3150.

  The lock member 3141 includes a main body portion 3141a extending vertically, a bearing hole 3141b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a base end portion that is a lower portion of the main body portion 3141a, and a right angle from a distal end portion that is an upper portion of the main body portion 3141a. A planar regulating portion 3141c protruding rightward in front view and facing upward, a guide portion 3141d extending obliquely from the distal end of the regulating portion 3141c toward the vicinity of the base end portion of the body portion 3141a, and the body portion A stopper 3141e protruding upward from the upper end surface of 3141a, a transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a, and a transmission protrusion 3141f penetrating in the front-rear direction and transmitted And a transmission long hole 3141g extending in the direction in which the protrusion 3141f protrudes.

  A shaft pin (not shown) of the unit frame 3131 is inserted into the bearing hole 3141b of the lock member 3141. As a result, the lock member 3141 is attached so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction. The restricting portion 3141c is configured such that the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable ornament 3120 can abut from above. In the guide portion 3141d, the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 can be contacted from below. A surface of the stopper 3141e facing rightward in front view can be brought into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. The transmission long hole 3141g is inserted so that the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 is slidable.

  The transmission slider 3142 is formed of a metal strip extending vertically, and is formed slightly shorter than the height within the frame of the unit frame 3131. The transmission slider 3142 is attached to a part constituting the left side of the unit frame 3131 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The transmission slider 3142 protrudes in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the upper end, is formed with a cylindrical transmission pin 3142 a that is slidably inserted into the transmission elongated hole 3141 g of the lock member 3141, and a guide protrusion of the slide guide 3134 formed at the lower end. And a release contact portion 3142b that can come into contact with 3134b, and a locking portion 3142c that is formed at the upper end and is engaged with the lower end of the lock spring 3143. The release contact portion 3142 b of the transmission slider 3142 is located below the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147.

  The lock spring 3143 is a coil spring. The upper end of the lock spring 3143 is locked to the upper end of the portion constituting the left side of the unit frame 3131, and the lower end is locked to the locking portion 3142 c of the transmission slider 3142. The lock spring 3143 urges the transmission slider 3142 upward.

  The damper 3146 has a cylindrical damper body 3146a attached to the gear box 3145, a piston rod 3146b extending upward from the damper body 3146a, and a cylinder attached to the tip (upper end) of the piston rod 3146b. A contact receiving portion 3146c. Although not shown, the damper main body 3146a of the damper 3146 has a cylindrical space extending in the vertical direction (axial direction), and can slide in the vertical direction (axial direction) in the space. A piston, a spring urging the piston upward, and a viscous fluid filled in the space inside, and a piston rod 3146b extends outward from the piston.

  The damper 3146 is configured such that the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 can come into contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c at the upper end from above. The damper 3146 has an elastic force generated by a spring when the piston inside the damper main body 3146a moves downward via the piston rod 3146b by the back rear movable decorative body 3120 coming into contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c from above. The impact can be absorbed by the viscous resistance of the viscous fluid. When the back movable decorative body 3120 is not in contact with the contact receiving portion 3146c (free state), the damper 3146 has the upper surface of the contact receiving portion 3146c positioned above the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147. Yes.

  Next, the operation of the back movable movable effect unit 3110 will be described. As shown in FIG. 133, the back rear movable effect unit 3110 is in the state of the retracted position in which the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is in the highest position, and the lock member 3141 is viewed from the front. In FIG. 5, the lock position is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction. In this state, the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 is more than the restriction portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. Located above.

  Further, in a normal state, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back rear movable decoration body 3120 is detected by the decoration body detection sensor 3154 of the back back decoration production unit 3150, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected on the back side. This is detected by the upper slide detection sensor 3155 in the rear decoration effect unit 3150.

  In the lock member 3141 in the locked position, the main body 3141a is vertical, and the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end of the main body 3141a is horizontal. In addition, the lock member 3141 has a restricting portion 3141c protruding rightward from the upper end of the main body portion 3141a, located directly below the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120, and a stopper 3141e protruding upward. Is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144. The lock member 3141 is restricted from turning in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, since the stopper 3141e is in contact with the turning restriction member 3144.

  Since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 abuts against the rotation restricting member 3144, the rotation in the direction in which the transmission protrusion 3141f moves upward is restricted, and therefore the transmission length formed on the transmission protrusion 3141f. The transmission pin 3142a inserted into the hole 3141g does not move further upward. Accordingly, the transmission slider 3142 biased upward by the lock spring 3143 is restricted from further movement upward by the lock member 3141 at the lock position via the transmission pin 3142a.

  In this normal state, the slide guide 3134 regulates the downward movement (falling) of the back movable ornament 3120. In this state, if the slide guide 3134 moves down to some extent for some reason such as malfunction, the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 Since it abuts on 3141c, it is possible to restrict the downward movement (falling) of the lock member 3141 (the restricting portion 3141c). That is, in the normal state, the back-side movable decorative body 3120 is prevented from falling by the two of the slide guide 3134 and the lock member 3141.

  In this normal state, when the spiral shaft 3133 is rotated in a predetermined direction (here, a counterclockwise direction in a plan view) by the back rear drive motor 3135, the guide body 3134a screwed to the spiral shaft 3133 The slide guide 3134 moves downward. By moving the slide guide 3134 downward, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 that is in contact with the upper surface of the guide projection 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moves downward together with the slide guide 3134.

  When the lock protrusion 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 moving downward together with the slide guide 3134 comes into contact with the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is moved downward. As a result of the restriction, the movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 stops and enters the standby position (see FIG. 134). In this standby position state, the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is positioned below the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the back and back decoration effect unit 3150, and is in a non-detection state. On the other hand, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 is still being detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back rear decoration rendering unit 3150. Although illustration is omitted, the detection piece of the left slider 3122 is moved up and down so that the decorative movable body 3120 is detected by the decorative body detection sensor 3154 of the back rear decorative rendering unit 3150 between the retracted position and the standby position. It extends to.

  Thereafter, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3135, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is separated from the lower surface of the left slider 3122 of the back back movable decorative body 3120, and the back back movable decorative body 3120 is moved. Only the slide guide 3134 moves downward while keeping the standby position (see FIG. 135).

  In this state, the load of the back movable decorative body 3120 acts on the restricting portion 3141c protruding to the right of the lock member 3141. Therefore, the load applied to the restricting portion 3141c causes the lock member 3141 to move to the bearing hole 3141b. It tries to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. However, since the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 is in contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 from the left, the clockwise rotation is restricted, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120 is restricted. Does not deviate from the restricting portion 3141c.

  When the lower surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving downward contacts the upper surface of the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 (see FIG. 135), the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 It is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the lower side of the rear decoration effect unit 3150. In this state, the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134 b of the slide guide 3134 is lower than the height of the upper end of the protective stopper 3147.

  From this state, when the slide guide 3134 is further moved downward via the spiral shaft 3133 by the back rear drive motor 3135, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 presses the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward. The transmission slider 3142 slides downward against the urging force of the lock spring 3143.

  When the transmission slider 3142 slides downward, the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 also moves downward, so that the transmission long hole 3141g of the lock member 3141 in which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed downward by the transmission pin 3142a. The lock member 3141 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the bearing hole 3141b (see FIG. 136).

  When the lock member 3141 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the restricting portion 3141c with which the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 abuts from above is moved to the tip side (right end side). ) Moves upward and rotates to move to the left. That is, as the lock member 3141 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the back movable decorative body 3120 rises through the lock protrusion 3122a by the rising tip side of the restriction portion 3141c, and the tip of the restriction portion 3141c. The side slides to the left on the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a.

  Thereafter, when the lock member 3141 further rotates counterclockwise, and the tip of the restricting portion 3141c moves to the left from the left end of the lock protrusion 3122a of the back back movable decorative body 3120, the back back movable decorative body 3120 loses support from below by the restricting portion 3141c, and the back movable decorative body 3120 falls due to the acting gravity (see FIG. 136). That is, the lock member 3141 is from the lock position where the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c is in contact with the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a to the position where the tip of the restricting portion 3141c is to the left of the left end of the lock protrusion 3122a (release position). When turning in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the back movable ornament 3120, which has been restricted from being locked (locked), is unlocked, and the back movable ornament 3120 is in the standby position. Free fall from.

  The back movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen from the standby position is such that the lower surface of the left slider 3122 contacts the contact receiving portion 3146c of the damper 3146, and the piston rod 3146b sinks into the damper main body 3146a via the contact receiving portion 3146c. The impact of the fall of the back movable decorative body 3120 is absorbed by the spring and the viscous fluid in the damper main body 3146a. Then, before the lower surface of the left slider 3122 comes into contact with the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, the falling of the back movable decorative body 3120 stops, and the lower slider 3122 enters the lowered position.

  When the back movable decorative body 3120 is in the lowered position, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the left slider 3122 and the upper surface of the protective stopper 3147, and the upper surface of the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is It is located sufficiently below the lower surface of the slider 3122 (the upper end of the protective stopper 3147). That is, the back-back movable decorative body 3120 that has freely dropped from the standby position to the lowered position is configured not to contact any member other than the damper 3146.

  As a result, even if the large rear back movable decorative body 3120 that extends to the left and right at substantially the same length as the full width of the effect display device 1600 is freely dropped at the same height from the top to the bottom of the effect display device 1600, the damper 3146 Other members are not in contact with each other, and other members are not damaged by a large impact. Further, even if the damper 3146 cannot sufficiently stop the back movable decorative body 3120 that has fallen freely, the damper 3146 abuts against the protective stopper 3147 in a state in which the kinetic energy is attenuated. Thus, the falling of the back movable decorative body 3120 can be stopped without damaging the protective stopper 3147. Further, since the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 is positioned below the upper end of the protective stopper 3147, the back-back movable decorative body 3120 that has freely dropped does not come into contact with the guide protrusion 3134b, and can be moved back-and-back. Breakage of the slide guide 3134 due to the contact of the decorative body 3120 can be prevented.

  After the back movable movable body 3120 is dropped to the lowered position, the spiral guide 3133 is rotated in the opposite direction (here, the clockwise direction in plan view) by the back back drive motor 3135, and then the slide guide 3134. Rises. When the release protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 pushes the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 downward and the transmission slider 3142 is slid downward, the slide guide 3134 is lifted, and the transmission slider 3142 is locked spring. Since it is urged upward by 3143, the transmission slider 3142 slides upward together with the slide guide 3134 (guide protrusion 3134b).

  When the transmission slider 3142 slides upward, the transmission pin 3142a moves upward. Therefore, the transmission long hole 3141g of the lock member 3141 into which the transmission pin 3142a is inserted is pressed upward by the transmission pin 3142a, and the lock member 3141 is moved. The bearing hole 3141b is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. When the transmission slider 3142 further slides upward along with the slide guide 3134, the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144, and the lock member 3141 rotates further in the clockwise direction. In addition to being restricted, sliding upward of the transmission slider 3142 is restricted. As a result, the lock member 3141 returns from the unlocked position to the locked position.

  From this state, when the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the rear rear drive motor 3135, the upward movement of the transmission slider 3142 is restricted as described above, so that the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142 The guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moves upward, and only the slide guide 3134 moves upward. Then, the guide protrusion 3134b of the slide guide 3134 moving upward comes into contact with the left slider 3122 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 in the lowered position from below, and the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is interposed via the left slider 3122. Moves upward together with the slide guide 3134 (see FIG. 137).

  In this back movable movable effect unit 3110, after the back movable decorative body 3120 is dropped, it is moved upward from the lowered position by the slide guide 3134 so that the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is between the standby position and the lowered position. In the state where the rear back drive motor 3135 is rotated, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 can be arbitrarily moved up and down by the slide guide 3134 by appropriately changing the rotation direction of the back back drive motor 3135 (see FIG. 137). ).

  Then, when the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3135 and the back back movable decorative body 3120 moving upward from the lowered position together with the slide guide 3134 moves to a height near the standby position, The lock projection 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable ornament 3120 abuts on the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 in the locked position from below. From this state, when the lock protrusion 3122a (backward movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141 is inclined, so that the lock protrusion 3122a of the guide portion 3141d A leftward force is applied to the contacted portion.

  Therefore, as the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward, the lock member 3141 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing hole 3141b by a leftward force acting on the guide portion 3141d. (See FIG. 138). At this time, in the lock member 3141, the transmission protrusion 3141f protruding leftward from the base end portion of the main body 3141a moves downward due to the rotation in the counterclockwise direction. The lock member 3141 is counterclockwise against the biasing force of the lock spring 3143 acting in the clockwise direction via the transmission pin 3142a of the transmission slider 3142 inserted in the transmission long hole 3141g of the portion 3141f. To turn.

  Thereafter, when the lock protrusion 3122a further moves upward, the restricting portion 3141c and the guide portion 3141d protruding to the right from the main body portion 3141a are locked by the further rotation of the lock member 3141 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. It moves to the release position on the left side of the protrusion 3122a, and the upper surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward from the restricting portion 3141c. When the lock protrusion 3122a moves further upward and the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a moves upward from the tip of the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141, the contact with the guide portion 3141d is released. As a result, the lock member 3141 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and changes from the release position to the lock position. In a state in which the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position, the lower surface of the lock protrusion 3122a is located above the upper surface of the restricting portion 3141c.

  Then, the lock protrusion 3122a (backward movable decorative body 3120) is further moved upward by the slide guide 3134, and the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 is detected by the slide detection sensor 3155 on the upper side of the backside decoration effect unit 3150. Then, the driving of the back rear drive motor 3135 stops, and the back back movable decorative body 3120 stops at the retracted position. That is, the back movable ornament 3120 returns to the normal state.

  As described above, when the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the back rear drive motor 3135, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and the back back movable decorative body 3120 is put on standby. It can be freely dropped from the position to the lowered position. Thereby, a large play (back and rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can be shown to the player as a movable effect that freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage over the player. It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  Next, the back and back decoration effect unit 3150 of the back and back effect unit 3100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141 and the like. The back and rear decoration effect unit 3150 has a square-shaped frame-shaped unit base 3151 and a transparent flat plate-shaped back second light guide plate that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 and closes the frame of the unit base 3151. 3160, a transparent frame-like back and rear decorative lens 3152 which is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 in front of the back second light guide plate 3160, and is decorated so that the glass is broken, The back rear upper decorative substrate 3153 is provided between the unit base 3151 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 above the back second light guide plate 3160.

  The back rear decoration rendering unit 3150 has two decoration body detection sensors 3154 for detecting the detection piece of the left slider 3122 in the back back movable decoration body 3120 and two detection pieces of the slide guide 3134 of the back back movable mechanism 3130. A slide detection sensor 3155 and a condensing lens 3156 disposed below the back second light guide plate 3160 and extending left and right are provided.

  The back rear decoration rendering unit 3150 is attached between the unit base 3151 and the back rear decoration lens 3152 on the left and right outer sides of the back second light guide plate 3160, and faces the left and right side surfaces of the back second light guide plate 3160. A pair of left and right fifth pattern substrates 3171 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a capable of irradiating light are mounted, and between the unit base 3151 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 below the back second light guide plate 3160. A pair of sixth pattern substrates 3172 mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a which are attached and capable of irradiating light toward the lower surface of the back second light guide plate 3160.

  The unit base 3151 of the back decoration effect unit 3150 has an outer shape that is substantially the same size as the unit frame 3131. The back decorative lens 3152 is formed in a quadrilateral whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit frame 3131. The unit frame 3131 has a transparent flat plate-like decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inward) from the lower side and is formed in such a shape that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. The frame-like back decorative lens 3152 is formed in such a shape that the inside protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3151 in a front view, and the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. In the back decorative lens 3152, the edge of the portion protruding inward is formed obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction.

  The back upper decorative substrate 3153 is arranged in the left-right direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a that can irradiate light downward are mounted on the front surface. The back rear upper decorative substrate 3153 is in contact with the rear surface of the back rear decorative lens 3152 on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3153a are formed from the side of the frame-shaped back rear decorative lens 3152 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is irradiated inside.

  The decorative body detection sensor 3154 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the left fifth pattern substrate 3171 so that the detection piece of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 located between the retracted position and the standby position can be detected. ing. The two slide detection sensors 3155 detect the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 when the back movable decorative body 3120 is in the retracted position, and the upper part of the front surface of the left fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the slide guide 3134. The guide protrusion 3134b is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the fifth picture substrate 3171 on the left side so that the detection piece of the slide guide 3134 can be detected when the guide protrusion 3134b is at a height at which the guide protrusion 3134b comes into contact with the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142. It has been.

  The pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 is mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a arranged in the vertical direction on the rear surface. The pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are arranged on the front surface in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b for illuminating and decorating the back rear decorative lens 3152 are mounted thereon. The left fifth substrate 3171 is mounted such that a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a on the rear surface can irradiate light to the right, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface emit light to the right. It is mounted so that it can be irradiated. In the fifth pattern substrate 3171 on the left side, the rear surface of the rear decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are rearward inward from the side of the frame-shaped rear decorative lens 3152. The decorative lens 3152 is mounted so that light is emitted.

  Further, the right fifth substrate 3171 is mounted such that the rear light guide plate LEDs 3171a can irradiate light toward the left, and the front LEDs 3171b toward the left. It is mounted so that it can irradiate light. The rear surface of the back decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface of the right fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the plurality of LEDs 3171b on the front surface are inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back decorative lens 3152. The rear decoration lens 3152 is mounted so that light is emitted to the inside.

  In the sixth pattern substrate 3172, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a are mounted on the rear surface so as to be able to irradiate light upward, and are arranged in the left-right direction on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs 3172b capable of irradiating the light is mounted. The sixth pattern substrate 3172 can be incident on the inside of the back second light guide plate 3160 via the condenser lens 3156 when light is irradiated upward from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a on the rear surface. In the sixth pattern substrate 3172, the rear surface of the back decorative lens 3152 is in contact with the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3172b on the front surface are inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back decorative lens 3152 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is irradiated to the inside of 3152.

  With the above configuration, the back decorative lens 3152 causes the LED 3153a of the back back upper decorative substrate 3153, the LED 3171b of the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171, and the LED 3172b of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 to emit light. Can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding to the inside of the frame. Thereby, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the window glass is broken and the edges of the glass fragments remaining on the window frame are shining.

  The back second light guide plate 3160 includes a fifth pattern 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex fifth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the top and bottom directions. And a sixth pattern 3162 (see FIG. 141) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex sixth reflecting portions that reflect only forward. That is, when the back decoration rendering unit 3150 causes the light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 to emit light, the fifth pattern 3161 can be caused to emit light, and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 can be displayed. When the light is emitted, the sixth pattern 3162 can be displayed with light emission.

  The back second light guide plate 3160 has fine irregularities formed on an infinite number of fifth reflecting portions forming a fifth pattern 3161 and an infinite number of sixth reflecting portions forming a sixth pattern 3162. The light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171 and the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172 appear transparent and are displayed on the rear effect display device 1600 when not emitting light. It is possible to visually recognize the effect image or the like in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the fifth pattern 3161 is a pattern having a guide (message) for a player consisting of characters “Chance!” In a pattern like a sandstorm as a whole. As shown in FIG. 141, the sixth pattern 3162 is a pattern in which broken pieces of glass are scattered. The sixth pattern 3162 has fewer pieces of scattered glass than the third pattern 3211 of the back middle production unit 3200 described later.

  As shown in the drawing, the letters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are arranged at the center in the vertical direction, so that there are three at the center of the LED 3171a for the light guide plate arranged at the top and bottom of the left and right respectively. When only the light is emitted, only the characters “Chance!” Can be displayed. Alternatively, when the three light guide plate LEDs 3171a at the center in the vertical direction are turned off and the remaining light guide plate LEDs 3171a are caused to emit light, the entire display can be light-emitted in a state where the characters “Chance!” Are not visible (difficult to see). .

  It should be noted that the LEDs mounted on the back rear upper decorative substrate 3153, the pair of fifth pattern substrate 3171, and the sixth pattern substrate 3172 in the back rear decoration rendering unit 3150 are all side view type full color LEDs. .

  As shown in the figure, the back and back decoration effect unit 3150 of the present embodiment has a back and back top decoration substrate 3153, a pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171, and a sixth pattern substrate 3172, each of which has a second back side. The light guide plate 3160 is arranged in parallel with the surface. This can suppress an increase in the size in the front-rear direction in the back and back decoration production unit 3150, and the fifth and sixth patterns 3161 and 3162 and the back and back decoration lens 3152 of the back second light guide plate 3160 are illuminated. Can be made.

  Further, the back and back decoration rendering unit 3150 of the present embodiment arranges a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3172a for emitting and displaying the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 only on the lower side of the back second light guide plate 3160. The number of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a for emitting and displaying the fifth pattern 3161 is smaller, but a condensing lens 3156 is disposed between the light guide plate LED 3172a and the back second light guide plate 3160. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light spreading from the LED 3172a for the light guide plate from being collected and diffused unnecessarily, and even if the number is small, the sixth pattern 3162 can be displayed with light emission at the optimum brightness. Can do.

[5-9-2. Back middle production unit]
Next, the back middle production unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144 and the like. FIG. 142 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the back unit of the back unit as seen from the front after disassembling the main unit, and FIG. 142 (b) is an exploded view of the back unit of the back unit as the main member. And it is the disassembled perspective view seen from back. FIG. 143 is a front view showing a state in which the third pattern is light-decorated in the back effect unit, and FIG. 144 is a front view showing a state in which the fourth pattern is light-decorated in the back effect unit.

  The back middle production unit 3200 is attached to the front side of the back rear production unit 3100 inside the back box 3010. The inside production unit 3200 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have the same size as the inner shape of the back box 3010. The back middle production unit 3200 has a square-shaped frame-shaped unit base 3201 and a transparent flat plate-shaped back first light guide plate 3210 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and closes the frame of the unit base 3201. And a transparent frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202 that is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 in front of the back first light guide plate 3210 and is decorated so that the glass is broken. The back center left decorative substrate 3203 attached between the unit base 3201 and the back center decorative lens 3202 on the left side of the first light guide plate 3210 and the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged vertically. And a condensing lens 3204 extending.

  The back middle production unit 3200 is mounted between the unit base 3201 and the back middle decorative lens 3202 on the right outer side of the back first light guide plate 3210 and emits light toward the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. It is attached between the unit base 3201 and the back inner decorative lens 3202 on both the upper and lower sides of the back first light guide plate 3210 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a that can be irradiated are mounted. A pair of upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222 on which a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a capable of irradiating light toward both upper and lower surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210 are mounted.

  The unit base 3201 of the back effect unit 3200 has an outer shape that is substantially the same size as the unit frame 3131 of the back effect unit 3100. The unit base 3201 has a transparent flat plate-shaped decorative lens portion that protrudes upward (inward) from the lower side and is formed in such a shape that the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. The back inner decorative lens 3202 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the unit base 3201. The frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202 is formed in such a shape that the inner side protrudes into the frame of the unit base 3201 when viewed from the front, and the window glass is broken and glass fragments remain in the window frame. The back inner decorative lens 3202 is formed such that the edge of the portion protruding inward is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction.

  The back center left decorative substrate 3203 is arranged in the vertical direction, and a plurality of LEDs 3203a capable of emitting light toward the right side are mounted on the front surface. The back center left decorative substrate 3203 is in contact with the rear surface of the back center decorative lens 3202 on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3203a on the front surface are inward from the side of the frame-shaped back center decorative lens 3202 toward the inside. It is mounted so that light is irradiated to the inside of 3202.

  The third pattern substrate 3221 has a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a mounted on the rear surface so as to be able to irradiate light to the left, and is arranged in the vertical direction on the front and is directed to the left. A plurality of LEDs 3221b capable of emitting light are mounted. The third pattern substrate 3221 can be incident on the back first light guide plate 3210 via the condenser lens 3204 when light is emitted leftward from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a on the rear surface. In the third pattern substrate 3221, the rear surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface, and the plurality of LEDs 3221b on the front surface are inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202 to the inner side. It is mounted so that light is irradiated to the inside of 3202.

  The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 is mounted with a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 are arranged in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b for mounting and decorating the back inner decorative lens 3202 are mounted. The upper fourth pattern substrate 3222 is mounted such that a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a on the rear surface can emit light downward, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface can emit light downward. Has been implemented. The upper surface of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 is in contact with the rear surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 on the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are back inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202. The decorative lens 3202 is mounted so that light is emitted.

  The lower fourth substrate 3222 has a plurality of rear light guide plate LEDs 3222a mounted so as to be able to emit light upward, and a plurality of front LEDs 3222b light upward. It is mounted so that it can be irradiated. In the lower fourth pattern substrate 3222, the rear surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 is in contact with the front surface, and a plurality of LEDs 3222b on the front surface are inward from the side surface side of the frame-shaped back inner decorative lens 3202. It is mounted so that light is irradiated to the inside of the back inner decorative lens 3202.

  With the above configuration, the back center decorative lens 3202 causes the LED 3203a of the back center left decorative substrate 3203, the LED 3221b of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the LED 3222b of the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 to emit light. Can be reflected forward by the inclined portion of the edge protruding to the inside of the frame. Thereby, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the window glass is broken and the edges of the glass fragments remaining on the window frame are shining.

  The back first light guide plate 3210 includes a third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex third reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and light from the top and bottom directions. And a fourth pattern 3212 (see FIG. 144) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex fourth reflecting portions that reflect only the light forward. That is, when the back effect unit 3200 causes the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221 to emit light, the third pattern 3211 can be caused to emit light, and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 emits light. If it does, the 4th pattern 3212 can be light-emitted and displayed.

  The back first light guide plate 3210 has an infinite number of concave and convex portions formed in innumerable third reflecting portions forming the third pattern 3211 and innumerable fourth reflecting portions forming the fourth pattern 3212. The light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221 and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222 appear transparent when not illuminated, and the back of the rear back and rear rendering unit 3100. The effect image displayed on the rear movable decorative body 3120 and the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  As shown in FIG. 143, the third pattern 3211 is a pattern that is split into a plurality of pieces after radial and concentric cracks have entered the glass. Compared to the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the back decorative effect production unit 3150, the third pattern 3211 is drawn with many pieces of scattered glass. As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend obliquely upward and obliquely downward.

  As shown in FIG. 144, the fourth pattern 3212 is formed so that the diagonally extending stripes correspond to the respective light guide plate LEDs 3222a mounted on the upper and lower fourth pattern substrates 3222. That is, when one light guide plate LED 3222a emits light, the center of the back first light guide plate 3210 in the vertical direction starts from the upper or lower side of the back first light guide plate 3210 closest to the light emitting plate LED 3222a. Two light streaks (V-shaped light streaks) extending obliquely so as to be separated from each other toward the head are decorated with light emission.

  Since the fourth pattern 3212 is farther from the light guide plate LED 3222a as it goes to the center in the vertical direction of the back first light guide plate 3210, the brightness of the V-shaped light streaks It becomes darker toward the center in the vertical direction. As a result, when the fourth pattern 3212 is viewed from the front (player side), the light stripes appear to extend rearward toward the center in the vertical direction of the back first light guide plate 3210, and the light is three-dimensional. It is possible to make an illusion that the light is emitted from the back, and to enjoy the light emission effect by the back first light guide plate 3210.

  Note that the LEDs mounted on the back center left decorative substrate 3203, the third pattern substrate 3221, and the pair of fourth pattern substrates 3222 in the back center effect unit 3200 are all side view type full color LEDs.

  As shown in the figure, the back middle effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment includes a back center left decorative board 3203, a third picture board 3221, and a pair of fourth picture boards 3222, each of which faces the first and second plates. It is arranged in parallel with the surface of the optical plate 3210. Thereby, an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction in the back middle production unit 3200 can be suppressed, and the third pattern 3211 and the fourth pattern 3212 of the back first light guide plate 3210, the back inner decorative lens 3202, and the like are decorated with light emission. be able to.

  In the back middle production unit 3200 of the present embodiment, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a for emitting and displaying the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged only on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. The number of LEDs is smaller than that of the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3222a for displaying and displaying the fourth picture 3212. A condensing lens 3204 is disposed between the light guide plate LEDs 3221a and the back first light guide plate 3210. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light spreading from the LED 3221a for the light guide plate from being condensed and diffused unnecessarily, and even if the number is small, the third picture 3211 can be displayed with light emission at the optimum brightness. it can.

[5-9-3. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 145 to 150. FIG. 145 is a front view of the back right effect unit in the back unit. FIG. 146 (a) is a perspective view of the back right effect unit in the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 146 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the back right effect unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member. FIG. 147 is a front view of the back right effect unit that emphasizes the back right movable mechanism in a normal state in which the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated upward and the bearing slider is positioned at the rising end. It is. FIG. 148 is a front view of the back-right effect unit showing the state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the descending end with the back-right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. FIG. 149 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing a state where the tip of the back right movable decorative body is rotated downward from the state of FIG. 148. FIG. 150 is a front view of the back right effect unit showing the state in which the bearing slider is positioned at the rising end with the back right movable decorative body as it is from the state of FIG. 149.

  The back right production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper right part of the front surface of the back middle production unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back right effect unit 3300 includes a back right movable effect unit 3310 attached to the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200, and a back front right decorative body unit 3350 attached to the front surface of the back right effect effect unit 3310. I have.

  First, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The back right movable effect unit 3310 extends with a length shorter than the full width of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape that looks like an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. A movable decorative body 3320 and a back right movable mechanism 3330 which is attached so as to be rotatable about the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction are provided.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 extends in the left-right direction and is mounted on the rear side of the decorative body main body 3321 having the same size as that of the decorative body main body 3321 and the decorative body main body 3321 having a nap. A transparent flat decorative body base 3322, and a back right movable decorative body decorative board 3323 mounted between the decorative body base 3322 and the decorative body main body 3321 and having a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the front and rear surfaces (see FIG. 145).

  The decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is formed in a shape imitating nata, and the front end of the left end is the front end of the nata and the lower side is the nata blade. In the decorative body main body 3321, the lower half of the vertical direction is formed to be transparent. In addition, the decorative body 3321 is formed with a crack-shaped decoration that spreads radially around a central portion in the vertical direction near the tip.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 includes a shaft hole 3324 penetrating in the front-rear direction on the base end side which is the right end side in a front view of the decorative body main body 3321 and the decorative body base 3322, and a lower side on the left side of the shaft hole 3324. And a cylindrical decorative body side link pin 3325 projecting rearward in the vicinity.

  The back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 includes a plurality of central LEDs 3323a that irradiate light forward on a front portion of the front surface of the decorative body main body 3321 on the rear side of the center portion of the crack pattern extending radially. The central LED 3323a is a high brightness LED. Further, the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323 includes a plurality of peripheral LEDs 3323b that irradiate light in a direction along the surface of the substrate on the front surface and the rear surface.

  The back right movable decorative body 3320 can be illuminated and decorated so that the central portion of the crack pattern of the decorative body 3321 shines by appropriately emitting the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323. By emitting the peripheral LED 3323b of the decorative body decoration substrate 3323, the outer peripheral edge and the crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 can be illuminated and decorated.

  The back right movable mechanism 3330 of the back right movable effect unit 3310 extends up and down and is attached to the upper right part of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200, and about 3/4 of the total height from the bottom of the unit base 3331. A bearing having a cylindrical bearing pin 3332a that is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction at a height portion and that projects in the front-rear direction and is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 3324 of the back right movable decorative body 3320. And a slider 3332.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 has a back right drive motor 3333 attached to the upper portion of the unit base 3331 with the rotation axis directed in the front-rear direction, and a spur gear shape attached to the rotation shaft of the back right drive motor 3333. Motor gear 3334, a transmission gear 3335a projecting in the front-rear direction, and a detection piece (not shown) projecting in the front-rear direction are engaged with the motor gear 3334 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3331. And a spur gear-like link drive gear 3335.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at a position obliquely lower right of the link drive gear 3335 when viewed from the front, and in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. A transmission link gear 3336 having a transmission arm 3336a that extends and abuts against a transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335, and a transmission gear portion 3336b that extends in an arc shape around the rotation axis, and a unit A spur gear-shaped first gear is mounted on the base 3331 below the rotation axis of the transmission link gear 3336 so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction and meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. A spur gear that rotates integrally with the first gear portion 3337a and the first gear portion 3337a and has a larger diameter than the first gear portion 3337a. The second gear portion 3337B, and to have two-stage gear 3337 that has, and a.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is formed on the rack main body 3338a and the rack main body 3338a, and the second gear portion 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337. A rack gear portion 3338b that linearly extends in the vertical direction and a columnar movable mechanism side link pin 3338c that protrudes in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the rack body 3338a, A link arm that extends vertically and whose upper end side is rotatably inserted with the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 and whose lower end side is rotatably inserted with the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c of the slide rack 3338. 3339.

  Further, the back right movable mechanism 3330 is attached to the unit base 3331, and can be moved back right by detecting a shock absorbing rubber 3340 that can come into contact with the back right movable decorative body 3320 and a detection piece of the link drive gear 3335. Two movable position detection sensors (not shown) for detecting the position of the decorative body 3320 are provided.

  Next, the operation of the back right movable effect unit 3310 by the back right movable mechanism 3330 will be described. As shown in FIG. 147, the back right movable effect unit 3310 has the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 at the rising end and the bearing pin 3332 a of the bearing slider 3332 in the normal state. The back right movable decorative body 3320 to which the proximal end side is rotatably attached is inclined so that the distal end side is located higher than the proximal end side (initial state). Further, in this state, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is such that the center of the decorative body side link pin 3325 is located slightly above the center of the shaft hole 3324, and the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is One eye is detected by a movable position detection sensor.

  In this normal state, the transmission projection 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is located slightly above the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335 on the right side of the front view, and the transmission of the transmission link gear 3336 is transmitted to the transmission projection 3335a. The arm 3336a is in contact with the right side. More specifically, the rotation center point of the transmission link gear 3336, the transmission projection 3335a, and the transmission arm with respect to the straight line connecting the rotation center point of the link drive gear 3335 and the contact point between the transmission projection 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a. The straight line connecting the contact point with 3336a is orthogonal. As a result, the force acting on the transmission projection 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a passes through the center of rotation of the link drive gear 3335, so that the link drive gear 3335 rotates even if the force acts on the transmission projection 3335a from the transmission arm 3336a. No, the transmission link gear 3336 does not rotate in the direction in which the transmission arm 3336a moves to the left in the front view (counterclockwise direction in the front view). That is, in a normal state, the link drive gear 3335 restricts (locks) rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  Incidentally, since the bearing pin 3332a is inserted into the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320 acts on the bearing slider 3332 via the bearing pin 3332a. doing. In a normal state, the bearing slider 3332 is positioned at the rising end, and therefore, a force is applied to the bearing slider 3332 to move downward due to the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  On the other hand, the back right movable decorative body 3320 has a shaft hole 3324 (bearing pin 3332a) due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 because the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is inserted into the shaft hole 3324 on the proximal end side. ), The force to rotate in the direction in which the tip side moves downward (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) is acting. A force to rotate counterclockwise due to the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 acts on the movable mechanism side link pin 3338c from the decorative body side link pin 3325 via the link arm 3339. That is, a force for moving the slide rack 3338 downward via the link arm 3339 is applied by a force for the back right movable decorative body 3320 to rotate counterclockwise by its own weight.

  The force to move the slide rack 3338 downward is transmitted to the two-stage gear 3337 by the rack gear section 3338b of the slide rack 3338 via the second gear section 3337b meshing with the rack gear section 3338b. The gear 3337 acts to rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. The second gear 3337 has a force acting to rotate the second gear 3337 in the clockwise direction because the first gear portion 3337a meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336. The transmission link gear 3336 acts to rotate counterclockwise via the transmission gear portion 3336b. That is, the transmission link gear 3336 attempts to rotate counterclockwise by the force that the back right movable decorative body 3320 attempts to rotate counterclockwise due to its own weight.

  In the normal state, the transmission link gear 3336 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3336b of the transmission link gear 3336 because the rotation in the counterclockwise direction is locked by the link driving gear 3335 as described above. The two-stage gear 3337 is not rotated, and the slide rack 3338 is not moved downward by the rack gear section 3338b meshing with the second gear section 3337b of the two-stage gear 3337.

  Thus, since the downward movement of the slide rack 3338 is restricted, the entire link arm 3339 having the lower end attached to the slide rack 3338 does not move downward. Therefore, the back right movable decorative body 3320 tries to rotate in the counterclockwise direction so that the tip side moves downward about the upper end side (the decorative body side link pin 3325) of the link arm 3339. Since the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side of the movable decorative body 3320 is located at the rising end, the counterclockwise rotation about the decorative body side link pin 3325 is restricted, and the back right The movable decorative body 3320 is maintained in an oblique state in which the distal end side is located above the proximal end side.

  In this normal state, when the link drive gear 3335 is rotated clockwise by the back right drive motor 3333 via the motor gear 3334, the transmission protrusion 3335a of the link drive gear 3335 is moved to the left and downward. It will revolve in the direction of movement. The transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the clockwise direction and changes its position, so that the transmission link gear 3336 in which a counterclockwise force is applied by the weight of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is transmitted. As the projection 3335a slides relative to the transmission arm 3336a, the portion where the transmission arm 3336a and the transmission projection 3335a are in contact with each other is changed to rotate counterclockwise (see FIG. 148). ).

  When the transmission link gear 3336 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the slide rack 3338 moves downward via the two-stage gear 3337, and the link arm 3339 moves downward together with the slide rack 3338. Will be. Since the load of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is supported by the bearing slider 3332 attached to the base end side, when the link arm 3339 moves downward, the bearing slider 3332 also moves via the back right movable decorative body 3320. It will move downward together.

  As a result, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the normal state (initial state) while the tip side remains high until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end. . That is, in the state where the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves downward from the initial state and the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end (first state), the distal end side is higher than the proximal end side as in the initial state. It is in an oblique state.

  Then, after the bearing slider 3332 reaches the descending end, when the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated clockwise by the back right drive motor 3333, the slide rack is connected via the transmission link gear 3336 and the two-stage gear 3337. 3338 will move further downward. By the downward movement of the slide rack 3338, the decorative body side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pulled downward via the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pivoted on the base end side shaft. Around the hole 3324, the tip end side is rotated in the counterclockwise direction so as to move downward (see FIG. 149).

  When the link drive gear 3335 is continuously rotated clockwise by the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decorative body 3320 further rotates counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3324, and the lower surface thereof is By abutting against the shock absorbing rubber 3340 attached to the base 3331, further rotation in the counterclockwise direction is restricted, and an oblique state in which the distal end side is lower than the proximal end side (second In the state), the back right movable decorative body 3320 stops. At this time, the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 is detected by the second movable position detection sensor, and the drive of the back right drive motor 3333 is stopped based on the detection by the second movable position detection sensor.

  After the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, the back right drive motor 3333 rotates the link drive gear 3335 in a counterclockwise direction in front view that is the opposite direction to the above. When the transmission protrusion 3335a revolves in the counterclockwise direction together with the link drive gear 3335, the transmission link gear 3336 rotates in the clockwise direction by the transmission arm 3336a in contact with the transmission protrusion 3335a, and the two-stage gear 3337 Thus, the slide rack 3338 moves upward.

  When the slide rack 3338 moves upward from the descending end, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pressed upward by the link arm 3339, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332. It becomes. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward with the tip end side being lowered until the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end. Accordingly, the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves upward together with the bearing slider 3332 from the second state, and in the state where the bearing slider 3332 reaches the rising end (third state), similarly to the second state, It is in an oblique state where the distal end side is lower than the proximal end side (see FIG. 150).

  When the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated counterclockwise by the back right drive motor 3333, the transmission link gear 3336 is further rotated clockwise and the slide rack 3338 is moved upward via the two-stage gear 3337. The decorative arm side link pin 3325 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is pressed upward by the link arm 3339 attached to the slide rack 3338, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 passes through the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side. It will rotate in the clockwise direction around the center.

  After that, when the detection piece of the link drive gear 3335 rotated counterclockwise by the back right drive motor 3333 is detected by the first movable position detection sensor, the back right drive motor 3333 is driven. The rotation of the link drive gear 3335 is stopped by being stopped. In this state, the bearing slider 3332 and the slide rack 3338 of the back right movable mechanism 3330 are located at the rising end, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 whose base end side is rotatably attached to the bearing pin 3332a of the bearing slider 3332 is provided. The tip end side is inclined so as to be located above the base end side. That is, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is returned to the normal state (initial state).

  In a normal state, when the back right drive motor 3333 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in the front view), the link drive gear 3335 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, whereby the transmission protrusion 3335a. Revolves so that the transmission projection 3335a and the transmission arm 3336a come out of contact with each other, and the restriction of the rotation of the transmission link gear 3336 in the counterclockwise direction by the transmission projection 3335a is immediately released. The As a result, the back right movable decorative body 3320 changes (moves) from the initial state to the second state all at once.

  When the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the second state, as shown in FIG. 149, the transmission arm 3336a of the transmission link gear 3336 is located within the revolution range of the transmission projection 3335a in the link driving gear 3335. When the link drive gear 3335 is further rotated counterclockwise by the right drive motor 3333, the revolving transmission projection 3335a comes into contact with the transmission arm 3336a from below. When the transmission projection 3335a further revolves counterclockwise, the transmission projection 3335a rotates the transmission link gear 3336 in the clockwise direction via the transmission arm 3336a. The movable decorative body 3320 returns from the second state to the initial state through the third state.

  In this way, by driving the back right drive motor 3333, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is rotated about the shaft hole 3324 on the base end side, thereby swinging the material imitated by the back right movable decorative body 3320. It is possible to show the player a movable performance as if it was lowered. Further, the movement of moving the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state through the first state is different from the movement of returning from the second state to the initial state through the third state. It is possible to show the player a plurality of movements and to make the player hard to get bored.

  Further, when the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the initial state to the second state in which the swing is swung down, the base end side (shaft hole 3324) having the rotation center is moved downward by the bearing slider 3332. Therefore, compared to the case where the base end side is not moved downward, the back right movable decorative body 3320 can appear more on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the back right movable decorative body 3320 is made conspicuous. be able to. Further, when the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved to the position of the initial state, the base end side where the rotational center is located is moved upward by the bearing slider 3332, so the rotational center of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is moved. Moves to the upper side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, so that the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state is less likely to block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a display area that can be visually recognized well. It can be made wider, and the player can more enjoy the effect image.

  Next, the front right decorative body unit 3350 of the back right effect unit 3300 will be described. The front right decorative body unit 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3331 of the rear right movable mechanism 3330 in front of the rear right movable decorative body 3320, and extends in the vertical direction. A transparent flat front right decorative body 3352 having a shape like a broken glass attached to the front surface of the body base 3351, and attached between the front front right decorative body 3352 and the decorative body base 3351. And a front right decorative board 3353 (see FIG. 145) on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the left are mounted on the front surface, and attached to the lower rear surface of the front right decorative body 3352 The magnetic sensor 3003 is provided.

  The front right decorative body 3352 extends vertically in an arc shape so as to be positioned leftward as it goes upward. The front right decorative body 3352 is formed in a jagged shape such that the glass is broken on the left side, and a cracked decoration is formed on the front surface. The back right decorative body unit 3350 can light up and decorate the left side edge and the crack pattern by causing the LED mounted on the back front right decorative board 3353 to emit light.

[5-9-4. Backward production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The back effect unit 3400 is attached to the upper left side of the front surface of the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The back top production unit 3400 is formed in a shape that looks like an item in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and extends in the left-right direction, and the left top of the back top movable decorative body 3410. A back-side movable mechanism 3420 that can be rotated about an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the base end side, which is the side, and is attached to the front surface of the back-direction production unit 3200. The back movable decorative body 3410 of the back top rendering unit 3400 is disposed in front of the back back movable decorative body 3120 and behind the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  The back movable decorative body 3410 extends in the left-right direction and is mounted on the rear side of the decorative body main body 3411 having the same size as the decorative body main body 3411 and the decorative body main body 3411 extending in the lateral direction. A transparent flat decorative body base 3412, a back movable decorative body decorative board 3413 mounted between the decorative body base 3412 and the decorative body main body 3411 and mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs on the rear surface, and a decorative body A cylindrical shaft pin (not shown) that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the base end side of the base 3412, and a spur gear-like decorative body gear (not shown) that rotates integrally with the decorative body base 3412 and that is centered on the shaft pin. (Omitted).

  The decorative body main body 3411 of the back movable decorative body 3410 is formed in a shape that combines broken glass so as to imitate the nata, and the upper side and the lower side are formed in a jagged manner. The entire decorative body 3411 is transparent. The decorative body main body 3411 is inclined such that the peripheral surfaces of the upper side and the lower side of the jagged edge protrude from the front side, and a decoration recessed in a crack pattern is formed on the front side.

  The decorative body base 3412 has an outer shape that is the same as that of the decorative body main body 3411, and is inclined so that the peripheral surfaces of the upper side and the lower side are positioned forward toward the end side. The back movable ornament decorative substrate 3413 is mounted such that a plurality of LEDs can irradiate light in a direction along the surface of the ornament base 3412. The back movable decoration body 3410 can emit and decorate the peripheral edge of the decoration body main body 3411 by causing the LED of the back movable decoration body decoration board 3413 to emit light.

  The back movable mechanism 3420 is attached to the front surface of the back middle production unit 3200, and the unit base 3421 to which the shaft pin of the back movable decoration body 3410 is rotatably attached, and is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3421, and is a rotation shaft. Projecting rearwardly, a backside drive motor 3422 and a transmission gear (not shown) that is rotated by transmission from the backside drive motor 3422 and meshes with a decorative body gear of the backside movable decorative body 3410 And.

  The back top production unit 3400 is in a retracted position in which the back top movable decorative body 3410 extends horizontally in a normal state, and the back top drive motor 3422 rotates the transmission gear so that the back top movable decorative body 3400 is in a retracted position. The body 3410 can be in a state of an appearance position where the distal end side, which is the right end side, is positioned below the proximal end side and extends obliquely.

[5-9-5. Bottom production unit]
Next, the back bottom production unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The back lower effect unit 3500 is attached to the center in the left-right direction at the lower front of the back middle effect unit 3200 in the back box 3010. The under back direction production unit 3500 has a back bottom movable decorative body 3510 with a flower having a plurality of petals, and a back bottom movable ornament 3510 attached to the lower front portion of the back middle directing unit 3200 to move the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the vertical direction. A mechanism 3520.

  The under back movable decorative body 3510 is three-dimensionally formed and is mounted with a decorative body main body 3511 with a flower having a plurality of petals and a plurality of full color LEDs for emitting and decorating the decorative body main body 3511. And a lower movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512. The back lower movable decorative body 3510 is disposed in front of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  The lower back movable mechanism 3520 is attached to the front surface of the back middle production unit 3200 and is attached to the lower part of the decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 so as to be movable in the vertical direction. A back lower drive motor 3522 attached to the rear surface and having a rotating shaft protruding forward, and revolving around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction by driving the back lower drive motor 3522 to move the decorative body main body 3511 in the vertical direction. And an elevating drive gear (not shown) having a drive pin.

  In the normal state, the back lower direction production unit 3500 is in the lowered position in which the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is lowered most, and the drive pin on which the lifting drive gear revolves is located at the bottom dead center. In this state, when the drive pin is revolved by rotating the lifting drive gear by the backside drive motor 3522, the backside movable decorative body 3510 is raised together with the upward movement of the drive pin that revolves. When the drive pin reaches the top dead center, the drive of the back and bottom drive motor 3522 is stopped, and the rotation of the lift drive gear (revolution of the drive pin) is stopped. Thereby, it will be in the state of the raise position where back back movable decoration object 3510 moved to the uppermost part.

[5-9-6. Front production unit]
Next, the back front production unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. The front front effect unit 3600 is formed in a C shape along the inner shape of the game area 5a, and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The front rendering unit 3600 is formed in a substantially C shape in a front view, the outer periphery is formed so as to follow the inner shape of the game area 5a, and the inner periphery has fragments left on the window frame. A transparent flat plate-like front decorative body 3601 formed in a jagged shape like a broken glass, and a flat decorative base 3602 attached to the rear side of the front decorative body 3601 And a front decorative board 3603 that is mounted between the decorative base 3602 and the front decorative body 3601 and for decorating the front decorative body 3601 with light emission.

  The front effect unit 3600 guides the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 of the front unit 2000 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 downward to be discharged onto the board holder 1200. A guideway (not shown) is provided. In addition, the front effect unit 3600 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001, and a first start port that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. A sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism applied in the game area 5a are attached.

  The front front decoration unit 3601 of the front front production unit 3600 is inclined so that the inner peripheral surface protrudes the rear side from the front side, and a decoration recessed in a crack pattern is formed on the front side. . The back front decorative substrate 3603 is composed of a back front upper decorative substrate 3603a, a back front left decorative substrate 3603b, and a back front lower decorative substrate 3603c (see FIG. 127). The back decorative board 3603 is mounted such that a plurality of LEDs face the C-shaped central side. The front front rendering unit 3600 can light-decorate the inner peripheral surface of the front front decorative body 3601 and the crack pattern by causing a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front front decorative board 3603 to emit light.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 159 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back and back movable decorative body of the back and back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the standby position. 152 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back movable decorative body is dropped from the state of FIG. 151 to the lowered position. FIG. 153 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear back movable decorative body is moved in the vertical direction between the standby position and the lowered position by the slide guide from the state of FIG. 152. FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit in the back unit as moved from the initial state to the first state. FIG. 155 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 154 to the second state. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back right movable decorative body is moved from the state of FIG. 155 to the third state.

  FIG. 157 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back movable decoration body of the back effect unit in the back unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. FIG. 158 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back bottom movable decorative body of the back bottom effect unit in the back unit is moved from the lowered position to the raised position. FIG. 159 shows the back movable movable body of the back stage production unit in the lower position, the back right movable decorative body of the back right production unit to the second state, and the back movable movable body of the back production unit appears. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the back and bottom movable decorative body of the back and bottom effect unit is moved to the raised position.

  The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a start unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side slope 2300, a center accessory 2500, and the like. Since it is formed transparently, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 114, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the rear unit 3000 are passed through them. The front right decorative body 3352 of the back right rendering unit 3300, the back front decorative body 3601 of the back front rendering unit 3600, and the like can be seen well.

  In this normal state, the back-right movable decorative body 3320 of the back-right effect unit 3300 is positioned in the initial state, and is located in the lower part positioned below the inside of the C-shaped front decorative body 3601. The part faces forward. In addition, the back upper movable decorative body 3410 of the back upper effect unit 3400 disposed behind the back right movable decorative body 3320 is in the retracted position, and is positioned below the back right movable decorative body 3320. A part of the lower part is facing forward.

  Further, the back rear movable decorative body 3120 of the back rear rendering unit 3100 disposed behind the back top movable decorative body 3410 is in the retracted position, and is positioned below the back top movable decorative body 3410. A small part of the tip imitating Nata is facing forward. In other words, in the normal state, the rear back movable decorative body 3120 is hardly visible. In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 of the lower back direction rendering unit 3500 is in a lowered position, and a part of the portion located above the inside of the C-shaped front front decorative body 3601 is Looking forward.

  The game board 5 provides a rear effect of the back unit 3000 in accordance with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. The rear back movable effect unit 3110 of the unit 3100, the back right movable effect unit 3310, the back upper effect unit 3400, and the lower back effect unit 3500 of the back right effect unit 3300 perform predetermined movable effects.

  Specifically, as a movable effect using the back rear movable effect unit 3110 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 151, the back rear drive motor 3135 is driven via a slide guide 3134. Then, the large back and back movable decorative body 3120 extending in the left-right direction so as to straddle the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is in a normal state (with the state of the retracted position), and the lock protrusion 3122a is the restriction portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. It is reciprocated in the up-down direction between the state of the standby position in contact with. In this movable effect, most of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 cannot be seen well from the player side, so that something can be felt as if it is shaking up and down at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. It can be expected that something will happen to the player.

  Then, the slide guide 3134 is moved downward by the rear back drive motor 3135 and brought into contact with the release contact portion 3142b of the transmission slider 3142, and then the release contact portion 3142b is pressed downward by the slide guide 3134. Then, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position, and the back movable movable body 3120 in the standby position at the top of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the front view is displayed at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. To the lowered position (see FIG. 152). Thereby, a large play (back and rear movable decorative body 3120) straddling the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction can be shown to the player as a movable effect that freely falls while blocking the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and generate an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) in which the player has an advantage over the player. It can be thought that it is, and the expectation with respect to a game can be raised.

  Thereafter, the back guide drive motor 3135 raises the slide guide 3134 to return the back back movable decorative body 3120 in the lowered position to the normal retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 153, by appropriately changing the rotation direction of the back rear drive motor 3135, the back back movable decorative body 3120 is moved up and down the display screen of the effect display device 1600 through the slide guide 3134. You may make it reciprocate up and down near the center. Accordingly, the back and back movable decorative body 3120 moves up and down while blocking the vertical center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the back and back movable decorative body 3120 and the back The movable decorative body 3120 can be noted and the movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 can be enjoyed.

  As a movable effect using the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. Move from the state state to the position of the first state. As a result, the entire back right movable decorative body 3320 is positioned below the inside of the C-shaped front front decorative body 3601, so that the player can see the entire contents of the back right movable decorative body 3320 imitating Nata. Therefore, the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the nata (back right movable decorative body 3320) is swung down thereafter, and the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  Then, the back right drive motor 3333 is further driven to move the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the position in the first state to the position in the second state (see FIG. 155). As a result, it is possible to show the player a moveable effect as if the nata being deceived by the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down. Can be attracted strongly to the back right movable ornament 3320, and it can be thought that there is something good that the Nata is swinging down. Can be raised.

  Thereafter, the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the second state is returned to the initial state through the third state by the back right drive motor 3333. When the back right movable decorative body 3320 moves from the second state position to the third state position, as shown in FIG. 156, the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down in the second state. In this state, the player moves upward, and from the third state to the initial state, the back right movable decorative body 3320 rotates about the base end side so that the tip end side of the nut moves upward. On the other hand, it is possible to recognize that the movement is clearly different from when the nata is swung down, and the reverse of returning to the initial state with a different movement from the initial movement from the initial state to the second state. The movement of the right movable ornament 3320 can be enjoyed.

  Note that the back right movable effect unit 3310 may move the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the initial state to the second state at once, without temporarily stopping in the first state. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player.

  As a movable effect using the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 157, the back movable decorative body 3410 in the retracted position is driven to the base end side (left end by driving the back upper drive motor 3422). The display position of the effect display device 1600 is set to the front appearance position. Thereby, the back movable decoration body 3410 that imitates Nata can show the player a movable effect that appears in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The back movable ornament 3410 is formed as if the glazed nata is composed of broken pieces of glass, so that it can be seen integrally with the back front ornament 3601 in the normal retracted position. Since it is difficult to notice the presence, it is possible to make the player appear as if a part of the front decorative body 3601 has moved by moving to the appearance position, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  As a movable effect using the lower back effect unit 3500 in the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 behind the C-shaped back front decorative body 3601 rises, so that the flowers that are trapped by the lower back movable decorative body 3510 can be easily seen. It can be thought that there is something good, and it can raise the expectation for the game.

  Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the rear rear movable production unit 3110 of the rear rear production unit 3100, the rear right movable production unit 3310 of the rear right production unit 3300, the rear upper production unit 3400, and the lower rear production unit 3500. It is also possible to perform a movable effect by appropriately combining the movable effects as described above using. For example, first, the back movable ornament 3410 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the back right movable ornament 3320 is moved from the initial state to the second state, and the back movable ornament 3120 is further moved. After falling to the lowered position, the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is moved to the raised position (see FIG. 159). With this movable effect, since all the movable decorative bodies are positioned in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, it is certain that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) will occur for the player. And can increase the interest of the player. Further, in this movable effect, a plurality of movable decorative objects move sequentially to the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, after one movable decorative object moves to the front of the display screen, the next movable decorative object. Depending on whether or not the body moves to the front of the display screen, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player's expectation can be enhanced, and the player can be made less tired.

  Next, the main light emission effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 166 and the like. FIG. 160 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the first pattern is light-decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 161 is a front view of the game board shown in a state where the second pattern is light-decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit. FIG. 162 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the third pattern is illuminated and decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle production unit. FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the fourth pattern is light-decorated on the back first light guide plate of the back middle production unit. FIG. 164 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the fifth pattern is light-decorated on the back second light guide plate of the back back decoration production unit in the back back production unit. FIG. 165 is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the sixth pattern is light-decorated on the second back light guide plate of the back back decoration effect unit in the back back effect unit. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing an animation-like light emission effect by a plurality of patterns using the front light guide plate, the back first light guide plate, and the back second light guide plate. FIG. 167 is a front view of the gaming board in which the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the front light guide plate of the front effect unit and the back right movable decorative body of the back right effect unit is moved to the second state.

  The game board 5 is a front effect unit of the front unit 2000 according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. 2600, the back rear decoration production unit 3150 of the back rear production unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and the back middle production unit 3200 perform a predetermined light emission production.

  Specifically, as a light emission effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000, for example, as shown in FIG. 160, it is mounted on the first picture board 2611 arranged on the right side of the front light guide plate 2610 in front view. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a are caused to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is illuminated. Accordingly, the eyes of a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 are displayed in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the player can be surprised and the gaming state is changed. It can make you think that you are doing, and can raise the expectation for the game.

  Further, as a light emission effect using the front effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, a plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2612a mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612 arranged on the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610 are provided. The second pattern 2622 is decorated by emitting light. As a result, the second pattern 2622 is displayed in a light-emitting manner, so that an illusion can be given that the front surface of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 is provided with a cracked glass on the entire front surface. You can entertain and entertain. In addition, for example, when the second pattern 2622 is displayed in a light emission state during the reach performance, it is possible to make the player think that the reach will be developed, and to increase the expectation for the game.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 162, the light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is mounted on the third pattern substrate 3221 disposed on the right side of the back first light guide plate 3210. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3221a are caused to emit light, and the third pattern 3211 is decorated to emit light. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of pieces of glass that have been broken and scattered as the third pattern 3211 are displayed by light emission, so that the player can be entertained and entertained.

  Further, as a light emitting effect using the back middle effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, a plurality of light guides mounted on the fourth pattern substrate 3222 arranged on the upper and lower outer sides of the back first light guide plate 3210. The light plate LED 3222a is caused to emit light appropriately, and the fourth pattern 3212 is illuminated. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of V-shaped light streaks with perspective are emitted as the fourth pattern 3212, so that the front of the display screen can be clearly displayed. , You can entertain the player with luminous decoration.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 164, the fifth light emission effect arranged at the left and right outer sides of the back second light guide plate 3160 is used as the light emission effect using the back and back decoration effect unit 3150 in the back and back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the pattern substrate 3171 are caused to emit light, and the fifth pattern 3161 is decorated to emit light. Thereby, in the front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a guidance (message) for the player consisting of the letters “Chance!” Is displayed as the fifth picture 3161, so that the chance is given to the player by the guidance. Can be suggested, and the expectation for the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, as a light emission effect using the back decoration effect unit 3150, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, a plurality of elements mounted on a sixth pattern substrate 3172 disposed below the back second light guide plate 3160. The LED 3172a for the light guide plate is caused to emit light to decorate the sixth pattern 3162 with light emission. Thereby, in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a plurality of pieces of glass that are broken and scattered as the sixth pattern 3162 are displayed by light emission, so that the player can be entertained and entertained.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 have a movement like an animation by sequentially decorating the mutually related patterns with light emission decoration. A light emission effect can be performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166, the light emitting decoration is in order of the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610, the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210, and the sixth pattern 3162 of the back second light guide plate 3160. When (light emission display) is performed, after the transparent glass is cracked, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect with movements such that the broken glass pieces are scattered. At this time, the front light guide plate 2610, the back first light guide plate 3210, and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged in the rear in this order, so that when viewed from the player side, the broken glass pieces scatter back. It is possible to show a continuous light-emitting decoration with a three-dimensional appearance and entertain the player.

  As a light emission effect using the front effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 and the back right effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 167, the back right movable effect unit 3310 of the back right effect unit 3300 is used. The back right drive motor 3333 moves the back right movable decorative body 3320 from the normal initial state to the position of the second state where the back imitation of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is swung down. The plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2611a mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 disposed on the right side of the light guide plate 2610 in front view is caused to emit light, and the first pattern 2621 is decorated with light emission. In this state, as shown in the drawing, the central portion of the radial crack pattern formed on the front surface of the back right movable decorative body 3320 behind the pupil portion of the eyes of the predetermined character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 Is located. In this state, if the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decoration board 3323 is caused to emit light, the light of the first pattern 2621 that is displayed and illuminated will shine so that the player has a strong impact. It is possible to surprise the player and to make it seem that an advantageous game state such as “big hit game” will occur, and to increase the expectation of the game.

  Further, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emission effect as described above can be appropriately combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. be able to. As a result, it is possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc., and to make the player hard to get tired. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 12 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The overall configuration will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 168 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 169 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 170 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 168 and 169, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than the vertical direction, and a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of presentation based on a command from main control board 1310, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control board 1510 And a base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions in the internal space of the cover body 1501, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502. Thus, a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is configured by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510, in various boards attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed in the upper right portion of the cover body 1501 because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape in the remaining one third of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

  The boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector described later, and the boards between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by an inter-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in opaque black color. When viewed from the front, the cover body 1501 is an upper side and a left side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm). The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are respectively provided on the lower side and the right side so as to protrude rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1), thereby forming a box shape having an opening.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the air cooling fan FAN at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, which is slightly in the center and the upper right side when viewed from the front. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have predetermined cylindrical shapes inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air-cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aa1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. In addition, by forming the arc-shaped slit hole 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of illegally taking out various electronic components included in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air cooling fan FAN is installed by being pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal-headed pan head screw (not shown) having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer that is the seat portion of the pan head screw with the seat comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along its lower side when viewed from the front, and the positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are 1 The connector recess 1501ac is formed as two closed, substantially oblong rectangular regions (to be precise, a convex region with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as the upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as the lower part) of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Yes. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. For this reason, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are exposed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a closed horizontally long rectangular region at a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501ad is opened at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. .

  Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for attaching the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead opening 1501ae and can block the wiring lead opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a short distance compared to the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted through the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). And a mounting hole 1501afb1 at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring lead opening 1501ae is closed, and a plurality of wirings (to transmit drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting the wiring from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and is molded in opaque black.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed which protrude in the upper and lower sides at predetermined intervals in the center in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side wall 1501c. At the same time, there are formed a hinge hook 1501cc arranged above the guide 1501ca and projecting outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd arranged below the guide 1501cb and projecting outward. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having circular shapes are formed on the back side of the substrate 1510, respectively, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively peripheral control boards. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1510.

  When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by arranging and inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. In this state, the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are brought into contact with each other. Furthermore, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, the cover body 1501 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan-screw, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is obtained. GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Thus, the cover body 1501 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, solder copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520; Solder copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are attached to the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Insert a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screw them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) and mounting boss holes of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are in contact with each other, lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a metal pan screw seat surface, Are in contact with each other. Further, the metal pan head screw shaft (screw portion) is screwed into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a metal pan screw. The lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, the cover body 1501 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 via a metal pan-screw, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is connected to the ground (GND). GND) and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged on the inner side of the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surfaces on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions so as to protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal output Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having circular shapes are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, respectively, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively liquid crystal output substrates. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1530.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the liquid crystal output The substrate 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and mounting boss holes 1501am1. , 1501am2 and the mounting surface (boss surface) are in contact with each other, and the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the bearing surface of the metal pan screw are respectively It comes into contact. Further, the metal pan head screw shaft (screw portion) is screwed into mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan screw. Lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are electrically connected. As a result, the cover body 1501 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via a metal pan screw, whereby the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 is grounded. ) And the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Therefore, the cover body 1501 is circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Is arranged on the inner side of the side end face (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  As described above, when various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the surfaces of the various substrates (cover flat plate 1501a). A space having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In this state, there is a gap (2.3 mm in the present embodiment) having the above-described predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Will be formed.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the peripheral control is performed by ejecting the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

[6-2. Base body]
A base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and when viewed from the front, the upper side of a horizontally long base plate 1502a, Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are respectively provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side so as to project forward (back side of the pachinko machine 1), thereby forming a box shape having an opening. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is formed to be slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Thus, in a state where the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 so as to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are placed inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e. Will be in a state of being inscribed (surface contact).

  The base flat plate 1502a is wired to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped by a force when inserting a connector for connection. The force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 at the position where it does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the force when operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the peripheral control board 15 Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engagement portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. L-shaped flange portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda of hinged portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. In addition, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In addition, a base side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 at the center of the right base side wall 1502e. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / O interfaces. And the like, and the peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on a single semiconductor chip, and various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of the game effects (demonstration effects performed while waiting for the player) and the progress of the effects are defined SDRAM capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b for storing various schedule data in advance and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2 SDRAM 1510c, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real-time clock IC (not shown) can be supplied with power even when the power is cut off. A backup power supply 1510e, a power generation circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7 are provided.

  The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os, various parallel I / Os, and the like. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side. As a communication method for transmitting control data, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed (communication is performed via a corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

  In the present embodiment, an electrical drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back rear effect unit 3100, back right effect unit 3300, back upper effect unit 3400, and back lower effect unit 3500 using SPI communication or I2C communication). Etc., which communicate with each other via the connector CN6) and an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the effect operation unit 300 and an operation button up / down drive) Drive data is transmitted to a drive control IC that drives a motor 367 and the like, and communicates via a connector CN3, or a plurality of LEDs (communication via a connector CN7) provided on the game board 5 side. And LED control IC that drives a plurality of LEDs (communicating via the connector CN3) provided on the door frame 3 side. Various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the back rear effect unit 3100, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, the lower back effect unit 3500, etc. The communication signal is received via CN6 as detection data, or various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided on the rendering operation unit 300, and communicated via the connector CN3). Or receive signals from as detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the control target and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or control signals for the control target (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are output from the GPIO (connector CN6). Or a signal is output from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is allocated to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are allocated to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is allocated as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The data can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Random Access Memory) and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  Peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from special connector SCN2 using a plurality of types of video signals. As the plurality of types of video signal systems, for example, there are a plurality of types such as the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, the eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and the clockless system. In this case, four systems (four systems in total) are employed, one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system and second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. Peripheral control board adopting eDP method, for example, instead of MIPI method, 1 system for RGB system, 2 systems for LVDS system (first LVDS system, 2nd LVDS system), and 1 system for eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. LEDML1 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 5V is being supplied. LEDML2 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 12V is supplied. LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 37V is being supplied. LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces (covers) of the various substrates are covered. A space having a distance of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on so that the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are completely different in structure. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When the sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are fitted, there is no amount of movement in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from the front.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively. Special connectors SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and special connectors SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, so that the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1 and the front side) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. It is a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range in the direction of Note that the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even when the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not contact the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, a gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into and inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). It has a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the special front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is not contacted with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of connector SCN4 and the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Various control information (peripheral data) includes image data such as background images, character images, and design images for rendering various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 The drive data etc. for drive-controlling the various movable production bodies with which it is provided can be mentioned.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, is cheaper than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the cost can be reduced and the power consumption can be suppressed, and various stored data can be read out at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a need to be accurately and reliably transmitted from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Thus, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. Prevent damage to the surroundings The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the operation, the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is established. It can be reliably formed.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to progress the effect (for example, for the player). An image that tells you that an advantageous big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, an image that tells you that no big hit gaming state will occur, and a state where a big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, although no big hit gaming state will occur This is an important substrate for drawing an image or the like indicating that it is approaching as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not used without adopting a configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. is there. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably established. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced as compared with the case where the three-dimensional arrangement is performed, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body is operated on the game board 5). Electric drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the order in the depth direction of the distance dimension.

[6-4. Peripheral control unit assembly method]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are connected to the cover flat plate 1501a. Inserting into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side, and through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a Insert into. Accordingly, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal not shown in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a steel pan screw and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. Thus, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 includes the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is constrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the substrate, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to restrain the vertical and horizontal directions. The boss protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restriction is applied to the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixing to the back surface side of 1501a, absorption is performed by respective dimensional tolerances in through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. Can be done.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The base body 1502 is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed in the cover body 1501 are attached to the base body. Inserted into U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf of hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad formed in the engaging portion 1502 ca of 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is directly covered on the cover body 1501. A metal one-way screw with an anchor rivet inserted is inserted and screwed toward a base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact). Thereby, since the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate as described above, the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 become conductive. In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 has to be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the opening and closing traces, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterring power against illegal actions on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wiring lead recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. From the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the rear, respectively, a lead screw with a metal seat (not shown) having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out openings 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered with the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5, the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, and the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500). The engagement part 1502ca side formed on the base panel 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided in the gaming panel 1100, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is formed in the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Is fixed by being screwed into a mounting hole (not shown) provided in the game panel 1100.

  In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is placed at the predetermined position described above on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control substrate 1510. (The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back.) And the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the liquid crystal output board 1520 after being fixed at the above-mentioned predetermined position (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back). Special connector with socket for special connector SCN3 on peripheral control board 1510 The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and inserted into the plug of the connector SCN1, and the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the predetermined position described above (The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the left side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back). Even in such a procedure for attaching various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-and-rear direction caused by the pushing-in, so that the plug and socket It is possible to prevent breakage of a plurality of connection terminals formed on the substrate, and to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, and to connect the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards attached to the pachinko machines having different game specifications. In this embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common without depending on the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game board game specification. The peripheral data corresponding to is stored as a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (recycled). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily exchanged according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems that are input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of systems are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced in accordance with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the video signal system input to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 matched to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the inter-board connector described above.

  In the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are all made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the back surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to each other by metal pan-head screws, circuit grounding is performed to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. It is configured. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Connected. For this reason, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is used as circuit ground, and the ground (GND) of various boards, the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and FIG. 86 (b). The frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 5 can be guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can do.

  Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are formed in the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin In other words, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from multidirectional angles. In order to be able to do so, they are distributed and arranged so as to be larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 5V from the power supply substrate 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, so that the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of being controlled, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connectors between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Peripheral data provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which is larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520). The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, connectors) Pin number, IC direction, part number , Pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Are arranged in a distributed manner so as to be a large region in which the angle can be substantially confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 37V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special data SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the surface data of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the IC pin state is improved, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. And improving the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 In order to be able to see the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) that are silk-printed respectively, they are arranged in a distributed manner. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 should be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in the lighting state when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN4 on the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Improved visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the part numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins and the contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. The state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are distributed and arranged so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the state can be confirmed from multi-directional angles. ing. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is originally provided with a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but also having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM 1510c. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510. Yes.

  Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades and the blades when the inspector rotates the blades of the air cooling fan FAN). The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the periphery control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, as LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface mount type and a wide angle of about 120 degrees are employed, and a type with weak directivity is employed. It is also suitable for lighting applications. When various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached and fixed at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the surfaces (covers) of the various substrates are covered. A space having a distance of a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the back surface of the flat plate 1501a and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. When the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 that are also suitable for use as lighting are turned on, the space thus formed can be illuminated brightly.

  Further, the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 is reflected again to the area on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the periphery thereof, which face the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Reflecting portions (not shown) that are directed toward the peripheral control board 1510 are formed. As these reflecting portions (not shown), in addition to a bright colored paint such as white, a colored paint having gloss may be used, or a glossy metal sheet may be attached.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5, and the payout unit 560 is disposed on the side of the game board 5. Therefore, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path constituted by these to be charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data A circuit grounding configuration was adopted in which the ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are electrically connected so as to be the same ground (GND). In the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. A configuration in which the same ground (GND) is used by electrically connecting to the (GND) line is adopted.

  Thereby, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and / or Electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the base body 1502 or the like is used as circuit ground, and the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 ), And can be removed from the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and / or Electromagnetic wave noise entering through the base body 1502 can be removed as a circuit ground called a circuit ground from the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 86 (b) to the ground of the island facility of the game hall.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the presentation based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but the main control board is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids A circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU are provided. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU incorporates a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. A mouth sensor 2402, a general winning mouth sensor 3001 for detecting the gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2401 for detecting the gaming ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and a gaming ball received in the big winning opening 2005 The first winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting B and the first receiving opening sensor 2404 for detecting the game ball B received by the first receiving opening 2007 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, are detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403. The second receiving port sensor 2405 for detecting the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008 and the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a The magnetic sensor 3003 for sensing the detection signal from the like are input via the main control input circuits respectively to the main control I / O ports.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby driving the start port solenoid 2412, the attack solenoid 2414, and the sorting solenoid 2416. Output signal, status display of function display unit 1400 from main control I / O port, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special symbol display, first special hold number indicator, second special hold A drive signal is output to a symbol display, a second special reserved number display, a round display, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the big prize port sensor 2403, the first reception port sensor 2404, and the second reception port sensor 2405 are not included. In contrast to the contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the general prize opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the big prize opening sensor 2403, the first The detection of the game ball B by the receiving port sensor 2404 and the second receiving port sensor 2405 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity winning switches 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor 2405 also use proximity switches that have high durability and a long life. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 where the game balls B do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control I / O port to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control MPU receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the payout control board 633.

  The main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control I / O port of the main control MPU, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like controls the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the launch that performs the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The controller 633b, an error LED display for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display are provided.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
The payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 is not illustrated in detail, but a micro that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and payout A payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU has a function and the like for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to games from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payouts at the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or from the main control board 1310. In addition to the RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) being input to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 and the detection from the ball cut detection sensor 574 The signal, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit.

  The detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are sent out via the payout control input circuit. Input to the MPU payout control I / O port.

  The detection signal from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are a payout control input circuit. Is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

  The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the payout control I / O to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. A signal for output is output from the payout control I / O port to the error LED display, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the payout control I / O port to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner. Or the number of game balls B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 from the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

  An error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it indicates that the ball is out (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, a notification is made that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “the ball is a ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589). When the number “3” is displayed, "Specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is in trouble based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591", and when the number "5" is displayed, “Retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. (Specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154), and the number “7” is displayed. Sometimes it is informed that “CR is not connected” (that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), and when the number “9” is displayed, Tsu that is being click "(specifically, yet that the ball number of payout non game ball B has reached a predetermined number spheres) are informed.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is received at the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU. . In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the operation unit 220.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing reference pulse, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and firing A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 and the will of the player. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  Note that various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various types of information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 even when the power is turned off in the power-off process. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633 when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like. Are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a peripheral control IC 1510a, a control ROM 1510b for preliminarily storing various programs and various schedule data for defining the progress of production, and various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a real-time clock (not shown). And it includes a backup power supply 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the IC, and a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

[7-3-1. Peripheral control IC]
The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stores various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including when power is restored from a power failure). Control to transfer. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps as described above, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transferred at high speed. As control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as background images, character images, design images, reserved images, etc. for rendering various effect images on the effect display device 1600, the door frame 3 and the game board Light data, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame, etc. that prescribe light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, light-off, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards included in 5 3 and drive data for driving and controlling various movable effects provided in the game board 5. The background image, character image, design image, reserved image, etc. are full color images.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes starting up its own system, it reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred from the main control board 1310 to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands, and proceeds with the production. .

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads and reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600. Various effects are advanced by performing control so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600, and generates the drawing data on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Control to output. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer system”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) is held in the corresponding frame buffer (built-in VRAM) of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the frame buffer (built-in) of these peripheral control ICs 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the (VRAM) is output from the VDP output channel of the corresponding peripheral control IC 1510a. There are four channels CH1 to CH4 as VDP output channels of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the present embodiment, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs control to output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 among the four channels. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts up its own system, it allocates and secures an area of the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) so as to correspond to these four channels.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a activates its own system, and the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for one screen (one frame) in a predetermined area on the corresponding built-in VRAM and outputs it to the outside. When output (transmitted), the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a accepts screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (which defines the configuration of the screen drawn (displayed) on various display devices such as the effect display device 1600). A V blank signal is transmitted to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to indicate that it is in a state that can be performed.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 or the like by reading out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and generating and outputting them based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker Audio signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) are output to 464 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4 By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and reads the read schedule data. A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 and the light guide plate LED provided on each picture board of the game board 5 along The game board side light emission data for the game board 5 is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted from the various serial I / O ports to the decoration boards of the game board 5 and the design boards of the game board 5 through the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5. Or output a drive signal to each drive motor or each drive solenoid provided in the game board 5 The technique board side drive data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted to the effect drive board 1720 of the game board 5 from various serial I / O ports, or the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 and the operation button up / down drive. Door for outputting door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to the motor 367 and the like, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal for a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 Door side driving light emission data composed of the side light emission data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted to the door frame 3 side from various serial I / O ports.

  The detection signals from the respective detection sensors for detecting the position of the movable decorative body in the back rear effect unit 3100, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, and the back lower effect unit 3500 provided in the game board 5 are The data is received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the control input circuit. In addition, the detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the rendering operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are input to the peripheral control. The signals are received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the circuit. Further, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510. The power generation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC + 12V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Kinds are made and supplied.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a diagnoses whether or not its own system is running out of control using the external WDT.

[7-3-2. Control ROM]
As described above, the control ROM 1510b can previously store various programs and various schedule data that define the progress of production. In the various types of schedule data, a plurality of various types of data for proceeding effects by a plurality of types of effects patterns are defined. The various schedule data includes, for example, a plurality of types of screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn (displayed) on various display devices such as the effect display device 1600, and a plurality of types of light emission modes for generating various LED light emission modes. There are schedule data, multiple types of sound generation schedule data for generating music, sound effects, etc., multiple types of electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as drive motors and drive solenoids, and the like. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets (determines) any pattern from a plurality of types of effect patterns based on various commands from the main control board 1310, this setting (from the various types of schedule data) Various schedule data corresponding to the determined pattern are set (determined).

  Here, the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data will be briefly described. The screen data defines the configuration of the screen to be drawn (displayed). Specifically, the screen data is configured by arranging a command and a parameter for the command for each line. Some commands do not have parameters. The sprite in the description here is constituted by character data, and there is one in which one sprite is constituted by one character data and one sprite is constituted by a plurality of character data. For example, one figure including a background image may be constituted by one character data, or may be constituted by arranging a plurality of character data.

  The commands constituting the screen data include an object addition command, object insertion command, object movement command, object processing command, object deletion command, object replacement command, object replacement command, and one frame end command.

  The object addition command is a command for adding one sprite. The object addition command is specified, and one piece of sprite information (name of sprite or pointer indicating the address at which the sprite is stored) is added to the parameter. When one sprite is added by the object addition command and the parameter, the value of the sprite index is assigned and registered as a number for individually identifying the one sprite. The value of the sprite index starts from the value 0 (zero) and increases by 1 each time one sprite is added. The smaller the sprite index value is, the more the screen is arranged and displayed on the farthest side. That is, a screen is displayed in which a sprite having a large sprite index value is arranged on the front side.

  The object insertion command is a command for inserting one sprite by specifying a sprite index value in the plurality of sprites when there are a plurality of sprites already added by the object addition command. The object insertion command is specified, and one piece of sprite information (sprite name or pointer indicating the address at which the sprite is stored) is specified as a parameter, and the value of the sprite index to be inserted is specified. When one sprite with the sprite index value specified by the object insertion command and parameter is inserted, a value equal to or greater than the sprite index value registered immediately before insertion corresponding to the specified sprite index value Shifts one by one and grows larger. For example, when 8 sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index value is given from 0 to 7, and the object insertion command is executed. If one of the sprite information is designated as a parameter and the value 6 is designated as the sprite index value to be inserted, one sprite is newly inserted as the value 6 of the sprite index, and the designated sprite is designated. The sprite index value 6 that is equal to or higher than the sprite index value registered immediately before insertion corresponding to the index value, and the value 7 value are shifted one by one to increase the value 7, and It will be re-registered as value 8.

  The object movement command is a command for setting the coordinates and size of one sprite. An object movement command is instructed, and a sprite index value (that is, one sprite) is designated as a parameter, and the coordinates and size of one designated sprite are designated. The coordinates specify the XY coordinates of the screen, and the size specifies the size (width, height) of one sprite. One sprite in which the value of the sprite index is specified by the object movement command and the parameter is moved (arranged) to the coordinates at the designated size.

  The object processing command is a command for setting an arrangement (leg color processing (craft processing)). Specify an object processing command, specify a sprite index value (that is, one sprite) as a parameter, specify an arrangement for one specified sprite (leg color processing (craft processing)), and specify various values for the arrangement . Arrangement (legging process (crafting process)) includes transmittance setting mode, noise addition setting mode, mosaic setting mode, oil painting style setting mode, ink painting style setting mode, stereoscopic setting mode, gray scale setting mode, monochrome two gradations There are setting modes.

  For example, the transmittance setting mode will be briefly described. The transmittance setting mode includes a sprite individual transmittance setting mode, a specific area transmittance setting mode, a screen transmittance setting mode, and the like. The sprite individual transmittance setting mode designates one sprite added by the object addition command and designates a value for setting the transmittance (0 (zero)% to 100%) of this one sprite. It is a mode that can be. In the specific area transmittance setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and the screen area corresponding to the one sprite is set as a specific area, and the transmittance (0 (zero)) in the specific area is set. % To 100%) is a mode in which a value for setting can be designated. The screen transmittance setting mode is a mode in which a value for setting the transmittance (0 (zero)% to 100%) of the entire screen can be designated. In this screen transmittance setting mode, as described above, the transmittance of the entire screen is set. Therefore, the value of the sprite index (that is, one sprite) is not specified in the parameter, and the arrangement (legged processing (craft processing) is performed. )) Is designated, and the whole screen transmittance (0% to 100%) is designated. Note that 0% is the smallest transmittance, and the transmittance increases toward 100%. When the transmittance is set to 0%, light is not transmitted and the transmittance is set to 100%. And almost all light is transmitted and transparent. Since the sprite in which the transmittance is set by this transmittance setting mode or the entire screen can express a sense of depth that the back can be visually recognized, it is rendered three-dimensionally.

  For example, the noise addition setting mode will be briefly described. In the noise addition setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and the amount of noise (0.1%) for the one sprite. ˜50%), a distribution method (uniform distribution, Gaussian distribution) setting, and grayscale noise ON / OFF setting can be designated. As the amount of noise, 0.1% is the smallest and the amount of noise increases toward 50%. As the amount of noise increases, an image in which pixels are randomly arranged is obtained. When grayscale noise is set to ON, the noise is expressed as grayscale, while when grayscale noise is set to OFF, it is expressed as color noise. The sprite or the entire screen on which noise is set in this noise addition setting mode is drawn two-dimensionally.

  Further, for example, the mosaic setting mode will be briefly described. The mosaic setting mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command, and the size of the mosaic (value 1 to value 15) for the one sprite. ), The mode of the mosaic area (the size of the rectangular area, the size of the elliptical area including the circle area), and the coordinates (X coordinate, Y coordinate) in the sprite. As the size of the mosaic, the value 1 is the smallest, and the size of the mosaic increases toward the value 15. A value of 1 corresponds to a cell size of 1 square pixel and a value of 15 corresponds to a cell size of 15 square pixels. The larger the size of the mosaic, the coarser the image in the mosaic area at the coordinates specified in the sprite. The sprite or the entire screen on which the mosaic is set in this mosaic setting mode is drawn two-dimensionally.

  For example, the oil painting style installation mode will be briefly described. In the oil painting style installation mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and the type of brush processed with the brush for this one sprite ( Value for setting narrow, standard, wide), value for setting brush size (value 1 to value 50), value for setting sharpness strength (value 0 (zero) to value 30) , And a mesh effect setting mode. The value 1 is the smallest brush size, and the brush size increases toward the value 50. The sharpness value 0 is the smallest (no sharpness strength), and the sharpness strength increases toward the value 30. The sprite specified by this oil painting style installation mode is drawn in a three-dimensional manner with unevenness.

  Further, for example, the sumi-e style setting mode will be briefly described. The sumi-e style setting mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command, and the stroke width (value 1 to value) for the one sprite. 15) In a mode in which a value for setting pen pressure (value 1 to value 15) and a value for setting contrast (value 0 (zero) to value 40) can be specified. is there. The value 1 is the smallest as the stroke width, and the stroke width increases toward the value 15. The value 1 is the smallest as the writing pressure, and the writing pressure increases toward the value 15. As contrast, value 0 is the smallest, and the contrast increases toward value 40. The sprite or the entire screen processed into a sumi-e style in this sumi-e style setting mode becomes a Japanese-style image drawn on Japanese paper and is two-dimensionally depicted.

  Further, for example, the stereoscopic vision setting mode will be briefly described. The stereoscopic vision setting mode includes a specific area stereoscopic vision setting mode, a screen stereoscopic vision setting mode, and the like. In the specific area stereoscopic view setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and a screen area corresponding to the one sprite is set as a specific area, and an observer (player) is set in the specific area. By alternately arranging the right image that is the right eye image and the left image that is the left eye image of the viewer (player), the viewer (player) It is a mode that can be seen. The image in the specific area specified by the specific area stereoscopic view setting mode is three-dimensionally drawn in a three-dimensional manner that protrudes (protrudes) in front of the display area of the screen. In the screen stereoscopic setting mode, the entire screen is alternately arranged with a right image that is an image for the right eye of the observer (player) and a left image that is an image for the left eye of the observer (player). This is a mode in which the observer (player) can stereoscopically view the entire screen. The image of the entire screen specified by the screen stereoscopic setting mode is three-dimensionally drawn in a three-dimensional form that protrudes (protrudes) in front of the display area of the screen. When the stereoscopic setting mode is designated, it is necessary to further provide a switch liquid crystal behind the liquid crystal panel provided in various display devices such as the effect display device 1600. In this switch liquid crystal, a plurality of strip-like parallax barriers having a predetermined width extending in the vertical direction corresponding to the strips constituting the TFT liquid crystal panel, which is a liquid crystal panel, are arranged in a line in the horizontal direction at predetermined intervals. It is a liquid crystal, and this parallax barrier can be operated as an optical shutter by being switched to each other by being controlled in a transparent state or in an opaque state. When the parallax barrier is controlled in a transparent state, the illumination light from the backlight arranged behind the switch liquid crystal is uniformly illuminated by the TFT liquid crystal, whereas the parallax barrier is controlled in an opaque state. In this case, the illumination light from the backlight arranged on the rear side of the switch liquid crystal is separated by the parallax barrier. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be configured to directly control the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal to control the transparent state or the opaque state. Further, by including information for controlling the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal in a transparent state or an opaque state in the above-described drawing data, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be configured to directly control the parallax barrier of the switch liquid crystal.

  For example, the gray scale setting mode will be briefly described. The gray scale setting mode specifies one sprite added by the object addition command, and the gray scale bit width (8 bits) for the one sprite. , 16 bits) can be designated. Setting 8 bits as the grayscale bit width converts the image to an 8 bit wide grace scale, while setting the grayscale bit width to 16 bits converts the image to a 16 bit wide grace scale. The sprite or the entire screen converted to gray scale by this gray scale setting mode is drawn two-dimensionally.

  For example, the monochrome two gradation setting mode will be briefly described. In the monochrome two gradation setting mode, one sprite added by the object addition command is designated, and two monochrome colors are assigned to the one sprite. In this mode, a value for setting can be specified. As monochrome two colors, white and black can be designated, white and red can be designated, and green and black can be designated. These two colors are designated as full colors with a 24-bit width having 8 bits each for red (R), green (G), and blue (B). The sprite set to monochrome 2 gradation by this monochrome 2 gradation setting mode or the whole screen is drawn two-dimensionally.

  Thus, as described above, the transmittance setting mode, the oil painting style installation mode, and the stereoscopic setting mode are prepared as the three-dimensional rendering modes. On the other hand, as a mode for two-dimensional rendering, since one sprite added by the object addition command is processed in a plane, the above-described noise addition setting mode, mosaic setting mode, sumi-e painting A wind setting mode, a gray scale setting mode, a monochrome two gradation setting mode, and the like are prepared. Note that sprites for which no arrangement (legacy processing (crafting processing)) is set by the object processing command for one sprite added by the object addition command is a two-dimensional figure (picture, photograph, sentence, value, figure). Etc.) and is drawn two-dimensionally.

  The object deletion command is a command for deleting one sprite added by the object addition command. The object addition command is designated, and the sprite index value of one sprite added by the object addition command is designated as a parameter. When one sprite specified by the object deletion command and parameters is deleted, the sprite index value corresponding to the specified sprite index value and the value larger than the sprite index value registered immediately before deletion are shifted one by one. Become smaller. For example, if eight sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index value is registered with values 0 to 7, and the object deletion command is executed. If a value 5 that is the value of the sprite index of the sprite added by the sixth object addition command is specified as a parameter, one sprite with the specified sprite index value is deleted, and the sprite index value The value 6 of the sprite index, which is larger than the value of the sprite index registered immediately before the deletion corresponding to the value, and the value 7 are shifted one by one, the value becomes smaller, the value 5 and the value 6 Will be re-registered.

  The object replacement command is a command for replacing one sprite already added by the object addition command with another one sprite when there are a plurality of sprites already added by the object addition command. An object replacement command is instructed, and two sprite index values are specified as parameters. When two sprites to be exchanged are specified by the object exchange command and the parameter, the values of the two sprite indexes are exchanged with each other. For example, when 8 sprites are already added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the value of the sprite index is registered from 0 to 7, and the object replacement command is executed. 1 sprite added to the parameter by the first object addition command (the sprite index value of one sprite added by the first object addition command is 0) and the fifth object addition command When one sprite added by (the sprite index value of one sprite added by the fifth object addition command is a value 4) is specified, the first sprite added by the object addition command is specified. Splice The index value is changed from value 0 to value 4 and re-registered, and the sprite index value of one sprite added by the fifth object addition command is changed from value 4 to value 0 and is re-registered. They are replaced with each other. As a result, the front-rear relationship between one sprite added first by the object addition command and one sprite added fifth by the object addition command is reversed.

  The object replacement command is a command for replacing one sprite already added by the object addition command with another one sprite. An object replacement command is instructed, and one sprite added by the object addition command and another sprite (one replacement sprite) are specified as parameters. The sprite index value is not changed by the object replacement command and parameter, and only the sprite is replaced. For example, if 8 sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the sprite index value is registered with values 0 to 7, and the object replacement command is changed. Specified as parameters, one sprite added by the 8th object addition command (the value of the sprite index of one sprite added by the 8th object addition command is the value 7) and other sprites (replacement) For example, the value 7 which is the value of the sprite index is not changed, and only the sprite is replaced. As a result, when eight sprites have already been added as a plurality of sprites by the object addition command, the screen in which one sprite added by the object addition command at the eighth position is arranged on the most front side is displayed Therefore, when one sprite arranged and displayed on the most front side is replaced with another sprite (one sprite for replacement), for example, when a number is used as a sprite, countdown or count A screen having an area to be uploaded can be obtained.

  The 1-frame end command is a command for informing that all the screen data configurations of 1 frame have been instructed. The one-frame end command is a single command that does not require parameter setting.

  Next, an example in which commands are arranged as one frame of screen data will be briefly described. As described above, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a changes the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data from the first screen data every time a V blank signal is input. One by one, that is, one frame of screen data is output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The arrangement, movement, arrangement, and the like of sprites are performed in a work area provided in the built-in VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on one frame of screen data, and sprite data for each sprite is created. Then, the data superposed as one screen from the sprite data of each sprite is written into the area of the built-in VRAM (the area for generating drawing data) corresponding to the VDP channels CH1 to CH4 of the peripheral control IC 1510a. .

  Here, the structure of one frame of screen data defining the screen displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 will be briefly described. In addition, the sprite in the description here includes one in which one sprite is configured by one image data and one sprite is configured by a plurality of image data. Based on this one-frame screen data, sprites are arranged, moved, arranged, etc. in the work area provided in the built-in VRAM corresponding to the VDP channel CH1 of the peripheral control IC 1510a to create sprite data for each sprite. . In this work area, the data superimposed as a single screen for drawing on the display area of the effect display device 1600 from the sprite data of each sprite is stored in the area of the built-in VRAM corresponding to the VDP channel CH1 of the peripheral control IC 1510a. By being written, drawing data is generated. The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is drawn (displayed) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a screen as shown in FIG.

  For example, one frame of screen data defining a screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d), which will be described later, which does not provide a gray scale effect that switches from a full color image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to a gray scale image, this gray scale. One frame of screen data defining a screen as shown in FIG. 194 (s), which will be described later, is actually displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the variable display of decorative patterns described later. Since drawing is performed, one frame of screen data on this screen is arranged in the hundreds or thousands of lines from the first line (first line) of the screen data. As shown in FIG. 194 (d), which will be described later, the gray scale effect is not performed. For screen as shown in FIG. 194 which will be described later performs scale effect (s), it will be described below. In addition, since the same command is arranged in the screen data a plurality of times, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the command is followed by a number and will be described below.

  The effect display device 1600 uses the upper left corner when viewing the display area from the front as the origin coordinates (the origin of the X coordinate, the origin of the Y coordinate), and the X coordinate increases from the origin coordinate to the right, An XY space is set in which the Y coordinate increases downward from the coordinates, and the lower right corner becomes the maximum coordinate (the maximum value of the X coordinate and the maximum value of the Y coordinate) when the display area is viewed from the front .

  A screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d), which will be described later, in which no gray scale effect is performed will be described. First, in the first line of the screen data of one frame, the object addition command 1 is arranged and designated as a parameter as the order of sprites arranged from the farthest side to the foremost side. The information of the background image (background image 1640 in FIG. 194 (d) to be described later) (the name of the background image or a pointer indicating the address where the background image is stored) is arranged as one added sprite information . This background image is configured by image data created as one background image in advance (the background image may be configured by arranging drawing data of a plurality of original images). As a result, the value 0 (zero) is automatically assigned and registered as the sprite index value as a number for identifying the background image.

  The object addition command 2 is arranged on the second line of the screen data of one frame, and the first reserved image (red in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is added as one sprite information to be added designated as a parameter. The first hold display 1655a) information (the name of the hold image or a pointer indicating the address where the hold image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 1 is automatically assigned and registered as the sprite index value as a number for identifying the first reserved image. An object addition command 3 is arranged in the third line of the screen data of one frame, and a second reserved image (second color having a white color in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is added as one sprite information to be added to the parameter. Information of the hold display 1655b) (the name of the hold image or a pointer indicating the address at which the hold image is stored) is arranged. Thus, the value 2 is automatically assigned and registered as the sprite index value as a number for identifying the second reserved image. An object addition command 4 is arranged on the fourth line of the screen data of one frame, and the first symbol image (the left decorative symbol 1650a in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is used as one sprite information to be added to the parameter. The information (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 3 is automatically assigned and registered as the sprite index value as a number for identifying the first symbol image. The object addition command 5 is arranged on the fifth line of the screen data of one frame, and the second symbol image (the medium decoration symbol 1650b in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is used as one sprite information to be added to the parameter. The information (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address where the reserved image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 4 is automatically assigned and registered as the sprite index value as a number for identifying the second symbol image. An object addition command 6 is arranged on the sixth line of the screen data of one frame, and a third symbol image (the right decorative symbol 1650c in FIG. 194 (d) described later) is used as one sprite information to be added to the parameter. The information (the name of the reserved image or the pointer indicating the address at which the reserved image is stored) is arranged. As a result, the value 5 is automatically given and registered as the sprite index value as a number for identifying the third symbol image.

  In this way, by setting the sprite index value, the third symbol image having the large sprite index value is arranged on the most front side, and the second symbol image, the first symbol image, The two reserved images, the first reserved image, and the background image are arranged in this order (the background image with the smallest sprite index value is the farthest side).

  On the seventh line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 1 is arranged, and the value 0, which is the value of the sprite index of the background image, specified as a parameter, coordinates, and size (width, height) ) Is arranged. In the eighth line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 2 is arranged, and the value 1, coordinate, and size (width, width) of the sprite index value of the first reserved image specified as a parameter. Height), is arranged. In the ninth line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 3 is arranged, and the value 2, coordinates, and size (width, width), which are the sprite index values of the second reserved image specified as parameters. Height), is arranged. The object movement command 4 is arranged on the 10th line of the screen data of one frame, and the value 3, the coordinate, and the size (width, Height), is arranged. On the 11th line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 5 is arranged, and the value 4, the coordinate, and the size (width, Height), is arranged. In the 12th line of the screen data of one frame, the object movement command 6 is arranged, and the value 5, coordinates, and size (width, width), which are the sprite index values of the third symbol image specified as parameters. Height), is arranged. On the 13th line of the screen data of one frame, a one-frame end command 1 is arranged, and informs that all the configurations of the screen data of one frame have been instructed.

  Thereby, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first symbol image, the second symbol image, the third symbol image, the first reserved image, and the second reserved image are arranged without interfering with each other, A full color image screen as shown in FIG. 194 (d), which will be described later, is displayed without performing gray scale effects.

  Next, a screen as shown in FIG. 194 (s), which will be described later, for performing a gray scale effect will be described. In the first line of the screen data of one frame to the twelfth line of the screen data of one frame, the screen data of one frame constituting the screen as shown in FIG. Since they are the same, the description is omitted, and the contents from the 13th line to the 19th line of the screen data of one frame will be described below.

  Of the contents from the 13th line to the 19th line of the screen data of 1 frame, the contents from the 13th line to the 18th line are not actually incorporated in advance in the screen data of 1 frame, and the gray scale effect is produced. The peripheral control between the 12th line and the 13th line of the above-mentioned 1-frame screen data out of the 1st line of the 1-frame screen data to the 13th line of the 1-frame screen data when not performed. The CPU 15 of the IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to perform the arrangement (legging process (crafting process)) uniquely selected in real time. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not to perform the grayscale effect by lottery, and when performing the grayscale effect, the above-described one frame of screen data when the grayscale effect is not performed. Select the gray scale setting mode as the original arrangement (legging process (crafting process)) of the contents from the 13th line to the 18th line following the 12th line of the screen data of the 1st line to the 1st frame in real time. The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is instructed.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first selects the gray scale setting mode as the arrangement (legging process (crafting process)) and performs the object processing in the contents of the 13th line of the screen data of one frame when performing the gray scale effect. Command 1 is placed, the value 0, which is the value of the sprite index of the background image, specified as a parameter, grayscale setting mode, bit width as arrangement (leg color processing (crafting processing)) for one specified sprite (16 bits) are arranged. In the contents of the 14th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 2 is arranged, and the value 1 which is the sprite index value of the first reserved image, which is designated as a parameter, one designated sprite A gray scale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as arrangement (legging process (manufacturing process)). In the content of the 15th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 3 is arranged, and the value 2, which is the value of the sprite index of the second reserved image, specified as a parameter, one specified sprite A gray scale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as arrangement (legging process (manufacturing process)). In the contents of the 16th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 4 is arranged, and the value 3 as the sprite index value of the first symbol image specified as a parameter, one specified sprite A gray scale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as arrangement (legging process (manufacturing process)). In the contents of the 17th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 5 is arranged, and the value 4 which is the value of the sprite index of the second symbol image specified as a parameter, one specified sprite A gray scale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as arrangement (legging process (manufacturing process)). In the content of the 18th line of the screen data of one frame, the object processing command 6 is arranged, and the value 5 which is the value of the sprite index of the third symbol image specified as a parameter, one specified sprite A gray scale setting mode and a bit width (16 bits) are arranged as arrangement (legging process (manufacturing process)). On the 19th line of the 1-frame screen data, the 1-frame end command 1 which is the content of the 13th line of the 1-frame screen data described above when the gray scale effect is not performed is arranged. It conveys that it has instructed all the data structure.

  Thereby, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the first symbol image, the second symbol image, the third symbol image, the first reserved image, and the second reserved image are arranged without interfering with each other, The gray scale effect is not specified, but the gray scale is designated by specifying an object processing command corresponding to the gray scale setting mode while using the same screen data as the screen data of one frame constituting the screen as shown in FIG. A screen of an image converted into a gray scale as shown in FIG.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 86 is capable of once collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding (earthing) the island facilities in the game hall. Here, a system of ground wires by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 172 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 172 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 172 (d) is a table showing the explanation of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface facing downward (that is, a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are directed downward), It is accommodated and attached inside the substrate accommodating portion 551aa formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 86 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 172 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in a line along the upper side from the right side to the left side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. The earth terminals ECN1 to ECN5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 172 (d), the earth terminal ECN1 is an earth provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected via the ground connection terminal and the island equipment ground wire in the island equipment of the game hall as an island equipment ground. The earth terminal ECN3 is connected to the sphere tank 552 shown in FIG. 86B (specifically, outside the side wall of the sphere tank 552 near the substrate housing portion 551aa) as a sphere tank ground. One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw (not shown), and The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 serves as a body frame metal ground, which is a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to a metal screw (not shown) on the upper side of the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 (specifically, the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected). The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (c), in the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serves as a power source ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. In addition, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power source ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, and is removed. The electromagnetic wave noise that flows to the terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 and island facility ground wire as the island facility ground and removed, and flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic wave noise is guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, and is removed. The electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power source ground is The game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground and the island equipment ground wire It is adapted to be removed is guided to the ground of the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 82, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can stay are attached.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the discharge unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as a result of the static electricity being easily accumulated. In the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground, and the body frame metal are disposed in the vicinity of the unit 560 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4. The earth terminal ECN4 as ground is gradually attenuated by passing electromagnetic noise through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively, to suppress high voltage instantaneous discharge, and the island equipment from the earth terminal ECN2 as island equipment ground It can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground wire.In other words, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 that is likely to accumulate static electricity from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground called a frame ground. By guiding to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the ground of the island facility of the game hall.

  In contrast, when electromagnetic noise enters the cover body 1501 and / or the base body 1502 constituting the peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board. The ground terminal as a power ground in the frame ground board 559 from the ground connection terminal of the power board 630 to the ground (GND) line of the power board 630 and flows into the ground (GND) line of the power board 630 through the power ground line. The current flows to ECN5 and is removed from the ground terminal ECN2 serving as the island facility ground to the ground of the island facility of the game hall via the island facility ground line. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and / or Electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the base body 1502 is guided as a circuit ground called a circuit ground from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, thereby causing the cover body 1501 and / or the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 to be connected. It is possible to remove electromagnetic noise that enters through the ground of the game hall island facility.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as described above, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. The ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground is used for the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the frame ground board 559 as described above. Large grounding terminals are used because they are guided to the ground of the island facility and removed. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 adopting these large-sized ground terminals are squares having a cross-sectional shape of 1.14 mm on a side, rated current: 7 A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and has a height of 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is smaller than the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 described above, and the current is small. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are small-sized ground terminals. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting this small-sized ground terminal are squares having a cross section of 0.64 mm on a side, rated current: 3 A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: 250V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and has a general specification of 7 mm as shown in FIG. 172 (a) (ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5) When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, main body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Compared to each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire), the current caused by electromagnetic noise is large, so each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The thickness of the ground wire (main body frame ground wire) is larger than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1, ECN5. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 is 1.6 mm as shown in FIG. 172 (a).

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in each place is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall from the frame ground substrate 559, it can be removed. The substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action.

  In addition, since the electromagnetic noise generated at various places is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall from the frame ground substrate 559, it can be removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and electromagnetic noise is temporarily collected on the power supply board 630 to collect the island facilities of the game hall. Compared with a configuration in which the lead wire is guided to the ground and removed, the ground wire (wiring) can be routed very easily.

  Further, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be arranged in the substrate housing portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 are provided. Terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, 10 external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from the back) are provided. ) And a hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, by wiring, an earth terminal ECN2 as an island equipment ground in the frame ground board 559, and an earth connection terminal provided in the island equipment of the game hall Can be performed as a series of operations by electrically connecting the island equipment ground wires (wiring). Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  Further, since the frame ground board 559 can be disposed in the board housing portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island equipment of the game hall are provided. Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game, and the effects) provided in the game board 5 with the island equipment earth wires (wiring) for electrically connecting the earth connection terminals provided. The peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the peripheral control board, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. Adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) and the like included in the device can be eliminated.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the main body frame 4 is close to the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. The main body frame base unit 500 is made of a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and the frame ground substrate 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a sphere tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground. The length of the electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) is made extremely short, and electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. Can do.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the ball tank 552 which tends to accumulate static electricity and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting a static elimination action, and the power source. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a discharging action, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a discharging action. It can be configured to be the shortest in comparison with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the main body frame 4 is close to the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly influenced by electromagnetic noise. The main body frame base unit 500 includes a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and a frame ground substrate 559 includes a ground terminal ECN3 as a sphere tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected, and the island facility from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 Lead to the ground of the island facility in the game hall through the ground wire and remove it. Can.

  Incidentally, as disclosed in the prior art, each ground is once aggregated on the power supply board disposed on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so that the power supply AC24V of the CR unit can be easily supplied. A gaming machine that is connected to the ground of the island facility and grounded has been proposed (for example, JP 2012-120593 A (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged below in gaming machines. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground in the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device or the like of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board. By drawing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic wave noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way, which may have an unexpected effect. Also, since the ground wires are concentrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs in the power supply board, it may affect the ground, or conversely, current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the grounding point of the island facility is above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to connect the grounding wires gathered by the power supply board from the lower side to the upper side again.

[9. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is obtained when the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, it passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously per minute. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B contacts the obstacle nail N. Thus, the flow velocity of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) that rotates by contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located immediately above the first start port 2002, and therefore is received at the first start port 2002 with a high probability. When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 may be received by the first start port 2002 or the general winning port 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side ball 2300 and the obstacle nail N move toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning port 2001 of the side unit 2200 Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start port 2002, the general winning port 2001, etc. of the start port unit 2100 may be accepted. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit). , It is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, the gate unit 2003 and the second start port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400 are provided, and pass through the gate unit 2003 with a certain probability.

  When the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310. If the selected lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start port that is closed 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0 .01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous game state (for example, “hit”) that is advantageous to the player. The lottery of the special lottery result for generating Then, the lottery result of the special lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time). The special lottery results that are drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include “losing”, “15R big hit A”, “15R big hit B”, and the like. .

  The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special variation time has elapsed, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the winning prize opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be received, or the predetermined winning opening 2005 is given. When any of the conditions for accepting the number of game balls B (for example, 10) is satisfied, an open / close pattern that closes the game balls B in an unacceptable state (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Repeat a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, if it is “15R big hit”, 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the “big hit”, when the big winning opening 2005 is opened due to the big hit gaming state, when the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 by the sorting piece 2415, the big hit game After the state ends, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous gaming state. This ST is a time variation that changes the probability of changing the probability that a special lottery result such as “big hit” will be drawn for a predetermined number of fluctuations or the display time of an effect image that suggests the special lottery result. This is to maintain the state.

  In this embodiment, the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the reception of the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 until the special lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, and therefore the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Deferred. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed in order, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three pattern rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, 15R big hit game A, 15R big hit game B, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until display is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, and the back and rear effect unit 3100 of the front effect unit 2600 and the rear unit 3000, Using the effect unit 3200, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, the back lower effect unit 3500, the front effect effect unit 3600, etc., it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, etc. It is possible to entertain the player even with the performance, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the front effect unit of the front unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the selected lottery result. 2600, the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back middle effect unit 3200, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, the lower back effect unit 3500, the front effect effect unit 3600, etc. In addition, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from being lowered.

[10. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 173 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first stored in various registers and RAMs as processing in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. The RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from power-on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM of the main control MPU.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM of the main control MPU is executed. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Then, a restoration process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach by the variable random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the display, the decorative symbol variable display executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the special symbol variable display (Left decorative design and right decorative design are stopped in the same design and the middle decorative design is not yet stopped, or the left, middle and right decorative designs are all displayed in the same design. Reach random numbers used in lottery processing for determining whether or not to win, symbol random numbers used in lottery processing to determine the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is based on the special random number ( A random number counter for holding random numbers such as one random number, second random number), a random number used in a lottery process (ordinary random number), etc., for winning a win that triggers the operation of the second start door 2411 Yes.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is won, the second start opening 2004 is won. Even in this case, the reach random number is acquired from the same counter that updates the reach random number. The reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number may correspond to the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is different from the first reach determination table. You may make it vary the execution ratio of reach production by providing the 2nd reach determination table in which a determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms, for example.

  FIG. 173 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the big prize port sensor 2403, the first receiving port sensor 2404, and the second receiving port sensor are processed. 2405, detection signals from various switches such as the above-described general prize opening sensor 3001 are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. Counter operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU). The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the two special symbol process flags).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process for winning a win as an operation trigger of the second start door 2411 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second start door 2411 is higher during a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state. (So-called short-time state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is shortened, and the normal symbol lottery is selected. When the result is successful, such a short time state is realized by extending the opening time of the second start door 2411.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU to the peripheral control board 1510 and the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 outputs information such as hit information (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as the next step S18. I do.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the big prize port sensor 2403, and the general prize port sensor 3001. Are output to the payout control board 633 so that prize balls corresponding to these signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a driving signal from the payout control unit 633a to the payout motor 584, and pays out a prize ball to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of start memories as a process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 174, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first controlled by the first start port sensor 3002. On condition that the detection signal is in the on state (the ball enters the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is obtained from the RAM number. A first start port passing process such as storing in one special symbol holding storage area is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start port passage process is performed such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the RAM (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S35). If the big hit running flag is set, the big hit gaming state is controlled. A big hit control process (step S39) is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit A”, The prize winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close in accordance with the 15R big hit gaming state A, and a distribution piece 2415 for distributing the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is provided. Drive control is performed, and a process of setting the valid state in the 15th round in which the game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed. Also, when the mode suggests “15R big hit B”, the big winning opening 2005 is controlled to open and close according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is received as the first receiving opening. The distribution piece 2415 that is distributed to either the 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 is driven and controlled, and a process of setting the valid state to the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed.

  Here, the “valid state” and “invalid state” will be described. First, in the present embodiment, a “valid state” is provided as a state when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008. Here, the “valid state” indicates that in the 15th round in which the game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the game balls B are received by the second receiving port 2008, and the high hit state after the end of the big hit gaming state. It is a state that is allowed (validated) to be controlled to a probability state. Therefore, when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the “valid state”, the high probability state is controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the “invalid state” different from the “valid state” is set as a state in which the game ball B is not received at the second receiving port 2008. Here, the “invalid state” is a state in which the game ball B is not accepted by the second receiving port 2008 in principle, such as the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007. Even if the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, it is not permitted (invalidated) to be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 in the “invalid state”, the high probability state is not controlled after the big hit game state is ended. In addition, the “invalid state” makes it possible to notify the hall management side of information relating to such an abnormality when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 due to an abnormality such as an illegal act. Therefore, it is set as the period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008. In the present embodiment, the game ball B is set to the “valid state” in a predetermined round (15th round) that allows the game balls B to be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, and the second receiving port 2008 has a game. When the ball B is accepted, the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state. Further, although the “invalid state” is set for a predetermined round (1st to 14th rounds) in which the game balls B are not distributed to the second receiving port 2008, it may be set to “valid state”. Thus, even if it is set to “valid state” in all rounds in the big hit game state, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the first to the 14th rounds. As in the case where the “invalid state” is set in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the “valid state”.

  In the big hit control process (step S39), after performing the opening control of the big prize opening 2005, each set process of the high probability flag, the hourly flag, and the hourly number counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state. During the execution of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B), it is possible to distribute the game balls B to the second receiving port 2008 in the first to fifteenth rounds of opening the big winning opening 2005. When the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set since the control is performed to the high probability state (high probability short-time state) after the big hit gaming state. If the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high probability state (high probability short time state) after the big hit gaming state is finished. The high probability flag is not set. If the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later, when the next big hit or when the counter value of the hour / hour counter becomes “0” or The high probability flag is reset by a second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The time-short flag is a flag indicating that the time-short state is in effect, and is used for big hits (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) which are controlled to a short time state (high probability short time state, low probability short time state) after the big hit gaming state ends. Set when exiting based jackpot gaming state. The time-short flag is the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 126, which will be described later, or the second special symbol stop (not shown) when the next big hit or the counter value of the time-count counter becomes “0”. Reset by processing.

  The short-time counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of times that the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is displayed as the number of times the short-time state continues. The short-time state (high probability) When the big hit gaming state based on the big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) is controlled to the short time state, low probability short time state, the number of times of the short time state is set, and the short time number counter is Each time the special symbol variation display is executed until the counter value reaches “0”, the countdown is performed. However, when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes “0”, FIG. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 5 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) is reset (the counter value is returned to “0”).

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “0”. (Step S36), the first special symbol process including the lottery processing relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (Step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol storage area. On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not “0” (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Process processing is executed (step S38). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  If it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002, then FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4” which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol on hold. The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S41. To store.

  Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not the game is a big hit, if the big win is made, the type of the big win, and if the big hit is not made, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S43 to S45, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the first held state. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (first reserved number designation command 0 to 4) instructing the first reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to be. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, or the reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit The mode type of the game effect is specified (step S61).

  Then, the specified prior determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of jackpot if it is a big hit, the reach effect as a game effect executed on the effect display device 1600 if it is not a big hit, or execution According to the type of game effect to be performed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored (the value of the reserved number counter) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set the prior judgment command. For example, in the effect predetermination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified predetermination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first 1 special reserved number counter value) and a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (step S62).

  Then, a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), and stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of reserved memory, whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the start winning that has occurred is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if not, the execution display device 1600 Peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning is performed as the game effect to be executed or the advance determination information such as the type of game effect to be executed is displayed. Can be grasped.

  When the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information relating to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC 1510a stores the first determination information indicated by the received previous determination command as the first (first) storage area. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the prior determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest prior determination information.

  In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, the big display expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2511 is in the on state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004, the process is shown in FIG. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on the counter value, the second reserved memory number is the maximum value (upper limit value). ) Is “4” (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S51. To store.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S53 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball B entering the second starting port 2004, the second on-hold state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed. While updating to correspond to the stored number, a command (second reserved number designation command 0 to 1) indicating the second reserved storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the storage process (step S20). It is supposed to be. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4. In addition, main control MPU of the main control board 1310 may perform the production | presentation prior determination process similar to step S45 in a 1st start port passage process after step S54. By replacing “first” in the description of FIG. 176 with “second”, the effect predetermination process in the second start port passage process is realized.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S37). The first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed in accordance with the first special symbol process flag.

1. A first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number. Symbol normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped. 1st special symbol stop process which stops the fluctuation display of the above-mentioned 1st special symbol so that it is done (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

  FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 179, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, then in step S102, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the RAM. . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol reserved storage area of the first control symbol stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is stored in the first storage area. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4 and stores the random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning prize in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big win is performed. Thereafter, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81) (step S106), the processing is terminated.

  FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability short-time state, high probability non-short-time state) (step S111), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the high probability time shown in FIG. 181 (A). A jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the low probability shown in FIG. 181 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S114).

  The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 181 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the game state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-short state) and short state (low probability short state)). And a jackpot determination table at a high probability and used when the gaming state is a high probability (a high probability short time state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the low probability, it is coincident with the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number is won, and the 299 types of first special random numbers are determined to be out of place. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the value (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process, the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. In the same manner as the jackpot determination table at the low probability referred to in order to match the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot, 299 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that (a jackpot probability at a low probability: 1/300).

  Moreover, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability, 10 types of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability coincide with the jackpot determination value, The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that 290 types of first special random numbers coincide with the loss determination value (high probability of big hit: 1/30). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high probability state (high probability short time state), the big hit determination value indicating that the big hit is won is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time short state)) and short time state (low) It is increased to 10 times the probability short state)). In the second special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process, the high probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. 10 kinds of second special random numbers including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, like the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the jackpot determination value indicating winning and match with the loss determination values indicating that the 290 kinds of second special random numbers are out of place (when the probability is high) Jackpot probability: 1/30).

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process and determines that it is a jackpot (step S115). ), The big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won by the big win is set and the process is terminated (step S116), and the first special read out in step S102 of the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, if it is determined that it is out of place, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S117). As a result of comparison between the reach determination table and the reach random number read out in step S102, if it is determined that the reach is shifted (step S118), a reach flag indicating that the change becomes reach is set. The process ends (step S119).

  FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 182, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S121).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 181 (B). (Step S122) The type of jackpot is determined, and the mode at the time of variable control stop of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type (stop symbol of the first special symbol) is determined (Step S123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be the off symbol as a mode when the first special symbol is stopped (step S124).

  As shown in FIG. 181 (B), in the symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with each determination result (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the first symbol random number is set different from the jackpot type determination probability determined based on the second symbol random number. ing.

In particular,
1. Opening / closing control of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R big hit gaming state A, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time in the fifteenth round (opening in which the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) and for a long time (opening that allows the game ball B to enter (easily), for example, 20 seconds), when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, When the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the special hit state after the end of the big hit gaming state is set. While the variable display of the symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times, the high probability short-time state is controlled, while the game ball B is placed in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round. Unacceptable When the can, 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low probability time reduction mode until the variation display of the special symbol after the completion of the jackpot gaming state (first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times
2. Opening and closing control of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R big hit gaming state B, and opening the big winning opening 2005 for a short time in the fifteenth round (opening in which the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) is set to an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state), and effective in the 15th round If the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 during the state, the high display is performed until the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the big hit gaming state is finished. If the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round while controlling the probability short-time state, a special symbol (the first special symbol and the first symbol after the jackpot gaming state is finished). Determining 15R jackpot B which variation display of the special symbols) is controlled to a low probability time reduction until it is executed 100 times, from among the two types of jackpot to any jackpot.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A in this example, as the operation schedule of the big prize opening 2005 in the 15th round, the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and the predetermined time (4.5) Seconds), the special winning opening 2005 is set to be opened for a long time (20 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short winning opening 2005 (0.5 seconds), the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. Then, when opening the long winning opening 2005 (20 seconds) for a long time, the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the sorting pieces 2415 is started, and the second receiving port 2008 is operated during the operating period of the sorting pieces 2415. The game ball B is set to be acceptable. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) ) Is set.

  On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B of this example, the operation schedule of the big prize opening 2005 in the 15th round is set so that the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when starting the short winning opening 2005 (0.5 seconds), the short-time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. The game ball B is set to be receivable at the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the sorting piece 2415. In addition, as a state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished) ) Is set.

  As described above, both the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B are valid in the 15th round (the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008, so that the high probability state is reached after the jackpot gaming state is finished. However, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, it is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when the second winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is opened. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be accepted, and further, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during a period in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the received game balls B to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2008. In this way, in the 15R big hit gaming state A, the probability that the game ball B will be received by the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely high, so the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. The probability of doing is also extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the winning prize opening 2005 is only briefly opened (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, so it is very difficult to accept the gaming ball B in the winning prize opening 2005. Since the sorting piece 2415 is only operated for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period in which the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B received by the big winning opening 2005 is the second. It is extremely difficult to be distributed (accepted) to the receiving port 2008. In this way, in the 15R big hit gaming state B, the probability that the game ball B will be received in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set to the valid state is extremely low, so the high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state ends. The probability of doing is also very low.

  As an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has elapsed, the sorting piece 2415 is opened for a long time (10). ), And when the 15th round in 15R jackpot gaming state A and 15R jackpot gaming state B starts, The schedule is started. In this way, by making the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 a single operation schedule, the amount of data related to the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is prevented from increasing as much as possible.

  In the 15R jackpot gaming state A and the 15R jackpot gaming state B of this example, the winning prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the winning prize opening 2005 in each of the first to fourteenth rounds. Is set to In addition, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in each of the first to fourteenth rounds, the sorting piece 2415 is not operated, and the game ball B is placed in the first receiving port 2007 instead of the second receiving port 2008 during that period. Is set to be accepted. In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, an invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted by the second receiving port 2008, and after the end of the big hit gaming state A state that is not controlled to a high probability state). Thus, in both the 15R big hit gaming state A and the 15R big hit gaming state B, the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving port 2008 when the big winning opening 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. A game of whether or not the game ball B is accepted is simply performed when the special winning opening 2005 is opened without performing a game of whether or not (accepted).

  In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. The symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol is set so that the judgment value distribution is different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, and the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 181 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, out of 15R jackpot A and 15R jackpot B, 15R jackpot A (15 rounds, which is relatively advantageous to the player) Distribution of 50 judgment values with respect to a big hit with a high probability that the game ball B will be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state with the eye and a high probability of controlling to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state ends Is set, however, the 15R big hit B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball B will be accepted by the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round is low, and the big hit gaming state ends. 50 determination values are assigned to a jackpot with a low probability of being controlled to a high probability state later. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 15R big hit A and 15R big hit B, 65 judgment value distributions are set for the 15R big hit A which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the distribution of 35 judgment values to 15R big hit B which is relatively disadvantageous to the player is set. In this way, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B, which is different in the player's advantage, is determined. Can be noticed. In addition, in the short time state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, a game on the second special symbol side (a game that allows the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed. At the time of the big hit on the symbol side, the 15R big hit game A is determined with a higher probability than the big hit on the first special symbol side. it can. Therefore, since the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive time, the game does not become monotonous.

  Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R big hit A is determined, the 15R big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol, and when the 15R big hit B is determined, the 15R big hit B symbol is determined as the big hit symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when 15R jackpot A is determined, 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, these lottery results (indicating either the type of jackpot, the reach out of the reach, or the off (the stop symbol form of the first special symbol) A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that it may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S126, this process is terminated. The peripheral control IC 1510a starts the left / middle / right decorative symbol variation display based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays the left ornament symbol → right ornament symbol → middle ornament symbol order. Thus, the display control of the effect display device 1600 is performed.

  Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets 15R out of jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the big hit A is specified, it is determined as the 15R big hit A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols), and when the 15R big hit B is specified, it is decided as the 15R big hit B symbol (common with the 15R big hit A symbol). When the variation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As described above, when the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is fluctuated and stopped at either the 15R big hit A symbol or the 15R big hit B symbol, it can be determined that the decorative symbol is a big hit from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R big hit A symbol and the 15R big hit B symbol, either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B cannot be discriminated.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a, as an aspect (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600, when the reach error is specified from the received determination result notification command, the symbol that is accompanied by the reach. (The combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs are the same.) If the outlier is specified, it is a detachable design that does not involve reach (a combination of decorative designs that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative designs. Are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (when the game effect ends), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the jackpot flag set. If so (Step S141), the type of jackpot determined in Step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (Step S142), and reach is performed. If the flag is set (step S143), the variation pattern table at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144). If neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal If there is a deviation (a deviation that does not execute reach production), the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the deviation Is selected (step S145).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 for the variation time thus determined.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Therefore, the main control MPU selects the selected variation pattern table from the plurality of types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination result based on the special random number and the design random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, the super reach effect of the reach effect is higher in the big hit expectation level than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state is increased.

  When the first special symbol variation display control is started, the first special symbol process flag is set so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. At the time of updating, this process is terminated.

  In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol random time (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is associated with the special symbol random time information set to about 1 second when the time is short. When the time is short, the variation pattern of the special symbol is set such that the variation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected at the time reduction is compared with the variation pattern at the time of non-time reduction so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. Symbol variation time information is set.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 184, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 185, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time-shortage counter is set to “0” while the time-shortage flag is set and the time-short state continuation count is set. (Step S183). If the counter value is not “0”, the time counter is counted down (step S184), and then it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is “0” (step S185). . As a result, if the counter value is “0”, the time reduction flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S186). If it is determined in the process of step S183 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is “0”, or if it is determined in the process of step S185 that the time reduction counter is not “0”. At that time, the process proceeds to step S187.

  When the jackpot flag is set (step S187), a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started is set (step S188), and the jackpot gaming state is started (the jackpot round start command is set). The waiting time (a period during which display indicating that the big hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S189). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time reduction flag is set, the time reduction flag is reset, and the counter value of the time reduction counter is further set. If it is not “0”, the counter value is reset (returned to “0”), and then a big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S190), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S191), this process is terminated.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S188, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. Thereby, the presentation according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S39).

  In step S189, the waiting time until the big hit gaming state is started is set in the interval timer. As shown in the figure, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls opening / closing of the big prize opening 2005 and is in an effective state in the fifteenth round (a big hit gaming state by receiving the game ball B at the second receiving port 2008) The winning prize opening / closing process (step S402) set to the high probability state after the completion of the game and the game ball B received in the winning prize 2005 in the 15th round to the second receiving opening 2008 The drive of the sorting piece 2415 is controlled so that it can be sorted, and effective in the 15th round Performing second receiving opening and closing process of monitoring whether the second receiving port 2008 gaming ball B is received in state (step S403), in sequence.

  FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-described special winning opening / closing process (step S402).

  If it is determined in the process of step S411 that the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has the big prize opening 2005. According to the operation schedule, when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds for long-time opening, 0.5 seconds for short-time opening) has elapsed from the open state of the special winning opening 2005 (step S412), or When the game ball B has won the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) in the open big winning opening 2005 (step S413), the open big winning opening 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is to be ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to be closed (step S415), the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds are transmitted as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. A big hit round end command is set according to (step S416), and the process proceeds to step S428.

  If it is determined in the process of step S411 that the big prize opening 2005 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 187, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 makes the big prize opening 2005. When it is determined to start a new round by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to the open state when it is time to open the large winning opening 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S417). (Step S418), a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the new number of rounds is set as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (Step S419). If it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2008, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds that open the grand prize opening 2005. If it is the start time (step S420), the valid state flag is set (step S421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the 15th round in step S420, it is necessary to reset the valid state flag at the end of the 15th round. Then, the closed prize winning opening 2005 or the prize winning opening 2005 is controlled to be in an open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. If it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to be in an open state (second open in the same round, etc.) (step S418), or a valid state flag When it is determined that it is not the time to set the game (when it is not at the start of the 15th round) (step S420), the closed large winning opening 2005 is controlled to be opened (step S422), and step S428 is performed. Migrate to Thus, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute an effect in accordance with the type of jackpot designated by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command and the current number of rounds.

  It should be noted that the valid state flag is a state set to an valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 and is controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is finished). It is a flag to show. In the fifteenth round of the first to fifteenth rounds that open the winning prize opening 2005, the game balls B received in the winning prize opening 2005 in the second receiving opening / closing process (step S403) described later are used as the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, the game ball B can be received in the second receiving port 2008 by drivingly controlling the sorting piece 2415 to be distributed to any one of the second receiving port 2008, and is set to an effective state.

  Further, if it is determined in the process of step S428 that the game ball B has been received in the special winning opening 2005, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. As a command to be sent to 1510, the winning prize entry command is set (step S429), and this process is terminated. As a result, when the winning prize entry command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the presentation display device 1600, lamp / LED, speaker, etc. produce an effect corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball B to the winning prize opening 2005. Can be executed.

  Further, if it is determined in step S417 that it is not the timing for opening the special winning opening 2005, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. When the number of rounds is completed by repeating the open state and closed state of the winning opening 2005 (step S423), the big hit execution flag is reset (step S424). If it is determined that a second receiving port passage flag, which will be described later, is set (step S425), a high probability flag is set (step S426), the time reduction flag is set and the counter value of the time reduction counter is set. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations in the short-time state (step S427), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the second reception pass flag is not set (step S425), the high-probability flag is not set, the time-short flag is set, and the time-saving state is set to the counter value of the time-count counter. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times to continue (step S427), this process is terminated. As described above, when it is determined that the second reception pass flag is set (the game ball B is received by the second reception 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round), the high probability flag is set. And the short time flag is set, and the high probability short time state is controlled, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted at the second entrance 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round) If it is determined that only the short time flag is set, the low probability short time state is controlled.

  FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second receiving opening / closing process (step S403).

  If it is determined in step S431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the open state (the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the sorting piece 2415), FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 from the opened state of the second receiving port 2008 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when opened for a long time). When 0.2 seconds at the time of short-time opening has elapsed (step S423), or when the current round (the 15th round) is ended by controlling the special winning opening 2005 to the closed state (step S423). S433), the second receiving port 2008 in the opened state is closed (the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007 side by the sorting piece 2415). Controlled to be state) (step S434).

  If it is determined in step S431 that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second receiving port 2008 (step S435), the closed second receiving port 2008 is controlled to open (step S436).

  Next, in the process of step S437, if it is determined that the game ball B is received in the opened second receiving port 2008, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is displayed. Determines whether or not the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round in the setting of the effective state flag (step S438). If it is determined that the game ball B has been received at the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state at the 15th round (step S438), the second acceptor is received during the valid state at the 15th round. When the second acceptance passage passing flag indicating that the game ball B has been received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S439), the second acceptance passage passing flag is set (step S440), and the peripheral control board 1510 is set. When the second reception pass command is set as the command to be transmitted (step S441), this process is terminated. As described above, unless the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second receiving port passing flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S426. Is not set, the high probability state is not controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished. In addition, when the second reception pass command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, an effect display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, etc. produce an effect corresponding to the reception of the game ball B to the second reception 2008. Can be executed.

  FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process (step S15).

  If it is determined in step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is on and it is determined that the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate-passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of normal symbols from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM. Run.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation time determination processing in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation pattern (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the ordinary symbol random number (step S804).
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol display mode of the function display unit 1400 is displayed so that the normal symbol variation control mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the normal symbol variation control is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display. Normal symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of symbols (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process regarding the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is a mode suggesting “per symbol”, the second start port door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of the ball B (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S803) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 173).

  FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is in an on state and the game ball B has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value by the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of ordinary symbols held is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of normal symbols held is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control on hold. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation counter in the RAM area of the main control MPU.

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, as a gate part passage process (step S802), you may make it like another example described below. For example, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is on and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 firstly The ordinary random number and the usual variable random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned normal holding number counter is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the holding number of normal symbols is “4” which is the maximum value. Do. When it is determined that the number of stored normal symbols is not the maximum value, the normal number of counters is incremented (add 1) so that the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols is newly held. Next, the previously obtained ordinary random number, the ordinary variable random number (the ordinary random number, the ordinary variable random number stored in the temporary storage area) are stored in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU. Are stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter. On the other hand, as a result of obtaining the counter value by the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is “4” which is the maximum value (the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is If it is the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and the obtained ordinary symbol fluctuation display control is newly performed. It is good also as preventing it from being suspended.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 191, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is the variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbol variable display stored in each storage area of the main control MPU RAM is stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted in accordance with the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 are counted from the first (first) area. Store in order. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area And when the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage is read out. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the current gaming state is a short-time state (low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state) (step S826). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-short state (low probability non-time-short state) (step S825), a non-time-short normal figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S825). In step S827, the selected normal symbol determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process (step S828).

  In addition, the normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and the short hit normal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is short time (low probability short time state, high probability short time state) A non-time / short-time ordinary figure determination table used when the gaming state is non-time / short-time (low probability non-time / short-time state). Then, in the hourly common figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all the 251 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the common figure judgment value indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not coincide with the usual deviation judgment value indicating that they are off. As described above, when the game ball B passes to the gate portion 2003 in the short time, it is surely won by the usual figure, and the second start opening door 2411 rotates to the second start opening 2004. The game ball B is controlled to be received.

  In addition, in the non-time-saving common figure determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, all the 251 types of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the common figure determination values indicating that each common figure is won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the misplacement determination value indicating the misplacement. As described above, in the non-time saving state, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the second start opening door 2411 is rotated and the second start port door 2411 is rotated. There is no control that allows the game ball B to be received in the second starting port 2004.

  When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected universal symbol determination table with the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal process, and determines that it is based on the normal symbol (step S829). ) After setting the flag for the normal symbol indicating that the variation is won for the normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol is stopped) The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, if the result of comparison between the selected regular symbol determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing is that it is determined to be out of place, the variation of the normal symbol A non-standard symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S832). After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process ends.

  In this example, in the control in the short time state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a win, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extremely reduced. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). When the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win, the second start port 2004 is controlled with an open / close pattern that is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . In other words, during the time-short state control, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, the time required for the variable symbol variable display control is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 2004 is It is much easier to win the game ball B in the second start port 2004 due to the long time of the game, and the game ball is more efficiently aimed at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. B can be awarded. In the non-time-short state control, it is assumed that the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. Also, the game ball B cannot be won at the second starting port 2004.

  As described above, during the non-time-short state control, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the second start port 2004 cannot win the game ball B. The game ball B must be launched (so-called “left-handed”) aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B wins. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball B is the obstacle nail. By contacting N, various movements are imparted to the game ball B and flow down. For this reason, even if the game ball B is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first start opening 2002, it does not necessarily win the first start opening 2002 but wins the first start opening 2002. The game ball B that has not been discharged is discharged to the outside through an out port 1008 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

  On the other hand, during the time-short state control, the game ball B can be won more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. In order for the ball B to win, the game ball B must be fired (so-called “right-handed”) aiming at the right side of the center bonus 2500. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003 is The passed game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 with a very high probability. For this reason, during the time-short state control, the game ball B driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (discharged to the outside from the out port 1008), and the non-time-short state control is performed. Compared to the first start opening 2002 in the middle, the game ball B wins the second start opening 2004 with extremely high efficiency.

  In addition, during the control of the short time state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is successful is very high, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the time when the second start port 2004 is opened is long, etc., so that the game ball B can easily win the second start port 2004, and further to the second start port 2004. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable symbol display control of the special symbol is about 1 second, which is extremely short compared with the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the non-time-short state control. The special symbol variation display control (the suspension of the special symbol variation display control) can be digested. That is, when the time-short state is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the game ball B is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 with the aim of the second starting port 2004, so that the big hit is made again in a short time. It is possible to expect a large number of game balls B by controlling to the big hit game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B paid out by winning the game ball B to the second start port 2004 is one, so that the game to the second start port 2004 is Even if the winning of the ball B frequently occurs, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[11. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 192, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, for example, various kinds of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms elapses. While the flag T is set, a 16 ms progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like based on the command received from the main control board 1310 is executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), the loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 193 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the processes in steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second fluctuation pattern setting process)). Control processing related to the effect display device 1600 is executed based on the fact that the variation pattern command transmitted by being set is received.

  In the sound control process in step S603, a control process related to a speaker or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the effect drive board 1720 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) (for example, a random number used for effects related to hold prefetching) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command of step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

[12. Production related to pending changes]
In the present embodiment, based on the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the effect display device 1600 executes the hold display before digestion (pre-digestion hold display), and the hold display is digested. The decorative body 3511 executes post-digestion hold display (post-digestion hold display). That is, as the “pending display” of the present embodiment, “pending display before digestion” indicating a pre-digestion hold that has not yet been provided to the game, and “digestion” indicating a pre-digestion hold that is provided to the current game. This is a generic term that includes “post-hold display”. By executing post-digest hold display, the hold display is continuously displayed even after the decorative symbol change display (special design change display) is started. , It can be used for productions that suggest the degree of expectation of jackpot.

  Specifically, the hold display of the present embodiment is based on the hold number (holding memory) specified by the hold number designation command when a game ball is won (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. When the number is increased, one display of the hold before digestion (hold display before digestion) is added to the effect display device 1600 and displayed. On the other hand, when the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) based on the hold display is started (start condition is satisfied) and one hold display before digestion is digested, the hold specified from the hold number designation command In order to reduce the number (holding storage number) by 1 and erase one holding display before digestion in the effect display device 1600, and to display the holding display that has been digested as a holding display after digestion The light emitting decoration 3511 is updated. In this embodiment, as the hold display before digestion, a circular display body (see FIG. 194) is displayed in the hold display area set above the display area of the effect display device 1600. As the hold display after digestion, the light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is expressed by light emission display in a predetermined color. For the circular display body (see FIG. 194) displayed in the hold display area, the color of the decorated part is expressed by a plurality of antique colors, so the color of the part excluding the decorated part Is one of four colors.

  Moreover, in a present Example, it is based on the said pending | holding display by changing the display mode of these pending | holding display until execution of the pending | holding display after digestion is complete | finished after the pending | holding display before digestion is performed as a pending | holding display. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot for the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display).

  In this embodiment, a hold number designation command and a pre-determination command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the winning of a game ball (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. . When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the hold number designation command and the advance determination command in the command analysis processing in step S601, the hold specified by the hold notice determination table corresponding to these commands, that is, the hold number designation command. The pending notice determination table corresponding to the number (holding memory count) and the advance judgment information (big hit, reach loss, loss, etc.) specified from the prior judgment command is selected, and the judgment value set in the pending notice determination table is read. A hold change pattern (hold change scenario) set in the hold notice determination table is determined by comparing with a random number for holding notice determination, and a hold notice effect is performed based on the determined hold change pattern. In addition, in the hold notice determination table, the distribution of the judgment value for each hold change pattern differs for each pre-determination information specified by the pre-judgment command (big hit, reach lose, lose, etc.), and the appearance rate of each hold change pattern Are different.

  Thus, in the hold notice effect, the hold change pattern (hold change scenario) is displayed during the display period from when the hold display before digestion is displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the hold display changes to stop after digestion and ends. ), The display mode of the hold display is updated, and every time the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) based on the hold display different from the hold display starts (the start condition is satisfied) The display mode of the display can be changed.

  Next, the hold notice determination table will be described. In the hold notice determination table, a plurality of types of hold change patterns are set for each hold number (hold storage number) specified by the hold number designation command, and stored in the control ROM 1510b of the peripheral control board 1510. As the hold notice determination table, the hold notice determination table 1 used when the hold 1 is lit (the number of holds before digestion = 1), the hold notice determination table 2 used when the hold 2 is lit (the number of holds before digestion = 2), the hold A hold notice determination table 3 used when 3 lights up (holding number before digestion = 3) and a hold notice determination table 4 used when hold 4 lights up (holding number before digestion = 4) are provided. Each of these hold notice determination tables 1 to 4 defines a plurality of kinds of hold change patterns, and each of these hold change patterns includes an effect display device 1600 and a decorative body main body 3511 each time the hold display is digested. It is set how the display mode of the hold display changes (how the display mode changes, and at what timing).

  For example, in the hold notice determination table 1 used when hold 1 is turned on (the number of hold before digestion = 1), the hold change pattern 1A to be digested in which the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 does not change from the initial mode, When the hold display in the effect display device 1600 is digested and the post-digest display is displayed on the decorative body main body 3511, a hold change pattern 1B that changes only once from the initial mode is provided. In addition, in the hold notice determination table 2 used when hold 2 is turned on (the number of hold before digestion = 2), a hold change pattern 2A that is digested without changing the display mode of the hold display in the effect display device 1600 from the initial mode and When the change from the pre-digestion hold to the post-digestion hold is made, the hold change pattern 2B changes only once, and when the pre-digestion hold number = 2 changes to the pre-digestion hold number = 1 state. On hold change pattern 2C in which the state of the hold display changes only once, and the state of the hold display changes when the pre-digestion hold number = 2 state changes to the pre-digestion hold number = 1 state. There is a hold change pattern 2D or the like in which the display mode of the hold changes further when the change is made to the hold after digestion. Similarly, the hold display is also shown in the hold notice determination table 3 used when the hold 3 is lit (the number of holds before digestion = 3) and the hold notice determination table 4 used when the hold 4 is lit (the number of holds before digestion = 4). A plurality of on-hold change patterns are set in which the display mode of the on-hold display is changed by a predetermined number of times before digestion is completed.

  Moreover, as a display mode (including an initial display mode) of the hold display set in the hold change pattern, four hold displays are displayed in white (basic color), blue, yellow, or red. A display mode is prepared. Then, when determining the hold change pattern from the hold notice determination table, as a result of the change of the display mode of the hold display to the end, the big hit expectation is increased in the order of white (basic color) → blue → yellow → red. Is set to That is, when the lottery result is identified as a big hit as the prior decision information, a hold change pattern that becomes a display mode (for example, red) with a high expectation level for the big hit is determined with a high probability as the final hold display display mode, When the lottery result is identified as a loss (losing, reach loss) as information, it is determined with a high probability a holding change pattern that becomes a display mode (for example, white) with a low expectation degree of jackpot as a final holding display mode. When the final hold display mode is displayed in a display mode with a high degree of jackpot expectation, the player's expectation for the jackpot game is increased.

  In addition, in the hold change pattern, the display mode of the hold display does not change in the reverse order of white → blue → yellow → red, and the display mode of the hold display is maintained when the hold display is digested. Alternatively, the next display mode is set to be a display mode with a high expectation degree of jackpot. For this reason, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low jackpot expectation level, there is still a possibility of changing to a display mode with a high jackpot expectation level when digesting the hold display. The aspect can be noticed with expectation to the end.

  In addition, in the hold change pattern, the display mode of the hold display does not necessarily change in the order of blue → yellow → red after the display mode is displayed in white (basic color), and the display mode is not in white (basic color). Starting from the beginning (for example, starting from the initial yellow color by the on-hold change pattern at the time of the hold 1 lighting), or changing to the next display mode by skipping one or more display modes (for example, the hold change pattern at the time of the hold 2 lighting up) To change from white (basic color) to red). For this reason, even if there are few opportunities (the number of holding | maintenances) that the display mode of a hold display changes, the display mode of a hold display can be displayed with a display mode with high expectation degree of jackpots. Moreover, even if the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode with a low expectation degree of jackpot, it is not possible to predict which display mode the next display mode will change, and the display mode of the hold display until the end You can get attention with your expectations.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a when changing the display mode of the hold display, and displays various sound effects corresponding to the display mode of the hold display after the change. A speaker (for example, a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, a main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 and the like) provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 or the like. In this embodiment, the sound effect is preset so as to differ depending on the display mode (color) of the hold display after the change. For example, when the display mode of the hold display after the change is blue, it is effective. When the sound effect “Peep” is output, and the display mode of the hold display after the change is yellow, the sound effect “Pee, Pico” is output and the display display mode of the hold display after the change When is red, the sound effect “pico-pico” is output.

  In the present embodiment, the initial color of the hold display is preset to white as described above. This white color is the same color as the white color set as the color of the hold display when the hold change suggestion effect is not performed.

  In addition, in the hold advance notice determination table, a special hold change pattern that becomes a rainbow color may be determined as the display form of the final hold display only when the jackpot is specified as the advance determination information from the advance determination command. By determining such a special hold change pattern, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in rainbow color, it is determined that the lottery result will be a big hit when the hold display is digested. The expectation of the player for is increasing.

  In addition, in the hold advance notice determination table, when the loss is specified as the predetermination information from the predetermination command, the hold change pattern that is white (basic color) or blue is determined as the final hold display display mode. When the jackpot and the reach are specified as the pre-determination information from the pre-determination command, the hold change pattern that becomes yellow or red is set as the final display mode of the hold display. For this reason, when the display mode of the hold display is displayed in yellow or red, it is determined that the reach effect is executed at least after reaching the hold display, and the player's expectation for the big hit game is increased. It is like that.

  In this embodiment, by determining the hold change pattern when adding the hold display before digestion, a series of changes until the display mode of the hold display is finally changed is determined. As the determination method, when the display of the hold display is started, only the display mode of the hold display at the start time and the display mode of the final hold display may be determined. And, when the display mode of the hold display at the start time and the display mode of the final hold display are different, at least the display mode of the final hold display before the target hold display is digested So that the display mode of the hold display changes every time when the timing at which the display mode of the hold display can change is reached. Even with such a determination method, the display mode of the hold display can be sequentially changed until the hold display in the effect display device 1600 and the decorative body main body 3511 is completed.

  Next, the hold change suggesting effect performed in addition to the hold notice effect will be described. The hold change suggestion effect is an effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes during the display period of the hold display (the hold display before digestion and the hold display after digestion). That is, in the above-described hold notice effect, the hold display is changed based on the hold change pattern every time the change display of the decorative symbol (special symbol change display) is started (start condition is satisfied) during the display period of the hold display. Although the display mode can be changed, the hold change suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes at the timing when the display mode of the hold display changes can be executed.

  Specifically, the display mode of the hold display changes based on the hold change pattern at the time when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) (start condition is satisfied). Select the hold change suggestion effect determination table corresponding to the determination result, and compare the determination value set in the hold change suggestion effect determination table with the read random number for determining the hold change suggestion effect By doing so, one suggestive effect pattern is determined from a plurality of suggestive effect patterns set in the pending change suggestion effect determination table.

  In the hold change suggestion effect determination table, a plurality of types of suggestion effect patterns are set, and any hold change suggestion effect is not executed. Suggestion effect pattern 1 (only the display mode of the hold display is changed in accordance with the update display by the hold digestion) Effect pattern), a suggestion effect pattern 2 in which a hold change suggestion effect in which a specific image or the like appears before a change in the display mode of the hold display is performed (a specific character image preceding the change in the display mode of the hold display) Etc., and a pattern for performing an effect suggesting the possibility of changing depending on the type of the character image) is set. The hold change suggestion effect determination table is stored in the control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, in the hold change suggestion effect determination table, the distribution of the determination values for each of the suggestion effect patterns described above is the same, and the appearance rate of each hold change suggestion effect is the same, but the distribution of the determination values is different. The appearance rate of each pending change suggestion effect may be different.

[13. Gray scale production]
Next, as an example of the effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 by various commands from the main control board 1310, the gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a described above. A gray scale effect in which the setting mode is expanded and various image elements displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are switched from a full color image to a gray scale image will be described. Hereinafter, examples of effects displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when performing grayscale effects will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 196. FIG. 194 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a gray scale effect, FIG. 195 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 194, and FIG. 196 is an explanatory diagram following FIG. 195. Here, based on various commands from the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 113 based on the reception of the game ball to the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 shown in FIG. Peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 171) is a hold change suggestion effect (pending notice effect) without a grayscale effect, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is a hold change suggestion effect with a grayscale effect. (Pending notice effect) will be briefly described.

  The gray scale effect is executed by performing a gray scale effect availability lottery that determines whether or not to perform a gray scale effect at a predetermined time and determining that a gray scale effect is to be performed. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the hold number designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 based on the winning of the game ball (start condition is established) at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and When the prior determination command is received and the selection of the hold notice determination table described above, the type of the hold change pattern set in the hold notice determination table and the suggestion effect pattern are determined, regardless of the determination result, A lottery for gray scale production will be held. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the present embodiment can set the execution of the gray scale effect at the same time as the setting of the hold notice effect and the hold change suggesting effect, and in parallel with the various hold change suggesting effects described above. It is possible to advance the gray scale effect or to advance the gray scale effect independently of the above-described various on-hold change suggestion effects. In this embodiment, the probability that any pending change suggestion is determined is set to 1/20, whereas the probability that the grayscale effect is determined by the grayscale effect availability lottery is determined. Is set to 1/50, and the probability that the grayscale effect will be performed in parallel with the pending change suggesting effect is less frequent than the probability that the grayscale effect will not be performed in parallel with the pending change suggesting effect. Is set to

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a decides to perform the gray scale effect in the gray scale effect availability lottery, it sets the gray scale effect flag indicating execution of the gray scale effect to ON, and the main control board 1310 performs the next operation. The gray scale production starts when the on-hold digestion starts. When the gray scale effect is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP so that the gray scale setting mode by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is developed, and various image elements displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 Is switched from a full-color image to a grayscale image, and when the light emission control of various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 including the decorative body main body 3511 is performed, all the light emission colors of the various LEDs are changed to white To start. Since various processes related to the gray scale effect are continuously performed while the gray scale effect flag is set to ON, the process of the gray scale setting mode by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is set to ON. This is repeated at the time of generating each frame in the set period. The end time of the gray scale effect is described in the later-described effect example, but a predetermined end time is set, and when the end time arrives, the gray scale effect flag is set to OFF and the gray scale effect is set. The production will end.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a draws whether or not to perform the hold change suggestion effect by adding the hold when the main control board 1310 has already put on hold when the gray scale effect is already being performed. When performing a hold change suggestion effect, it is set not to newly perform a gray scale effect lottery. This is because the grayscale production is already in progress, so the grayscale production will be overwritten and not extended unnecessarily. This is to prevent the scale effect from being canceled.

  Next, a description will be given of examples of effects when the pending change suggestion effect and the grayscale effect proceed in parallel or without progressing in parallel. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a according to the present embodiment instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a when the progress of the effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 starts based on various commands from the main control board 1310. As shown in FIG. 194 (a), a background image 1640 in which outer space (the earth and the moon) is expressed is displayed on the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and the front side of the background image 1640 is displayed. The left decorative pattern 1650a is on the left side of the display area of the effect display apparatus 1600, the middle decorative pattern 1650b is on the center of the display area of the effect display apparatus 1600, and the right decorative pattern 1650c is on the right side of the display area of the effect display apparatus 1600. Each variable display starts. At this time, in the case where the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a recognizes that there are two game balls (two hold balls) that are not yet provided for the game, and does not perform the hold change suggestion effect. Instructing the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, as a hold display, the first hold display 1655a having a white color from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the upper right side of the background image 1640 as the hold display. , And the second hold display 1655b having a white color. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, decorates the decorative body main body 3511 with light emission decoration in one of white, blue, yellow, and red so as to correspond to the current variation display of the decorative design. A plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the backside movable decorative body decoration board 3512 shown in FIG. 130 are controlled.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to be translucent to the extent that the background image 1640 can be visually recognized when the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variably displayed. The left decorative design 1650a is from the upper left to the lower left of the display region, the middle decorative design 1650b is from the upper center to the lower central of the display region, and the right decorative design 1650c is from the upper right to the right of the display region. The display is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating toward the lower side.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and then the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310 based on the acceptance of the game ball to the game, the hold display is performed to notify the number of the hold balls that have not yet been used in the game.

  For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c. If it is determined that there is no hold change suggestion effect for the hold addition increased by one ball, the right side of the second hold display 1655b is displayed as the hold display. The 3rd hold display 1655c which has white is displayed. As a result, the three holding balls are from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 toward the upper right side, the first holding display 1655a having white, the second holding display 1655b having white, and the first having white. Displayed in a row in the order of 3 hold display 1655c.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to further increase the number of reserved balls from three to one until the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are stopped and displayed. In this case, a specific hold change pattern (for example, white → blue → yellow → red → When it is determined to perform the hold change suggestion effect (the effect of the suggestion effect pattern 1) according to the hold change pattern corresponding to the change of red, white is displayed on the right side of the third hold display 1655c as the hold display. A fourth hold display 1655d having is displayed. As a result, the four holding balls, from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600, to the upper right side, the first holding display 1655a having white, the second holding display 1655b having white, and the third having white. The hold display 1655c and the fourth hold display 1655d having a white color are displayed in a row. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a with symbol 1 and stops the middle decorative symbol 1650b with symbol 2 as shown in FIG. 194 (b). The right decoration symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed as symbol 3 to notify that it is out of place.

[13-1. Reservation change suggestion production without gray scale production]
Subsequently, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the hold change suggesting effect and does not perform the gray scale effect, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, as shown in FIG. 194 (c). The left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variably displayed along with the pending digestion by 1310, and it is recognized that there are four to three reserved balls, as shown in FIG. 194 (b). The second hold display 1655b to the fourth hold display 1655d are moved one by one to the left side, and the first hold display 1655a having white color from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 toward the upper right side is displayed. The second hold display 1655b having the first hold display and the third hold display 1655c having the blue color are displayed in a line. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the third hold display 1655c to perform the hold change suggesting effect shown in FIG. When the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variably displayed as the color of the fourth reserved display 1655d for which red has been determined, the effect is changed from white to blue. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c to notify that it is out of place.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in a variable manner as the main control board 1310 is suspended. , Recognizing that there are 3 to 2 holding balls, the second holding display 1655b and the third holding display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (c) are moved one by one to the left, and the effect display device 1600 From the upper center of the display area toward the upper right side, the first hold display 1655a having white and the second hold display 1655b having yellow are displayed in a line. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the second hold display 1655b, and changes the color of the third hold display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (c) from blue to yellow. Progress the production. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c to notify that it is out of place.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in a variable manner as the main control board 1310 is suspended. First, the second holding display 1655b described above is moved to the left by recognizing that the number of holding balls is two to one, and the first holding display having red in the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 1655a is displayed. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the first hold display 1655a, and changes the color of the above-described second hold display 1655b from yellow to red to advance the presentation. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a increases the number of holdings by one by adding the holding when the main control board 1310 is holding up to two balls, and instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a holding display, A second hold display 1655b having a white color is displayed on the right side of the first hold display 1655a (here, it is assumed that the lottery of the hold change suggestion effect for the hold addition is lost (the hold change suggestion effect is not performed)). . Thereby, the two holding balls are arranged in a row in the order of the first holding display 1655a having red and the second holding display 1655b having white from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the upper right side. Is displayed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a with symbol 4 and stops the middle decorative symbol 1650b with symbol 5 as shown in FIG. 194 (d). The right decoration symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed as symbol 6 to notify that it is out of place.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a and, as shown in FIG. 195 (e), the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, And the right decorative design 1650c are displayed in a variable manner, and the second holding display 1655b shown in FIG. 194 (d) is moved one by one to the left by recognizing that there are two to one holding balls. A first hold display 1655a having a white color is displayed at the upper center of the 1600 display area. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted on the back bottom movable decorative body decoration substrate 3512 shown in FIG. 130 so that the color of the first hold display 1655a shown in FIG. 194 (d) is red. The plurality of full-color LEDs are controlled to start the red light emitting decoration of the decorative body main body 3511. In other words, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the holding change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 194 (b), and the decorative body main body is changed to the red color of the fourth holding display 1655d determined as the final color of the holding display. 3511 lighting decoration is started.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c with the same symbol (symbol 7) as shown in FIG. 195 (f). The reach is formed, and the variable display of the medium decorative design 1650b is continued.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to express the outer space (the earth and the moon) in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 195 (g). The background image 1640 is switched to the background image 1645 in which warp navigation that can move between the stars is represented, and the super image is developed. In the present embodiment, since a plurality of types are set in advance as super reach (the background image is different, some time is taken to develop to super reach, some is short, some are set to be different) When the reach is formed and develops into the super reach, it corresponds to the type of the super reach from the background image 1640 in which the outer space (the earth and the moon) is expressed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. Background image (for example, a representation of a supply base on the earth, a representation of docking to a supplement ship, a representation of a lunar base, a representation of escape from a black hole, the approach of a huge meteorite Can be listed, and those with encounters with unidentified ships can be represented.)

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to place the pressing operation unit 303 shown in FIG. 1 in the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 196 (h). The button effect of the mode in which the simulated button graphic 1647 moves upward is displayed. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to move the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c toward the lower left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. The left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c are stopped and displayed in the same symbol (symbol 7), and the variable display of the middle decorative symbol 1650b is continued. Thereafter, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop display the medium decoration symbol 1650b with the symbol 6 and notify that it is out of place.

  Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a and, as shown in FIG. 196 (i), as the middle decorative symbol 1650b, a symbol (symbol different from the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c). 6), a normal background image 1640 in which outer space (the earth and the moon) is expressed from a background image 1645 in which warp navigation that can move between stars is expressed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. (Return to the original normal background image 1640) and the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, which are stopped and displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, The display is stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c as the main control board 1310 performs the suspension.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify that it is a big hit when the medium decoration symbol 1650b is stopped and displayed as the symbol 7 in FIG. 196 (h). Thereafter, a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player compared with the normal state is generated. If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a and does not develop into the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g), the CPU proceeds to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (i). proceed.

[13-2. Pending change suggestion production with gray scale production]
Returning to FIG. 194, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and, as shown in FIG. Is stopped, followed by a pending change suggestion effect, and when the grayscale effect is not accompanied, the effect shown in FIG. On the other hand, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a about the development of the grayscale setting mode when performing the hold change suggesting effect and performing the grayscale effect in parallel. Following 194 (b), as shown in FIG. 194 (r), all the images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are displayed in gray by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the main control board 1310 is suspended. While converting to a scale, when performing light emission control of various LEDs provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 including the decorative body main body 3511, a process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs to white is started. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to convert the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c into gray scales in the display area of the effect display device 1600. , And recognizing that there are four to three holding balls, the second holding display 1655b to the fourth holding display 1655d shown in FIG. From the upper center of the display area of the display device 1600 toward the upper right side, a first reserved display 1655a having a color converted from white to grayscale, a second reserved display 1655b having a color converted from white to grayscale, and blue Are displayed in a row in the order of the third reserved display 1655c having a color converted to grayscale. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the third hold display 1655c to perform the hold change suggesting effect shown in FIG. When the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variably displayed, the color of the fourth reserved display 1655d for which red has been determined is changed to a gray scale by changing from white to blue. To proceed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c to notify that it is out of place.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display all the images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a along with the suspension by the main control board 1310. Convert to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Recognizing that the number of holding balls is three to two, the second holding display 1655b and the third holding display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (r) are moved one by one to the left, and the display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. From the upper center of the area to the upper right side, the first reserved display 1655a having a color converted from white to grayscale and the second reserved display 1655b having a color converted from yellow to grayscale are displayed in a row. To do. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the second hold display 1655b, and changes the color of the third hold display 1655c shown in FIG. 194 (r) from blue to yellow. Produce with the color converted to grayscale. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c to notify that it is out of place.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to display all the images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a along with the suspension by the main control board 1310. Convert to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and there are two to one holding balls. The second hold display 1655b described above is moved one by one to the left, and the first hold display 1655a having a color obtained by converting red to gray scale is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600. To do. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as the first hold display 1655a, and changes the color of the second hold display 1655b described above from yellow to red and converts it to grayscale. Proceed with the production. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a increases the number of holdings by one by adding the holding when the main control board 1310 is holding up to two balls, and instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a as a holding display, A second hold display 1655b having a color obtained by converting white to gray scale is displayed on the right side of the first hold display 1655a (here, the lottery of the hold change suggestion effect for the hold addition is lost (the hold change suggestion effect is Do not do)). As a result, the two holding balls are displayed from the upper center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 toward the upper right side, the first holding display 1655a having a color in which red is converted to gray scale, and white is converted to gray scale. Are displayed in a row in the order of the second hold display 1655b having the color. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then stops and displays the left decorative symbol 1650a with symbol 4 and stops the middle decorative symbol 1650b with symbol 5 as shown in FIG. 194 (s). The right decoration symbol 1650c is stopped and displayed as symbol 6 to notify that it is out of place.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a and, as shown in FIG. Convert all images displayed in the display area to grayscale. Here, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to variably display the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, and there are two to one holding balls. 194 (s), the second hold display 1655b shown in FIG. 194 (s) is moved one to the left, and the first display area of the effect display device 1600 has a color obtained by converting white to grayscale. One hold display 1655a is displayed. At this time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a changes the color of the first hold display 1655a shown in FIG. 194 (s) so that the color before the conversion to the gray scale is red, but the color is white. The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the backside movable decorative body decoration board 3512 shown in 130 are controlled to start the light emitting decoration of the decorative body main body 3511. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a changes to white instead of the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display when the hold change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 194 (b) is performed. Light emitting decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 is started.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to stop and display the left decorative symbol 1650a and the right decorative symbol 1650c with the same symbol (symbol 7) as shown in FIG. 195 (u). The reach is formed, and the variable display of the medium decorative design 1650b is continued. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and then ends the gray scale effect immediately before developing to the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g). In this embodiment, the predetermined timing after the end of the normal reach and before the development to the super reach is set as the end time of the gray scale effect, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a The processing for converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is ended by turning the gray scale effect flag OFF, and the pending change shown in FIG. 194 (b) The process of changing to white as the light emitting decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 is finished without changing the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display in the case of performing the suggestion effect. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs to white when performing the emission control of the various LEDs provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, a plurality of types are set in advance as the super reach (the background image is different, and there are cases where the time until development to the super reach is long, some are short, some are different. When the reach is formed and developed into super reach, the type of super reach is determined from the background image 1640 in which outer space (the earth and the moon) is expressed in the entire display area of the effect display device 1600. And corresponding background images (for example, a representation of a supply base on the earth, a representation of docking on a supply ship, a representation of a lunar base, a representation of escape from a black hole, a huge You can list things that express the approach of meteorites, those that express encounters with unidentified ships, etc.). Thereby, in this embodiment, while being able to set two or more times when a gray scale effect is complete | finished, the full color image which a player can identify a color by the time when a gray scale effect is complete | finished The type of effect image can be made different.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to proceed to the effect of developing into the super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g). Thereby, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, from the image that is entirely converted to grayscale, a full-color image background image 1645, a full-color image left decoration pattern 1650a, a full-color image middle decoration pattern 1650b, a full-color image. The right decorative design 1650c and the first hold display 1655a having the full-color image white are switched to the original full-color image, and the light-emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is changed from the color changed to white. In the case of performing the hold change suggesting effect shown in 194 (b), the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display is switched to red, and the original color is restored. In addition, all the light emission colors of the various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 correspond to the production of the super reach from the white until the gray scale production is finished when the production progresses to the super reach. Switch to the luminescent color (full color luminescent mode).

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to proceed to the button effect shown in FIG. 196 (h) described above, and to the effect shown in FIG. 196 (i). The left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are variably displayed as the main control board 1310 performs the reservation.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify that it is a big hit when the medium decoration symbol 1650b is stopped and displayed as the symbol 7 in FIG. 196 (h). Thereafter, a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player compared with the normal state is generated. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to produce a gray scale effect when it does not develop into the super reach shown in FIG. 195 (g) following FIG. 195 (u) described above. finish. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the process of converting all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the hold change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 194 (b). In this case, the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display is not changed to red, and the process of changing to white as the light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is finished, and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are finished. The process of changing all the emission colors of the various LEDs provided to each to white is terminated, and the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is instructed to proceed to the above-described effect shown in FIG. 196 (i).

  As described above, in the pending change suggestion effect that performs the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), the grayscale effect is not performed as all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. All the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the hold change suggesting effect are converted to gray scale, and the color of the hold display is changed from what color It is difficult to determine what color has changed (holding change). Thereby, in the gray scale effect, the suggestion of the expected value due to the hold display can be hidden.

  In addition, in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied by the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), as all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the hold change without the gray scale effect is performed. In the suggestion effect, all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) are converted to gray scale. As a result, even when a hold change is performed by setting one of the hold change patterns among a plurality of predetermined hold change patterns, the above-described screen is displayed even if the hold change is performed using the same hold change pattern. In the case of one frame of screen data that prescribes the above, there is a case where an effect is promoted by a full-color image without specifying the gray scale setting mode as an object processing command (that is, the gray scale effect is not performed), and the case of one frame that prescribes the above-described screen. Depending on the case where the grayscale setting mode is specified as the object processing command in the screen data (that is, the grayscale effect is performed) and the effect is promoted by the grayscale image, it is possible to create another effect in which the impression given to the player is completely different. it can.

  When the gray scale effect is finished, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a finishes the process of converting all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to the gray scale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and FIG. In the case where the hold change suggesting effect shown in b) is performed, the process of changing to the white as the light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is ended without changing the red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display. As a result, when proceeding to the effect that develops to the super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g), the display area of the effect display device 1600 includes a background image 1645 of a full color image from an image that is entirely converted to grayscale. The left decorative pattern 1650a of the full color image, the middle decorative pattern 1650b of the full color image, the right decorative pattern 1650c of the full color image, and the first hold display 1655a having the white color of the full color image are switched to the original full color image. The light emitting decoration of the decorative body 3511 is a red color of the fourth hold display 1655d determined as the final color of the hold display when the hold change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 194 (b) is performed from the color changed to white. It will switch back to the original color. In other words, while the grayscale effect is in progress, the indication of the expected value due to the hold display is hidden, whereas in the effect that the grayscale effect ends and develops to super reach, the expectation due to the hold display hidden by the grayscale effect is expected. By releasing the value, it is possible to proceed with an extremely novel effect that the expected value due to the hold display can be suggested.

  Further, in the reserved change suggesting effect in which the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 195 (t) to 195 (u) is performed, the decoration in blue shown in FIG. 195 (e) in the reserved change suggesting effect in which the gray scale effect is not performed. Since the light emitting decoration of the body main body 3511 and the light emitting decoration of the yellow decorative body main body 3511 shown in FIG. 195 (f) are all changed to white, the light emitting decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 is started. It is difficult to determine the color of the hold display based on the color of the light emitting decoration of the body main body 3511. Thereby, in a gray scale effect, the suggestion of the expected value by the light emission decoration of the decorative body main body 3511 can be hidden.

  Further, when the color of the hold display is changed, sound effects corresponding to the color of the hold display are generated by various speakers (for example, the vibration speaker 354 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, the top center speaker 462, the top side, etc. The speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4), and the player himself / herself compares and compares the color of the hold display color by the sound effect that flows. It is possible to enjoy the progress of the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player even in the gray scale production.

  Further, in the hold change suggestion effect that performs the grayscale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), as all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the change that does not perform the grayscale effect is performed. Since all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the suggestion effect are converted to gray scale, the image data converted to gray scale is converted to gray scale image data. Since there is no need to store in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 shown in FIG. 171 in advance, it is possible to increase production variations without increasing the capacity of the image data.

[14. Volume adjustment]
Next, the volume adjustment function installed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described below.

  First, as a volume adjusting means that can be operated by the game management side (hall side) (the player side cannot operate), the peripheral control board 1510 sets the main volume setting value to a predetermined level (for example, large, medium, small). The slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d can be adjusted in three stages). When the game management side (hall side) operates the volume adjustment switch 1510d, a volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 or the like with a main volume setting value corresponding to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Production sound can be output from speakers such as 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, and body frame speaker 622 of body frame 4.

  Further, as the volume adjusting means that can be operated by the player, the effect operation unit 300 sets the sub-set value of the volume to a predetermined level (for example, 6 levels 1 to 6 where 6 is the maximum) when the player rotates. The rotation operation unit 302 of the rotation drive unit 340 that can be adjusted is provided. This sub set value can be adjusted to 6 levels regardless of the main set value setting stage, but the volume that the player can actually hear is displaced based on the main set value setting stage. That is, the volume that the player can actually hear is based on a value obtained by multiplying the main setting value and the sub setting value, and the maximum volume when the main setting value is “large” and the sub setting value is “6”. When the main setting value is “small” and the sub setting value is “1”, the minimum volume is set. When the player side operates the rotation operation unit 302, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347 provided in the rotation drive unit 340 and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are transmitted via the peripheral control input circuit. Are input to various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The peripheral control IC 1510a monitors whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated. If it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated in the right direction, the sound volume sub-setting value is set according to the operation amount. When it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated in the left direction, processing for increasing the volume is performed according to the amount of operation.

  Then, in the peripheral control IC 1510a, the volume adjustment processing by the rotation operation unit 302 is performed before the game is started since the symbol variation according to the big hit determination is not yet performed (the period during which the demonstration display or the like can be performed). ) As well as during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation corresponding to the jackpot determination is executed, the player is allowed to accept the volume, and when the more important performance appears By making it possible to change the setting of values flexibly, the game entertainment is maintained. It should be noted that the volume adjustment processing by the rotary operation unit 302 is executed in a period before the game is started since the symbol variation according to the big hit determination has not yet been performed (a period in which a demonstration display or the like can be performed). When the sub-setting value of the volume is changed, a setting confirmation sound corresponding to the changed sub-setting value of the volume (for example, “Pi” sound effect) is output from various speakers, while the game is When the volume adjustment process by the rotation operation unit 302 is executed and the volume sub-setting value is changed during the period when the symbol variation according to the big hit determination is started, the setting confirmation sound is not output. I am going to do that. This is because during the period during which the demonstration display can be performed, there is a possibility that no effect sound is output, so it is necessary to make the player recognize the volume by the setting confirmation sound, while the symbol variation is executed. Since there is a high possibility that any production sound is being output during the period, the player can recognize the volume by changing the production sound itself, rather the setting confirmation sound hinders the production sound. I try to prevent that.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, during the period when the symbol variation is being performed, the player can adjust the volume (change the sub-setting value) by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. During the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, at least during the period in which a specific effect using the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303) that can be operated by the player is being executed, Even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the volume is not limited.

  First, a case where an operation effect that can change the effect by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the player is performed as an effect during the execution of symbol variation will be described with reference to FIG. As an operation effect using such a rotation operation unit 302, for example, when a player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 from among a plurality of types of selection images displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. There is an effect in which any one selected image is selected, and the selected image selected by the player is changed to an image suggesting a big hit expectation after a predetermined period.

  As shown in FIG. 197, a plurality of types of selection images are displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 during the period from the timing t1 after the start of symbol variation to the timing t3 after the lapse of a predetermined period. An instruction effect in which the player instructs to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to select one selected image is performed. In addition, in the period from the timing t2 after the start of the instruction effect to the timing t3 that is the end point of the instruction effect, an effect operation reception period in which the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is allowed is set. This production operation reception period is a period during which the selection of the selection image can be switched by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 without confirming the selection of the selection image.

  Then, at timing t3, which is the end point of the instruction effect, the selection of the selected image is confirmed with the end of the effect operation reception period. In addition, during the period from the timing t3, which is the end point of the instruction effect, to the timing t4 after the lapse of a predetermined period, an operation-corresponding effect is performed in which the selected selected image is changed to an image suggesting a big hit expectation degree. . That is, in the operation corresponding effect, it is possible to know what kind of jackpot expectation is suggested as a result of the player selecting the selected image by rotating the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, when an operation effect composed of an instruction effect and an operation-related effect is executed, volume adjustment is performed in a period from a timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to a timing t5 after the end of the operation-related effect. A volume change prohibition flag for prohibiting the sound is controlled to be in an on state. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in an on state over a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the volume change prohibition flag is in the off state, the player performs a process of changing the volume sub-setting value by rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the volume change prohibition flag is in the on state. Then, even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the process of changing the volume sub-setting value is not performed. As described above, the player does not intend by prohibiting the volume adjustment by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 during the period in which the operation effect including the instruction effect and the operation corresponding effect is being executed. It is possible to prevent the volume from being adjusted. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, if the volume change prohibition flag is on, the process of changing the sub-set value of the volume is not performed even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. Even when the change of the sub-setting value is being restricted, when the game management side (hall side) operates the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d, a process for changing the main setting value of the volume is performed. Yes.

  More specifically, the volume is changed not only from the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed, but also from the timing t0 (for example, 2 seconds before) before the timing t1 that is the start point of the operation effect. The prohibit flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from timing t1 when the operation effect starts, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the start of the operation effect to adjust the volume. In the operation effect, there is a possibility that a selection image not intended by the player is selected. In contrast, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the on state from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start time of the operation effect, so that the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even in such a case, it becomes possible to notice that the volume cannot be adjusted during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1, and it is possible to prevent a selection image unintended by the player from being selected in the operation effect. it can.

  Further, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed, but also the volume change over the period from the timing t4 that is the end point of the operation effect to the timing t5 (for example, 2 seconds later). The prohibit flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be OFF from timing t4 when the operation effect ends, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the operation effect ends, and after the operation effect ends. In this case, there is a possibility that the volume adjustment not intended by the player is performed. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the ON state over a period up to timing t5 after timing t4 that is the end point of the operation effect, so that the player can rotate the operation unit 302 before and after timing t4. Even if the operation is rotated, the volume is not adjusted, and it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment unintended by the player after the operation effect is completed.

  Next, a case where a drive effect in which the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 is performed as an effect during the execution of symbol variation will be described with reference to FIG. 198. . Also in the case where such a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed, as with the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 described above, the player over a period longer than the period during which the drive effect is being executed. Even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the volume is not adjusted.

  As shown in FIG. 198, during the period from the timing t1 after the start of symbol variation to the timing t2 after the elapse of a predetermined period, a drive effect for driving the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate is performed. The drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed as an effect suggesting that the big hit expectation is higher than when the drive effect is not performed.

  Further, when a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, it is prohibited to perform volume adjustment in a period from a timing t0 before the start of the drive effect to a timing t3 after the end of the drive effect. The volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in an on state over a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 when the drive effect is executed. In this way, at least during the period when the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is being executed, the player is driven by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by prohibiting the volume adjustment. It is possible to prevent the performance from being hindered.

  More specifically, the volume is changed not only from the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 when the drive effect is executed, but also from the timing t0 (for example, 2 seconds before) before the timing t1 that is the start point of the drive effect. The prohibit flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the on state from the timing t1 when the drive effect starts, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the start of the drive effect in order to adjust the volume. There is a possibility that the execution of the drive effect is hindered. In contrast, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be turned on from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start time of the drive effect, so that the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even if it does, it will come to notice that it became impossible to adjust a sound volume in the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1, and it can prevent that execution of a drive effect is inhibited.

  Further, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2 when the drive effect is executed, but also the volume change over the period from the timing t2 that is the end point of the drive effect to the timing t3 (for example, 2 seconds later). The prohibit flag is controlled to be on. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the OFF state from timing t3 when the drive effect ends, the rotation operation unit 302 is changed to a state where the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is temporarily stopped by the drive effect. There is a possibility that the rotation operation is performed and the execution of the drive effect is hindered. On the other hand, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the on state over a period up to timing t3 after the timing t2 which is the end time of the driving effect, thereby recognizing that the driving effect has ended. Later, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to adjust the volume, and the execution of the drive effect can be prevented from being hindered.

  Next, a case where an operation effect that can change the effect by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 303 by the player is performed as an effect during the execution of symbol variation will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the pressing operation unit 303 is provided in the vicinity of the rotation operation unit 302 so that the rotation operation unit 302 is positioned around the pressing operation unit 303. Also in the case where such an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, as in the case of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 described above, the player over a period longer than the period during which the operation effect is being executed. Even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the volume is not adjusted. Further, as an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, for example, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the player may press the pressing operation unit 303 a predetermined number of times (one time or a plurality of times). ) When the player performs an instruction to perform a pressing operation and the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 as many times as instructed, an effect suggesting that an image suggesting a big hit expectation is displayed. In the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, an effect in which the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes may be performed before the player instructs to press the pressing operation unit 303 a predetermined number of times. The effect that the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes is performed as an effect that suggests that the degree of expectation for jackpot is higher than the case where it does not protrude.

  As shown in FIG. 199, during a period from timing t1 after the start of symbol variation to timing t3 after the lapse of a predetermined period, the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 a predetermined number of times on the screen of the effect display device 1600. (It may be one time or a plurality of times.) An instruction effect for instructing to perform a pressing operation is performed. In addition, in the period from the timing t2 after the start of the instruction effect to the timing t3 that is the end point of the instruction effect, an effect operation reception period during which the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is allowed is set. This stage operation acceptance period ends when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 the number of times indicated on the screen of the stage display device 1600, or when a predetermined period has elapsed. Accordingly, the instruction effect is also ended.

  Then, during the period from the timing t3, which is the end point of the instruction effect, to the timing t4 after the elapse of a predetermined period, an operation-compatible effect for displaying an image suggesting the big hit expectation degree is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. Done. That is, in the operation corresponding effect, it is possible to know what kind of jackpot expectation is suggested as a result of the player pressing the pressing operation unit 303 as many times as instructed on the screen of the effect display device 1600.

  Further, when an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 including an instruction effect and an operation-related effect is executed, in a period from a timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to a timing t5 after the end of the operation-related effect. Then, a volume change prohibition flag that prohibits volume adjustment is controlled to be in an on state. That is, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in an on state over a period longer than the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect is executed. Here, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are integrally configured as an effect operation unit 301, and the rotation operation unit 302 is positioned around the pressing operation unit 303. When the operation unit 303 is pressed, the rotation operation unit 302 may be erroneously operated. However, during a period in which an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 including at least an instruction effect and an operation-corresponding effect is being executed, it is prohibited to adjust the volume even if the player erroneously operates the rotation operation unit 302. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment not intended by the player from being performed.

  More specifically, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, but also the timing t0 (for example, 2) before the timing t1 that is the start point of the operation effect. The volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in an on state from a second). For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be on from timing t1 when the operation effect starts, the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated before and after the start of the operation effect to adjust the volume. After the start of the operation effect, there is a possibility that a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 not intended by the player is performed due to an erroneous operation. In contrast, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the on state from timing t0 before timing t1, which is the start time of the operation effect, so that the player rotates the rotary operation unit 302 before and after timing t0. Even if it is, the player will notice that the volume cannot be adjusted during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t1, and after starting the operation effect, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 not intended by the player due to an erroneous operation is performed. It can be prevented from being performed.

  Further, not only the period from the timing t1 to the timing t4 when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, but also the timing t5 after the timing t4 that is the end point of the operation effect (for example, 2 seconds later). The volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the on state over the period up to. For example, when the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be OFF from timing t4 when the operation effect ends, the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed before and after the operation effect ends, and after the operation effect ends. In this case, there is a possibility that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by an erroneous operation, and the volume adjustment not intended by the player is performed. In contrast, the volume change prohibition flag is controlled to be in the ON state over a period from timing t4, which is the end point of the operation effect, to timing t5, so that the player can operate the pressing operation unit 303 before and after timing t4. Even when the operation effect is performed, the rotation operation unit 302 is not rotated due to an erroneous operation after the operation effect is ended, and it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment not intended by the player from being performed.

  As described above, when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, the player rotates during the period from the timing t0 before the start of the instruction effect to the timing t5 after the end of the operation corresponding effect. Even if the operation unit 302 is rotated, the volume adjustment is prohibited. However, if the player continues to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, the screen of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Specific notifications such as “Cannot change volume”. For example, during a period from timing t1 to timing t4 when an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 when pressing the pressing operation unit 303. There is also a possibility that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated to adjust the volume without realizing that the volume adjustment is prohibited. However, even in such a case, by performing the specific notification described above, it is possible to clearly recognize that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation 302 from being performed wastefully.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 200, a specific example of production in the case where the volume is adjusted by the player rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed will be described. .

  First, when a command related to the variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the variation display of the decorative symbols is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 200A). When it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 is operated in the right direction during the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is being executed, a process of increasing the volume sub-set value according to the operation amount is performed. Do. At this time, a volume adjustment bar in which the display amount is increased or decreased as the sub-set value of the volume is increased or decreased is displayed below the screen of the effect display device 1600, and the operation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is displayed. In response to this, the sub-set value of the increased volume is displayed on the volume adjustment bar (FIG. 200B). Note that, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, a region where the decorative symbol variation display is performed and a region where the volume adjustment bar is performed are divided, and the volume that appears when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. The adjustment bar prevents the decorative symbol variation display from being concealed, and prevents the visibility of the decorative symbol variation display from deteriorating.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated in the left direction during the period in which the decorative symbol variation display is being executed, a process of reducing the volume sub-setting value according to the operation amount is performed. Do. At this time, a volume adjustment bar in which the display amount is increased or decreased as the sub-set value of the volume is increased or decreased is displayed below the screen of the effect display device 1600, and the operation amount of the rotation operation unit 302 is displayed. The sub-set value of the volume that has been reduced accordingly is displayed on the volume adjustment bar (FIG. 200C).

  Then, after the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is stopped, the changed volume sub-set value is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the effect display device 1600 until a predetermined period (for example, 1.8 seconds) elapses. The displayed volume display bar is continuously displayed (FIGS. 200D and 200E).

  As described above, when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. The volume adjustment is performed even if the volume change prohibition flag is turned on at a time (for example, 2 seconds before) before the production starts, and the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. I am trying not to. In this regard, after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, the sub-set value of the volume displayed on the volume adjustment bar on the screen of the effect display device 1600 does not increase or decrease. As shown in (E), the volume display bar on which the sub-set value of the changed volume is displayed is continuously displayed for a predetermined period. For this reason, even when the volume adjustment is suddenly prohibited, it is possible to know which volume sub-setting value prohibits the volume adjustment, and to reduce the player's discomfort.

  Moreover, in the above, when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, those effects are started. From the time when the previous volume change prohibition flag is turned on (for example, 2 seconds before), the volume adjustment bar displaying the sub-set value of the volume after the change is continuously displayed. Until the production starts, the volume adjustment bar is deleted. That is, even after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, during the period in which the volume adjustment bar is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the above-described effect (rotation operation unit 302) is performed after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on. The operation period using the rotation operation unit 302, the driving operation using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation operation using the pressing operation unit 303) are shorter than the start period. Thereby, at the start of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, a volume adjustment bar is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. It is not carried out and it can prevent that the visibility with respect to those effects falls.

  In the present embodiment, while the symbol variation is being executed, the player can adjust the volume by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. However, as described above, the symbol variation is being performed. In the period, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, the period during which these effects are being executed In addition, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on for a long period of time so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. In addition to this, during the volume adjustment prohibition period in which the volume change prohibition flag is on, the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation using the pressing operation unit 303 are again performed. When any one of the effects is performed, the volume change prohibition flag that was scheduled to be turned off after the end of the initial effect is continued in the on state so that the volume adjustment prohibition period is extended. . As a result, during the period when the symbol variation is being performed, any of the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, the drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. Thereafter, even if the same effect is performed again, it is possible to reliably prevent the volume adjustment unintended by the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the operation effect (operation) is performed regardless of whether the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. The volume change prohibition flag is set to the on state until the timing t5 after the end of the (corresponding effect) so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. The volume change prohibition flag may be turned off at a timing after the elapse of a predetermined period from the end of the instruction effect in which the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated among the operation effects. That is, the volume change prohibition flag may be controlled to be in an on state over a period longer than the period in which the instruction effect is being executed among the operation effects, and if it is a timing after the elapse of a predetermined period from the end of the instruction effect, You may control to an OFF state before the operation corresponding | compatible production | presentation after instruction | indication production | finish is complete | finished. Of the operation effects, in the instruction effect, the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is required, whereas in the operation corresponding effect after the instruction effect, the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 is required. However, since only the results of these operations are notified, even if only the volume adjustment prohibition period is provided over a period longer than the period during which the instruction effect is executed among the operation effects, It is possible to prevent unintended volume adjustment.

  Further, in the present embodiment, not only when the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed during the period when the symbol change is being executed, the symbol change is executed. If any of the operation effects using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed even during a period when the game is not being performed or during a jackpot game being executed, those effects are performed. The volume change prohibition flag is set to an on state for a period longer than the period during which the player is executed, so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. For example, when the above-described hold notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display can be changed every time the decorative symbol change display (special symbol change display) is started (start condition is satisfied). In the stage before the symbol change is started, the player rotates one of the rotation operation units 302 from among a plurality of types of selection images displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. When the selected image is selected and the symbol variation is started, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the selected image selected by the player is changed to the display mode of the hold display based on the hold change pattern. In such a case, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on in a period spanning execution of consecutive symbol variations so that a period in which symbol variations are not executed is included, and the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. Even so, the volume is not adjusted. In addition, for example, when a big hit game is executed, in a specific round (for example, the first round), the player selects any one piece of music (selected image) by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. In addition, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the music selected by the player flows from the speaker. As described above, any of the operation effects using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303 even during the period in which the continuous symbol variation is executed or during the period when the big hit game is executed. Is performed, it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment unintended by the player from being performed by providing the volume adjustment prohibition period over a period longer than the period in which these effects are being executed.

  In addition, after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed without the symbol variation being performed again after the symbol variation is completed, the player can only adjust the volume by rotating the rotation operation unit 302. Instead, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to adjust the light amount in the effect display device 1600. For example, the peripheral control IC 1510a monitors whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated in addition to monitoring whether or not the rotation operating unit 302 is operated, and the pressing operation unit 303 is operated during volume adjustment. If it is determined, the light amount adjustment is switched. When it is determined that the rotation operation unit 302 has been operated in the right direction during the light amount adjustment, a process for increasing the set value of the light amount (luminance) according to the operation amount is performed, and the rotation operation unit 302 is moved to the left. When it is determined that the operation is performed in the direction, a process for reducing the set value of the light amount (luminance) according to the operation amount is performed. On the other hand, even during the period when the symbol variation is being executed, even if it is determined that the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, the light amount adjustment that is not intended by the player is performed without switching to the light amount adjustment. Thus, it is possible to prevent the presentation during the execution of symbol variation from becoming difficult to visually recognize.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 during the period from the timing t0 to the timing t5 when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 (see FIG. 199) is executed. When the rotation operation is performed, a specific notification that allows the user to recognize that the volume adjustment is prohibited, such as “volume cannot be changed”, is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600. Such specific notification may also be performed when the used operation effect is performed. For example, when an operation effect (see FIG. 197) using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, from the period (timing t1 to t4) in which the operation effect is being executed. The volume change prohibition flag is turned on for a long period (timing t0 to t5) so that the volume adjustment is not performed even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. However, the volume adjustment is prohibited. During the period that is not the above-described effective operation period (timing t0 to t2, timing t3 to t5), the player recognizes that the volume adjustment is prohibited when the player rotates the rotating operation unit 302. Specific notification may be performed. It is noticed that the volume adjustment is prohibited during the period (timing t0 to t2, timing t3 to t5) that is not the effect operation effective period, not the period in which the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 for the operation effect is requested. The rotation operation unit 302 may be rotated to adjust the volume, but by performing the above specific notification, it is clearly recognized that the volume adjustment is not performed, and the rotation operation is performed. It is possible to prevent the rotation operation of the unit 302 from being performed wastefully. The specific notification in such a case is not the sound output from the speaker but the light emitted from various decorative boards, the display on the screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the effect sound related to the operation effect is not obstructed. (It is preferable that the sound volume cannot be changed.) Similarly, in the case of a drive effect (FIG. 198) for rotationally driving the rotary operation unit 302, a period (timing t0 to t1, which is not a drive period (a period during which the drive effect is being executed) of the volume adjustment prohibition period The specific notification described above may be performed from the timing t2 to t3).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when either the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, the operation effect (operation The volume change prohibition flag is turned on until the timing t5 after the completion of the corresponding effect), so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the operation of various movable bodies is performed following the operation effect by performing the rotation operation of the rotation operation section 302 or the pressing operation of the pressing operation section 303, a predetermined period from the end of the operation period of the movable body. It is preferable to continue the volume change prohibition flag in the ON state until the timing after the elapse of. As described above, during the operation period of the movable body following the operation effect, it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the movable body by prohibiting the volume adjustment by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 from being performed. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed during the period in which the symbol variation is being performed, the volume is increased over a period longer than the period in which the operation effect is being performed. Although the change prohibition flag is turned on so that the volume is not adjusted even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, a special operation effect as an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is as follows. Without turning on the volume change prohibition flag during the period when the special operation effect is being executed, the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 to change the volume and reflect the effect on the effect in parallel. It may be performed. As such a special operation effect, for example, there is an effect in which the player is required to increase or decrease the volume by rotating the rotation operation unit 302.

[15. About the common operation unit]
Next, in the above-described embodiment, the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are described. However, as an example different from the above-described example, It is good also as a structure. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as another embodiment as viewed from the front right.

  As shown in FIG. 201, the door frame 3 of this configuration is provided with a push-in type common operation unit 255 (shared button) on the right side of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the depth direction. The common operation unit 255 is provided at a position where the player can press the handle 182 in the depth direction when the player appropriately rotates the handle 182, and is more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. So that there is no light-emitting decoration by a large number of LEDs such as the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303, and a modest appearance with a smaller area of the operation receiving unit than the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 is configured. ing. The common operation unit 255 is not limited to the door frame 3 and may be provided in other parts as long as it can be operated when the handle 182 is rotated. Further, the common operation unit 255 may not be able to change the sub set value of the sound volume related to the effect sound.

  The common operation unit 255 described above is effective when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed. Specifically, in this configuration, when the player side operates the common operation unit 255, detection signals from the common operation unit detection sensor are input to various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. It is like that. In the peripheral control IC 1510a, the operation status of the common operation unit 255 is monitored during the rendering operation effective period in the operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and the detection signal from the common operation unit detection sensor is input and shared. When it is determined that the operation unit 255 has been operated, the rendering operation valid period of the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 is terminated, and it is assumed that the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 have been operated. The corresponding operation corresponding effect is executed. That is, in this configuration, when performing an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303, the operation is regarded as operating the pressing operation unit 303. Correspondence production will progress. In addition, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303 in the protruding state, the operation corresponding effect is developed assuming that the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. Based on the operation of the common operation unit 255, a process of driving the non-operated pressing operation unit 303 to return to a normal state (a state that is not a protruding state) is performed. Further, when performing an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is moved in a specific direction (for example, clockwise (rightward direction) )) As shown in the same behavior as when the rotation operation is performed, it is assumed that the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the right direction, and the operation corresponding effect is developed. As described above, in this configuration, a plurality of operation units (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) having different operation modes can be shared by the common operation unit 255, and the player operates the handle 182 to play the game. Various operational effects can be advanced with one hand while firing the sphere B, and the convenience can be enhanced.

  More specifically, when performing an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 in the protruding state, if the pressing operation unit 303 in the protruding state is not pressed, the pressing operation unit after a predetermined effect time has elapsed. A process of driving 303 to return to a normal state (a state that is not a protruding state) is performed, but if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303 that is in the protruding state, the pressing operation unit In this case, even if it is before the predetermined production time elapses, the operation corresponding effect is developed when the common operation unit 255 is operated. A process of driving the non-pressing operation unit 303 to return to a normal state (a state that is not a protruding state) is performed. Similarly, when performing an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303, a predetermined part of the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated and rotated by predetermined vibration means (such as driving of a vibration speaker or a vibration motor). The player does not rotate the rotation operation unit 302 when a vibration effect that gives the player a feeling of vibration is performed through the unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 or when an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed. When a drive effect that causes the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotationally driven (self-running) is performed, if the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is not operated, vibration or drive by the vibration effect is performed after a predetermined effect time has elapsed. A process for ending the rotational drive by the effect is performed. If the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation is performed. It is assumed that the operation unit 303 is operated, and the operation corresponding effect is developed. In this case, the vibration is generated when the common operation unit 255 is operated even before the predetermined effect time elapses. A process for ending the vibration by the effect and the rotational drive by the drive effect is performed. As a result, when the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the protruding state of the pressing operation unit 303, the vibration caused by the vibration effect, and the rotation drive due to the drive effect continue carelessly. Thus, the player can recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 have been operated.

  In addition, when performing an operation effect that changes to the protruding state when the pressing operation unit 303 in the normal state (not the protruding state) is pressed, if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed, the predetermined effect time After the elapse of time, the process of driving the pressing operation unit 303 to the protruding state is performed. However, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303, it is considered that the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, and the operation corresponding effect. In this case, even before the predetermined production time elapses, when the common operation unit 255 is operated, the non-operated pressing operation unit 303 is driven into a protruding state. Processing will be performed. Similarly, when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, a predetermined part of the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by predetermined vibration means (such as driving of a vibration speaker or a vibration motor) and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation is performed. When a vibration effect that gives a feeling of vibration to the player is performed through the unit 303, or when a drive effect that rotates (self-runs) the rotation operation unit 302 without rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the player is performed. If the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 is not operated, a process for starting the vibration drive by the vibration effect or the rotation drive by the drive effect is performed after the predetermined effect time has elapsed. If the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the operation unit 303, it is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303 has been operated, and the operation corresponding effect is developed. In this case, even before the predetermined production time elapses, when the common operation unit 255 is operated, the process of starting the vibration drive by the vibration production and the rotational drive by the drive production is performed. Will be. Accordingly, when the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, at that time, the change to the protruding state of the pressing operation unit 303, the vibration due to the vibration effect, or the drive effect Since the rotation driving is started, the player can recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are considered to be operated.

  In addition, in the progress of the game, as an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, a continuous hit effect that requires a plurality of pressing operations on the pressing operation unit 303, or in a horizontal direction with respect to the rotation operation unit 302 Specific operation modes such as a mutual rotation effect that requires a small rotation operation or a long operation effect (long press effect, long rotation effect, etc.) that requires a long time operation on the same operation unit of the pressing operation unit 303 or the rotation operation unit 302 Even when an operation effect requiring operation is performed, the above-described specific operation mode is obtained on condition that the common operation unit 255 described above is operated in a combined mode (for example, long press) associated with the above-described specific operation mode. You may make it reflect operation of a common operation part also in the required operation effect.

  In addition to the above, when the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 in an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, predetermined vibration means (drive of a vibration speaker or a vibration motor) is performed. In the case where the predetermined part of the pachinko machine 1 vibrates and gives a player a feeling of vibration through the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, even when the common operation unit 255 described above is operated, In the same manner as when the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, a predetermined part of the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by the vibration means (vibration speaker, drive of vibration motor, etc.) and vibrates to the player through the common operation unit 255. You may make it give a feeling. Thereby, the above-mentioned gaming effect that the convenience can be improved can be realized more effectively.

  Instead of the above, the common operation unit 255 may be configured to change the sub-setting value of the volume related to the effect sound. For example, when changing the sub-setting value of the volume, pressing the common operation unit 255 instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 is the same as rotating the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise (rightward). Shows behavior. Further, similarly to the above-described embodiment, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302, a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, a volume change prohibition flag is used. May be turned on, and the role of the common operation unit 255 may be switched from volume operation to effect operation to the rotation operation unit 302 or the press operation unit 303. That is, during the volume adjustment prohibition period in which the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, even if the common operation unit is pressed, the volume operation is not performed and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is regarded as being operated. The operation corresponding effect may be advanced. Thus, by prohibiting the volume adjustment not only for the rotation operation unit 302 but also for the common operation unit 255, it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment not intended by the player from being performed.

  The common operation unit 255 described above is effective when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed. As another example, the rotation operation unit 302 is used. After providing a plurality of types of operation effects using the operation effects and the pressing operation unit 303, among the plurality of types of operation effects, an operation effect having a high occurrence frequency (occurrence rate) (for example, about 1/3 relatively) When an operation effect used for the advancement of the pre-reach variable speech effect with a high effect execution probability is performed, the common operation unit 255 is enabled and an operation effect with a low occurrence frequency (for example, about 1/100) is performed. When the operation effect used for the progress of the cut-in effect during reach in which a relatively low effect execution probability is set) is performed, the common operation unit 255 may be invalidated. As a result, when an operation effect with a high occurrence frequency is performed, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated. However, when an operation effect with a low occurrence frequency is performed, even if the common operation unit 255 is pressed, the rotation operation unit 302 or the operation effect is developed. It is not considered that the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated, and the operation effect does not progress (the operation corresponding effect is not performed). That is, when an operation effect having a low occurrence frequency is performed, the operation effect is developed only when the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated instead of the common operation unit 255. Thus, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, the operation unit that is originally requested is operated according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect. It is possible to allow the player to experience as much as possible the original interest in the operation effect of a rare aspect, and to give a sharpness to participation in the operation effect. In this case, the following may be used. For example, even if an operation effect has a low occurrence frequency, only when the number of executions reaches a predetermined number of times (one or more) after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, As in the case of operation effects with high occurrence frequency, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of operating the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, it is considered that the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 has been operated. The operation effect may be advanced. As described above, the common operation unit 255 can be used more suitably by changing the conditions under which the common operation unit 255 functions as an alternative to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 according to the progress of the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the application avoidance of the common operation unit 255 is switched according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect, but may be as follows. For example, a plurality of operation effects using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are provided, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated among the plurality of types of operation effects. When an operation effect that is given a predetermined motion is sometimes performed, the common operation unit 255 may be invalidated, and when an operation effect that is not given a predetermined operation is performed, the common operation unit 255 may be valid. . The operation effect to which a predetermined action is given is an operation effect that changes to a protruding state when the pressing operation unit 303 in a normal state (not a protruding state) is pressed, as described above, or a rotation operation. When the unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, a predetermined part of the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by predetermined vibration means (such as driving of a vibration speaker or a vibration motor), and the player is operated through the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303. A vibration effect that gives a feeling of vibration to the player, a drive effect that causes the rotation operation unit 302 to be driven to rotate (self-run) without rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the like. As a result, among the operation effects using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303, an operation effect in which a predetermined operation is given when the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 is operated is performed. In this case, since the common operation unit 255 is invalid, the operation of the operation unit that is originally requested can be performed, and a predetermined operation given by the operation effect can be performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the application avoidance of the common operation unit 255 is switched according to the frequency of occurrence of the operation effect, but may be as follows. For example, when a plurality of types of operation effects using the rotary operation unit 302 and a plurality of operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303 are provided, and an operation effect with a low jackpot expectation is performed among the plurality of types of operation effects. May enable the common operation unit 255 and disable the common operation unit 255 when an operation effect with a high expectation degree of jackpot is performed. Thus, when an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 are performed, the operation unit that is originally requested is operated according to the expected degree of the operation effect. It is possible to give a sharpness to participation in the operation effect. In addition, among the operation effects using the rotation operation unit 302 and the operation effects using the pressing operation unit 303, when the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed, the common operation unit 255 is enabled and the rotation operation is performed. When an operation effect using the unit 302 is performed, the common operation unit 255 may be invalidated. As described above, in the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303, even if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of pressing the pressing operation unit 303, the same pressing feeling can be given. In the production using 302, if the common operation unit 255 is pressed instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the operation feeling is different. It is possible to maintain a feeling of operation. Further, apart from the common operation unit 255 as an alternative to the pressing operation unit 303, a position similar to the common operation unit 255 (a position at which the player can press the handle 182 in the depth direction when the player appropriately rotates the handle 182). ), An alternative rotation operation unit as an alternative to the rotation operation unit 302 may be provided. Such an alternative rotation operation unit as an alternative to the rotation operation unit 302 has the same configuration as that of the rotation operation unit 302 but a small, discreet appearance. When an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 is performed, an alternative rotation operation unit may be validated. In this case, instead of rotating the rotation operation unit 302, Even if the alternative rotation operation unit is rotated, it is possible to give an operational feeling that the same rotation operation is performed.

  Whether or not to enable the common operation unit 255 during a period before the game is started since the symbol change according to the big hit determination has not yet been performed (a period during which a demo display or the like can be performed). Alternatively, when the common operation unit 255 is validated, the player may be able to switch the setting of the valid operation unit among the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. For example, during a period in which a demonstration display or the like can be performed, a predetermined selection screen can be displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600 by operating the pressing operation unit 303, and the “rotation” displayed as the selection screen is displayed. “Enabling the common operation unit 255 for both the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303”, “Enabling the common operation unit 255 only for the rotation operation unit 302”, “For the pressing operation unit 303 Only the common operation unit 255 is enabled ”and“ the common operation unit 255 is disabled for both the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 ”are selected by the player. Also good. As described above, the common operation unit 255 can be used more suitably by changing the operation unit that the common operation unit 255 functions as an alternative to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 according to the player's preference. .

[16. Light guide effect using light guide plate]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of light guide plates each capable of emitting and displaying a picture. A light guide effect using these light guide plates will be described below.

  As described above, the plurality of light guide plates are attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500 in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction) and close the frame of the center accessory 2500. The light guide plate 2610 is attached to the front side of the unit base 3201 and is attached to the front side of the unit base 3151 and the transparent flat plate-shaped back first light guide plate 3210 that closes the inside of the unit base 3201. A transparent flat plate-like back second light guide plate 3160 that closes the inside of the frame.

[16-1. Light guiding effect using back second light guide plate]
First, on the back second light guide plate 3160, a fifth pattern 3161 (see FIG. 140) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex fifth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the left and right directions forward, and the vertical direction 6th pattern 3162 (refer to FIG. 141) formed by an infinite number of concave and convex sixth reflecting portions that reflect only light from the front to the front, but the back second light guide plate 3160 was used. 202. As a light guide effect, a light guide effect that causes the fifth pattern 3161 to emit light by causing the light guide plate LEDs 3171a of the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 provided on the left and right sides of the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light is illustrated in FIG. Description will be made with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 202, 21 light guide plate LEDs 3171a are mounted on the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 in the vertical direction. ˜21st, at least 1 to 3, 4 to 6, 7 to 9, 10 to 12, 13 to 15, 16 to 18 and 19 to 21 for three light guide plates respectively The LEDs 3171a are made into individual groups, and the light guide plate LEDs 3171a can be independently turned on / off in units of groups. Then, when the fifth picture 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, when the first to third light guide plate LEDs 3171a in the pair of fifth picture substrates 3171 are caused to emit light, the back second light guide plate 3160 is displayed. Of the light emitting areas divided into approximately equal areas in the up and down direction, the first light emitting area A can be illuminated and displayed, and when the fourth to sixth light guide plate LEDs 3171a emit light, the second light emitting area B emits light. When the seventh to ninth light guide plate LEDs 3171a emit light, the third light emitting region C can emit light, and when the tenth to twelfth light guide plate LEDs 3171a emit light, the fourth light emission. The region D can be lit and displayed, and when the 13th to 15th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are lit, the fifth light emitting region E can be lit and displayed. When the eighth light guide plate LED 3171a is caused to emit light, the sixth light emitting region F can be caused to emit light, and when the nineteenth to twenty-first light guide plate LED 3171a is caused to emit light, the seventh light emitting region G can be caused to emit light. it can.

  The fifth pattern 3161 that is lit and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is provided on substantially the entire surface of the back second light guide plate 3160, and the light guide decoration composed of characters “Chance!” In the center portion and its “ Light guide decoration (this is provided around the character “Chance!”), And is provided with concentrated fifth reflective portions so that it is difficult to recognize the content of the screen display of the rear effect display device 1600 from the front. In the embodiment, it is composed of a sandstorm-like background pattern). In the present embodiment, in order to make the letters “Chance!” Stand out in a concentrated manner of the fine fifth reflecting parts, the letters “Chance!” And the background pattern on the sandstorm The fifth reflective portion is formed in a different manner (for example, the depth of the engraving on the light guide plate, the width of the engraving, etc.) so that the light guide decoration is emphasized only in the fifth reflective portion of the character portion. . Further, as shown in the drawing, the letters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are the fourth light emission located at the center in the light emitting area obtained by dividing the back second light guide plate 3160 into seven substantially equal areas in the vertical direction. Since it is arranged in the region D, when the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the 1st to 21st in order from the upper side are caused to emit light, the characters “Chance!” Can be displayed. On the other hand, when the LED 3171a for the 10th to 12th light guide plates is turned off and the LED 3171a for the light guide plates other than the 10th to 12th lights is turned on, the letters “Chance!” The background pattern can be displayed in a luminous manner.

  As shown in FIG. 203, in the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 by light emission, the effect proceeds so that the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160 increases when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Finally, the fourth light-emitting area D is displayed in a light-emitting manner, and the characters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are made visible. Specifically, when the light guide effect for causing the fifth pattern 3161 to emit light is started, first, as shown in FIG. 203 (a), for the first to third light guide plates from the first to the 21st from the top. The first light emitting area A is caused to emit light by causing the LED 3171a to emit light, and the seventh light emitting area G is caused to emit light by causing the 19th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a to emit light. That is, in the first light-emitting area A and the seventh light-emitting area G, a sandstorm-like background pattern appears by displaying the light-emitting areas in a light-emitting manner, and the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side is difficult to see. However, in the second light-emitting area B, the third light-emitting area C, the fourth light-emitting area D, the fifth light-emitting area E, and the sixth light-emitting area F, these light-emitting areas are not displayed in a light-emitting manner. The screen display of the display device 1600 can be visually recognized. Note that the light guide plate LEDs 3171a mounted on the pair of fifth pattern substrates 3171 are all side-view type full color LEDs, and at this stage, the light guide plate LEDs 3171a emit white light. The light is displayed.

  In addition, in the back back decoration production | presentation unit 3150 of this embodiment, between the back 2nd light-guide plates 3160 only with respect to several LED 3172a for light-guide plates which light-displays the 6th pattern 3162 of the back 2nd light-guide plate 3160. Similarly, a condensing lens 3156 is disposed between the back second light guide plate 3160 and the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a for emitting and displaying the fifth picture 3161. May be. Such a condensing lens can suppress the light spreading from the LED 3171a for the light guide plate from being diffused unnecessarily, and for example, the first to the 21st in the first to the 21st from the top. When the 19-21st light guide plate LED 3171a is caused to emit light, other light emitting regions (light emitting regions other than the first light emitting region A and the seventh light emitting region G) are caused by light leakage. It is possible to prevent light from being displayed. In addition, a condensing lens may be disposed between the back second light guide plate 3160 and only a part of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 3171a for emitting and displaying the fifth picture 3161. . For example, when the fourth light emitting region D is caused to emit light by causing the 10 to 12th light guide plate LED 3171a, which will be described later, to emit light among the first to 21st in order from the upper side, the abbreviation of the back second light guide plate 3160. In order to display all the light-emitting areas in a light-emitting manner, it is not necessary to prevent light leakage from the 10th to 12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a, and to the other 1st to 9th and 13th to 21st light guide plate LEDs 3171a. Only a condensing lens may be arranged between the back second light guide plate 3160.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (b), after the first light-emitting area A and the seventh light-emitting area G are lit and displayed, a predetermined condition for illuminating and displaying the remaining light-emitting areas is established, so that these light-emitting displays are displayed. In addition, the fourth to sixth light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the first to twenty-first ones from the upper side are caused to emit light, thereby causing the second light emitting region B to emit and display the sandstorm-like background pattern, and 16-18. The sixth light emitting area F is displayed by light emission by causing the light guide plate LED 3171a to emit light, and the sandstorm-like background pattern is enlarged. That is, in the first light-emitting area A, the second light-emitting area B, the sixth light-emitting area F, and the seventh light-emitting area G, by displaying these light-emitting areas in a light-emitting manner, a sandstorm-like background pattern appears and is positioned on the rear side. However, in the third light emitting area C, the fourth light emitting area D, and the fifth light emitting area E, these light emitting areas are not displayed in a light emitting manner. The screen display of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. Even at this stage, the LED 3171a for the light guide plate emits white light so that white light emission is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 203 (c), after the first light emitting area A, the second light emitting area B, the sixth light emitting area F, and the seventh light emitting area G are displayed with light emission, the remaining light emitting areas are displayed with light emission. When the condition is satisfied, in addition to these light emitting displays, the seventh to ninth light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the first to the 21st are sequentially emitted from the upper side, thereby causing the third light emitting region C to be displayed in a light emitting manner. The 12th to 15th light guide plate LEDs 3171a are caused to emit light, thereby causing the fifth light emitting region E to be displayed in a light-emitting manner, thereby further expanding the sandstorm-like background design. That is, in the first light-emitting area A, the second light-emitting area B, the third light-emitting area C, the fifth light-emitting area E, the sixth light-emitting area F, and the seventh light-emitting area G, these light-emitting areas are displayed by light emission. A sandstorm-like background pattern appears, and the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side is difficult to visually recognize, but in the fourth light emitting area D, those light emitting areas are not displayed in a light emitting manner. The screen display of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized. Even at this stage, the LED 3171a for the light guide plate emits white light so that white light emission is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 203 (d) and 203 (e), after the light emitting display of the light emitting area excluding the fourth light emitting area D is displayed, the predetermined condition for displaying the remaining light emitting areas is established. In addition to these light emission displays, the fourth light emitting region D is caused to emit light by causing the 10-12th light guide plate LEDs 3171a among the first to 21st lights to emit light in order from the upper side. That is, almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed by light emission, so that almost all of the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side is difficult to be visually recognized by the sandstorm-like background pattern. In addition, in the fourth light emitting area D, the characters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are displayed in a light emitting manner. At this stage, the light guide plate LED 3171a emits light in any one of white, blue, red, multicolor, etc., so that all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 emit light in a predetermined light emission color. It is possible. In addition, multicolor can illustrate light-emission LED3171a for each light emission area by a different color, or light-emit each of three light-guide LED3171a of each light emission area by a different color.

  By the way, the light guide effect that causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit and display the fifth pattern 3161 is a change in hold as a part of the hold change suggestion effect that suggests the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes as described above. Performed in combination with suggestion production. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as a hold notice effect, the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is started (started) during the display period of the hold display (hold display before digestion, hold display after digestion). Each time the condition is established, the display mode of the hold display can be changed based on the hold change pattern. Then, the post-digestion on-hold display relating to the variation display of the decorative symbol is the back bottom effect unit 3500 (the decorative body of the back bottom movable decorative body 3510) that is lit and displayed by the LED mounted on the back bottom movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512. The main body 3511) is used, but at the timing when the display mode of the post-digestion hold display changes, the back second light guide plate 3160 performs a light guide effect that causes the fifth pattern 3161 to emit light and holds the post-digestion hold. The possibility of changing the display mode of the display is suggested.

  More specifically, in the case where it is determined that the postponement post-digest display does not change, among the plurality of types of suggestive effect patterns, the light emitting area excluding the fourth light emitting area D is displayed in a light emitting manner and is suggested to end (turn off). An effect pattern A (A1 to A3 described later) can be determined. For example, as the suggestive effect pattern A in which the light emitting area excluding the fourth light emitting area D is displayed with light emission, the first light emitting area A and the seventh light emitting area G are displayed with light emission, and then for a predetermined turn-off time (for example, 2 seconds). The suggestion effect pattern A1, the first light emitting area A and the seventh light emitting area G, and the second light emitting area B and the sixth light emitting area F which are turned off as time passes in this order for a predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). The light emission display is enlarged for each time, and after that, a suggested lighting pattern A2, the first light emission area A and the seventh light emission area G, and the second light emission area B are turned off after a predetermined turn-off time (for example, 2 seconds). And the sixth light emitting region F, the third light emitting region C, and the fifth light emitting region E in this order are enlarged at predetermined time intervals (for example, 1.5 seconds), and thereafter the predetermined light extinction time ( Turn them off after 2 seconds) Suggesting the effect pattern A3, and the like. On the other hand, when it is determined that the post-digestion hold display changes, the first light emission area A and the seventh light emission area G, the second light emission area B and the sixth light emission among the plurality of types of suggested effect patterns. The light emission display of the light emitting area F, the third light emitting area C and the fifth light emitting area E, and the fourth light emitting area D is enlarged in this order every predetermined time (for example, 1.5 seconds). After displaying almost all the light emitting areas of the two light guide plates 3160 to emit light, the suggestive effect pattern B for turning them off can be determined by elapse of a predetermined light extinction time (for example, 2 seconds). In other words, in the light guide effect in which the fifth picture 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, if the fourth light emitting area D is not displayed with light emission, the post-digestion hold display does not change. On the other hand, when almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting area D are displayed with light emission, it is suggested that the hold display after digestion changes. Thereby, after the light guide effect is started, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the characters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are displayed by emitting light by displaying the fourth light emitting region D.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting area D are displayed by light emission and the post-digestion hold display is changed, the second back light including the fourth light emitting area D is displayed. At the same time as almost all the light emitting areas of the light guide plate 3160 are turned off (with the elapse of a predetermined turn-off time), the post-digestion hold display is changed. As a result, in addition to focusing on whether or not the characters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are displayed in a light-emitting manner, after the light-emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160 is turned off, any mode of digestion It is possible to pay attention to whether the hold display appears, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation until the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160 is turned off. In addition, as another example of this, when changing the post-digestion hold display by displaying almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 including the fourth light emitting area D, the back including the fourth light emitting area D is displayed. After almost all the light emitting areas of the second light guide plate 3160 are turned off, the post-digestion hold display may be changed after a predetermined delay time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation even after the light emitting area of the light plate 3160 is turned off.

  In addition, when displaying almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160, the light emitting areas are displayed with light emitting colors of white, blue, red, or multicolored. In the order of blue, red, and multicolored luminescent colors, the suggestive effect pattern is determined so that the expectation level for the post-digestion hold display to change to a display mode with a high expectation level for jackpots is increased. That is, for example, when almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are lit and displayed in white, the probability that the post-digestion on-hold display changes to a display mode with a high expectation level is low, When almost all of the light emitting areas of the second light guide plate 3160 are displayed in red, there is a high probability that the post-digestion hold display will change to a display mode with a high expectation level. As a result, when substantially all of the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are lit and displayed, the luminescent color plays a role of prior suggestion, and is the luminescent area lit and displayed with a highly expected luminescent color? Can also be noticed. In addition, in the process in which almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 perform light emission display, the color of the light emitting areas that are already light emitting displayed may be changed (for example, the first light emitting area A and the seventh light emitting area). When the area G was displayed with light emission, white light was emitted, but when the second light emission area B and the sixth light emission area F were subsequently displayed with light emission, the first light emission area A and the seventh light emission area G were included. As a result, not only whether or not the next light emitting area is enlarged before almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed for light emission, but also the color of the light emitting area is changed. You can also expect changes.

  As another example, when substantially all the light emitting regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed with light emission, the light emission display may be performed with the light emission color corresponding to the display mode after the change of the post-digestion hold display. . For example, when almost all light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed in red, the display mode of the post-digestion hold display is changed by changing the display mode of the post-digestion hold display to red. Before that, the display mode after the change can be grasped.

  As another example, the light guide effect that causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit and display the fifth pattern 3161 may be performed as an effect that suggests a big hit expectation degree, not as a hold change suggestion effect. For example, after the start of the light guide effect, the greater the emission area displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the higher the expectation of jackpot, and further, substantially all the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160. When the area is lit and displayed, it is configured so that the big hit expectation is higher as the luminescent area is lit and displayed in the emission color with the higher expected expectation of the big hit. be able to. In such another example, the screen display of the effect display device 1600 that can be visually recognized through the light emitting area that is not emitting and displaying, for example, “effect display in which enemy characters are gradually crushed” or the like is displayed on the back second light guide plate. Combination display may be performed according to the light emitting display and non-light emitting area 3160. In this way, by displaying a special effect image that matches the expansion of the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160, it is possible to further enhance the light guide effect that causes the fifth pattern 3161 to emit light in stages. .

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although the light emission area light-emitted and displayed on the back 2nd light-guide plate 3160 is expanded whenever predetermined time (for example, 1.5 second) passes, as another example, a press operation part After displaying an instruction image such as “Press the button!” So that the player presses the button 303, the pressing operation unit 303 may be enlarged each time the player presses the button. For example, when it is determined that the light emitting area displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is enlarged as the suggestive effect pattern, when the player presses the pressing operation portion 303, the light emitting area is displayed. If the player decides not to enlarge the light emitting area to be displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the light emitting area is not enlarged even if the player presses the pressing operation portion 303. . As described above, if the player does not press the pressing operation unit 303, the light emitting area displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is not enlarged. Therefore, the player can actively participate in the pressing operation on the pressing operation unit 303. Accordingly, it is possible to further enhance the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 in a stepwise manner.

  As described above, in the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the predetermined condition is satisfied after the light emitting area except the fourth light emitting area D is displayed (elapse of a predetermined time). On the basis of the above, the fourth light emitting area D having a smaller area than that of the light emitting area is displayed in a light emitting manner, whereby the characters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are displayed in a light emitting manner. Thus, although it is the structure which carries out the light emission display to substantially all the light emission area | regions of the back 2nd light-guide plate 3160, suddenly substantially all of the light emission area | regions are not light-emission-displayed, except the 4th light emission area | region D Since the light emitting area can be displayed in advance, the character “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 displayed in the fourth light emitting area D can be noticed, so that information useful to the player is not missed. Can be.

  In the light guide effect in which the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the first light emitting region A, the seventh light emitting region G, and the fourth light emitting region D are displayed before the fourth light emitting region D is displayed. The second light emitting region B and the sixth light emitting region F, and the third light emitting region C and the fifth light emitting region E are displayed in order. Thus, before the fourth light emitting area D is displayed in a light emitting manner, the light emitting area excluding the fourth light emitting area D can be displayed in a light emitting manner so that the screen of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Even a player who is paying attention to the display can smoothly shift to visual recognition with respect to the light emission display of the back second light guide plate 3160 located on the front side thereof, so that the player does not feel stress. it can. Further, before the fourth light emitting area D is displayed with light emission, whether or not the light emitting display except for the fourth light emitting area D is displayed in a stepwise manner, that is, the fourth light emitting area D is emitted. Whether or not a chance to display can be obtained can be expected to attract attention.

  Next, a specific effect example in the case where a light guide effect in which the fifth picture 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 is described with reference to FIG.

  First, when a command related to the variation pattern is transmitted from the main control board 1310 side to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the variation display of the decorative symbols is started on the screen of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 204A). At this time, a post-digestion on-hold display relating to the variation display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a light-emitting manner on the back bottom effect unit 3500 (decorative body main body 3511 of the back bottom movable decorative body 3510) based on the on-hold change pattern.

  And the suggestion effect pattern which light-displays substantially all the light emission area | regions of the back 2nd light-guide plate 3160 is determined as a hold change suggestion effect when the hold change pattern from which a hold display changes after digestion is determined. First, the light guide plate LEDs 3171a corresponding to the first light emission region A and the seventh light emission region G out of substantially all the light emission regions of the back second light guide plate 3160 are made to emit white light. The first light-emitting area A and the seventh light-emitting area G are lit and displayed in white (FIG. 204B). In addition, after the light emission display of the first light emission area A and the seventh light emission area G, the light guide plate LED 3171a corresponding to the second light emission area B and the sixth light emission area F based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time). Are emitted in white, and the second light emission region B and the sixth light emission region F are displayed in light emission in white, and then the third light emission region C and the fifth light emission region E based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (elapse of a predetermined time). The LED 3171a for the light guide plate corresponding to is made to emit white light, so that the third light emitting area C and the fifth light emitting area E are displayed in white. As described above, the light emission area displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 increases step by step, so that the screen display of the effect display device 1600 that can be visually recognized by the player decreases step by step.

  And after light emission display of the light emission area | region except the 4th light emission area | region D, based on establishment of predetermined conditions (elapse of predetermined time), it is made to light-emit LED3171a for light-guide plates corresponding to the 4th light emission area | region D, The characters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are displayed in a light emission manner in the fourth light emitting area D (FIG. 204C). As a result, almost all light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed with light emission, and the light emission colors displayed in substantially all light emitting areas are white, blue, red determined by the suggestive effect pattern. The luminescent color is displayed in any luminescent color such as rainbow.

  In addition, when almost all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed with light emission, almost all of the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side is difficult to see, but the effect display On the screen of the apparatus 1600, a screen display substantially the same as the character is displayed at a position behind the character “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 displayed in the fourth light emitting region D. . As described above, the character “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 displayed in the fourth light emitting region D by light emission is assisted by using the screen display of the effect display device 1600 to make the character stand out. In addition, the visibility with respect to the light-emitting display can be improved. Further, the LED 3171a for the light guide plate corresponding to the fourth light emitting area D breaks down, and the letters “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 are not displayed in the fourth light emitting area D so that the light emitting display can be visually recognized. Even if not, it is possible to recognize that the post-digestion hold display is a chance to change by viewing the screen display of the effect display device 1600.

  Then, substantially all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 are displayed with light emission, and after the above-described predetermined turn-off time has elapsed, all of the light guide plate LEDs 3171a are turned off, and the light emission display for the substantially all light emitting areas is ended. On the other hand, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, the character “Chance!” Of the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed until a predetermined extended time (for example, 2 seconds) elapses from the end of the light emission display. Substantially the same screen display is continuously displayed (FIG. 204D). Thus, even after the end of the light guide effect in which the fifth picture 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the character “Chance!” Of the fifth picture 3161 on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is substantially the same. By continuously displaying the screen display, the player who is paying attention to the light emission display of the back second light guide plate 3160 can smoothly shift to visual recognition of the screen display of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side. It can be visually recognized without a sense of incongruity when proceeding to the subsequent production. In addition, when the fifth pattern 3161 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 as a light emission, the back bottom effect unit is between the end of the light emission display and a predetermined extension time (for example, 2 seconds). 3500 (decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510) is changed so that the post-digestion hold display related to the change display of the decoration symbol displayed on the display is changed based on the hold change pattern. The expectation of jackpot for the display is suggested.

[16-2. Light guiding effect using a plurality of light guide plates and movable decorations]
Next, on the front side of the effect display device 1600, a front light guide plate 2610 and a back first light guide plate 3210 are sequentially arranged from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction) as a plurality of light guide plates each capable of emitting and displaying a pattern. And the back second light guide plate 3160. In addition to these light guide plates, a plurality of light guides that can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600, each of which can decorate the decorative body. As a movable decorative body, a decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the back right movable rendering unit 3310, a decorative body main body 3411 of the back top movable decorative body 3410 in the back top rendering unit 3400, and a back rear movable rendering effect unit. A decorative body main body 3121 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 in 3110 and a decorative body main body 3511 of the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 in the back bottom rendering unit 3500 are provided. That. A light guide effect using the plurality of light guide plates and the plurality of movable decorative bodies will be described with reference to FIGS.

  205 is a side sectional view for explaining the positional relationship among the effect display device 1600, the plurality of light guide plates, and the plurality of movable decorative bodies. As shown in FIG. 205, a front light guide plate 2610, a back first light guide plate 3210, and a back second light guide plate 3160 are provided on the front side of the effect display device 1600.

  Further, between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210, a decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the back right movable effect unit 3310 and a back upper movable decorative body in the back upper effect unit 3400. 3410, and a decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 in the lower back effect unit 3500 are provided. Then, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is located between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 from above so as to be positioned on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. It can appear (see FIG. 155). Further, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back movable decorative body 3410 is positioned between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 from above so as to be positioned on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. Although it can appear, when it appears at the same time as the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, it is positioned on the rear surface side of the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 (see FIG. 159). Further, the decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 is positioned between the front light guide plate 2610 and the back first light guide plate 3210 from above so as to be positioned on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. It can appear (see FIG. 158).

  Further, between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, a decorative body main body 3121 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 in the back rear movable effect unit 3110 is provided. And the ornament main body 3121 of the back movable ornament 3120 is positioned between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 so as to be positioned on the front side of the effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing. It is possible to appear from above (see FIG. 153).

  By the way, the light guide effect using the plurality of light guide plates and the plurality of movable decorative bodies is a change suggestion effect as a part of the hold change suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the display mode of the hold display changes as described above. It is done in combination. Specifically, in the present embodiment, as a hold notice effect, the decorative symbol variation display (special symbol variation display) is started (started) during the display period of the hold display (hold display before digestion, hold display after digestion). Each time the condition is established, the display mode of the hold display can be changed based on the hold change pattern. Then, the post-digestion on-hold display relating to the variation display of the decorative symbol is the back bottom effect unit 3500 (the decorative body of the back bottom movable decorative body 3510) that is lit and displayed by the LED mounted on the back bottom movable decorative body decorative substrate 3512. The main body 3511) is used, but at the timing when the display mode of the post-digestion hold display changes, a light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies is performed, and the post-digestion hold display is performed. The possibility of changing the display mode is suggested.

  As a plurality of movable decorative bodies, a decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 in the back right movable rendering unit 3310, a decorative body main body 3411 of the back top movable decorative body 3410 in the back top rendering unit 3400, and a back rear movable rendering. When the suggestion effect pattern in which the ornament body 3321 of the back right movable ornament 3320 and the ornament body 3321 of the back movable ornament 3120 in the unit 3110 can appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600 is executed. Will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 206 is a timing chart showing a light emission state of a plurality of light guide plates and an operation state of the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320.

  As shown in FIG. 206, first, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, an instruction image such as “Press the button!” Is displayed as an image for the player to press the pressing operation unit 303. . Then, the second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 126) is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 by the LED mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. When the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, the rear rear effect unit 3100, the back middle effect unit 3200, the back right effect unit 3300, the back upper effect unit 3400, and the front front By performing the light emission effect of the effect unit 3600 and the like (see FIG. 127), not only the front light guide plate 2610 but also the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5 provided in the vicinity thereof is illuminated and decorated. . Further, the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 is configured to emit light over the same color and with the same color as the second pattern 2622 displayed on the front light guide plate 2610. As a decoration pattern of such a game panel 1100, a decoration that can be integrated with the second pattern 2622 displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 provided on the most front side among the plurality of light guide plates is provided. Both the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 display the same color and emit light over the same period, thereby realizing a light emitting decoration having continuity. Thereby, at the start of the light guide effect, the entire game board 5 is light-decorated, which can give a great impact to the player, and attention can be paid to the progress of the subsequent effect.

  When the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 and progresses to the subsequent production, the light emitting decoration of the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100 on the game board 5 is finished, and the third light on the back first light guide plate 3210 is finished. The player can concentrate on the light-emitting display of the pattern 3211 and the light-emitting display of the sixth pattern 3162 with respect to the back second light guide plate 3160 so that attention can be paid to whether or not the hold display changes after digestion. In addition to the light guide effect in this effect example, the front light guide plate 2610 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 without light-decorating the effect of displaying one of the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100, for example, the decoration pattern of the game panel 1100. Illumination display of the two patterns 2622, an effect of lighting the decoration pattern of the gaming panel 1100 without displaying the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610, a simple luminous decoration of the decoration pattern of the gaming panel 1100 in the normal state , Can also be executed.

  Then, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, whether or not to proceed to the subsequent presentation is made different depending on whether or not the postponement postponement display is determined to change. That is, if it is determined that the hold display after digestion does not change, even if the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It does not appear on the front side, so that the hold display does not change after digestion.

  If the player does not press the pressing operation unit 303, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 does not appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. When it is determined to change, the post-digestion hold display using the decorative body 3511 of the backside movable decorative body 3510 is changed, and the post-digestion hold display is determined not to change In order not to change the hold display after digestion. In this way, the player is encouraged to participate in the light guide effect by changing whether or not to proceed to the subsequent effect depending on whether or not the player presses the pressing operation unit 303. Can do.

  On the other hand, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, when it is determined that the hold display after digestion is changed, the decoration body 3321 of the back right movable decoration 3320 is first displayed on the effect display device. Appear on the front side of 1600. Then, triggered by the appearance of the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, from the state in which the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, the back first located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610. The state is switched to the state in which the third pattern 3211 is displayed on the light guide plate 3210 by light emission. That is, the light emission display of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610 is terminated, and the third pattern 3211 (see FIG. 143) is emitted to the back first light guide plate 3210 by the LED mounted on the third pattern substrate 3221. Display. After that, from the state in which the third pattern 3211 is continuously displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210, the sixth pattern 3162 is emitted to the back second light guide plate 3160 located on the rear side of the back first light guide plate 3210. Switch to the displayed state. That is, the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 on the back first light guide plate 3210 is finished, and the sixth pattern 3162 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 by the LED mounted on the sixth pattern substrate 3172 (see FIG. 141). Is displayed.

  Thus, with the appearance of the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the state where the second pattern 2622 is lit and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, the rear surface located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610 is displayed. After sequentially switching to a state in which the third pattern 3211 is lit and displayed on one light guide plate 3210 and a state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is lit and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160 located on the rear side of the back first light guide plate 3210 , The decoration body main body 3511 of the backside movable decorative body 3510 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, and the post-digestion on-hold display displayed on the decoration body main body 3511 of the backside movable decorative body 3510 is changed. It is made to change based on a pattern, and the expectation degree of jackpot for the variation display of the decorative design is suggested. Further, when the decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the light emission display of the sixth pattern 3162 on the back second light guide plate 3160 is terminated.

  In the above, the suggestion effect that the ornament main body 3321 of the back right movable ornament 3320 among the plurality of movable ornaments may appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600 when the player presses the push operation unit 303. Although the case where the pattern is executed has been described, the decoration body main body 3411 of the back movable decoration body 3410, the decoration body main body 3121 of the back rear movable decoration body 3120, or a plurality of them appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600. Possible suggestive effect patterns are also provided. Specifically, in addition to the suggestive effect pattern in which the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 can appear, the suggested effect pattern in which the decorative body main body 3411 of the back movable movable body 3410 can appear, the back right movable decoration A suggestive effect pattern in which the decorative body main body 3321 of the body 3320 and the decorative body main body 3411 of the back movable decorative body 3410 can appear, and a suggested effect pattern in which the decorative body main body 3121 of the back movable decorative body 3120 can appear are provided. ing. The timing at which these movable decorative bodies appear on the front side of the effect display device 1600 is the same as the timing at which the decorative main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears.

  In addition, the appearance of the decoration body main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration body 3320, the appearance of the decoration body main body 3411 of the back top movable decoration body 3410, the decoration body main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration body 3320 and the back top movable decoration body 3410 In order of appearance of all of the decorative body main body 3411 and the appearance of the decorative body main body 3121 of the back movable movable body 3120, it is suggested that the degree of expectation that the post-digestion on-hold display changes to a display mode with high expectation of big hit is increased. The production pattern is determined. That is, for example, when the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears as a result of the player pressing the pressing operation portion 303, the post-digestion on-hold display is a display mode with a high expectation level for big hits thereafter. In contrast, when the decorative body 3121 of the back movable decorative body 3120 appears, the post-digestion on-hold display has a high probability of changing to a display mode with a high expectation level. It has become. Thereby, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303, it can be noted which of the plurality of movable decorative bodies appears. As another example, the order of the movable decorative body that may appear on the front side of the above-described effect display device 1600 may be performed as an indication of the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, at the start of the light guide effect, both the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are displayed in the same color and emitted during the same period, but the emission colors are white, blue, red, and multicolor emission. The suggested effect pattern is determined so that the degree of expectation that the post-digestion on-hold display changes to a display mode with a high expectation degree of jackpot in order of color increases. That is, for example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are displayed in white, the probability that the post-digestion on-hold display changes to a display mode with a high expectation level is low. When the game panel 1100 is lit and displayed in red, the post-digestion hold display has a high probability of changing to a display mode with a high expectation level for jackpots. As a result, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are lit and displayed at the start of the light guide effect, the luminescent color plays a role of prior suggestion, and these areas are lit and displayed in a highly expected luminescent color. It can also be noted. When the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears, the third pattern 3211 is emitted to the back first light guide plate 3210 from the state where the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610. In the process of sequentially switching to the displayed state and the state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is lit and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the luminescent colors of the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 that are already lit and displayed are continued. . In this process, however, the light emission colors of the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 that have already been light-emitted may be changed (for example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are light-emitted, the light emission is white). However, when the back first light guide plate 3210 is lit and displayed, the red light is emitted, etc.). Thus, until the sixth pattern 3162 is lit and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, the luminescent color is changed. You can also expect changes.

  As another example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are lit and displayed at the start of the light guide effect, the luminescent color is displayed in the luminescent color corresponding to the display mode after the post-digestion hold display is changed. Also good. For example, when the front light guide plate 2610 and the game panel 1100 are lit and displayed in red, by changing the display mode of the post-digestion hold display to red, before the display mode of the post-digestion hold display changes The display mode after the change can be grasped.

  As described above, in the light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, after the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 by light emission, for example, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320. Triggered by the fact that appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, a state in which the third pattern 3211 is lit and displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210, a state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is lit and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, Are switched in order. That is, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is provided between the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, and thus straddles the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320. Thus, the state in which the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 is switched to the state in which the third pattern 3211 is displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210. Thereby, at the stage where the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 by light emission, the front light guide plate 2610 can be seen through the front light guide plate 2610, but the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 can be visually recognized. At the stage where the light emission display of the second pattern 2622 is finished, the light emitting display is performed on the decoration body main body 3321 of the back right movable decoration body 3320 and the back first light guide plate 3210 located on the rear surface side of the front light guide plate 2610. Since the three patterns 3211 are switched to a state where the three patterns 3211 can be clearly seen, the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610 gradually becomes clear, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  By the way, as described above, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is formed in a shape imitating the nata, and the left end is the front end of the nata in the front view, and the lower side is the nata blade. It is said. Nata's blade on the lower side is painted silver. In addition, the decorative body 3321 is formed with a crack-shaped decoration that spreads radially around a central portion in the vertical direction near the tip. The back right movable decorative body 3320 can be light-decorated so that the central portion of the crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 shines by appropriately emitting the central LED 3323a of the back right movable decorative body decorative substrate 3323. By emitting the peripheral LED 3323b of the right movable decorative body decoration substrate 3323, the outer peripheral edge and the crack pattern of the decorative body main body 3321 can be illuminated and decorated.

  In addition, the decorative body main body 3321 has a transparent area shown by hatching in FIG. In other words, the decorative body 3321 is approximately in the vertical direction surrounded by a region in which a crack-patterned decoration is formed in approximately the upper half of the vertical direction and a region in which a nata blade is formed on the lower side. The lower half is formed transparent. For this reason, in a light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, for example, the decoration body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600. When the third pattern 3211 is lit and displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 located on the back side of the body body 3321, the light is displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 through the transmissive region formed in the decorative body body 3321. The third pattern 3211 can be visually recognized. In addition, at the stage where the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back first light guide plate 3210 is lit and displayed through the region where the decorative body main body 3321 is not located. The third pattern 3211 can be visually recognized. As described above, not only in the region where the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 is not located, but also through the transparent region formed in the decorative body main body 3321, the back side which is the rear surface side of the decorative body main body 3321. By visually recognizing the third pattern 3211 that is luminescently displayed on one light guide plate 3210, the front-rear relationship between the third pattern 3211 that is luminescently displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 and the decorative body 3321 is emphasized. A three-dimensional effect can be realized.

  Further, in a light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, for example, when the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears on the front side of the effect display device 1600, the back right movable decoration. By appropriately emitting light so that the central LED 3323a of the body decoration board 3323 emits light so that the central part of the crack pattern of the decoration body main body 3321 shines, and by causing the peripheral LED 3323b of the back right movable decoration body decoration board 3323 to emit light, The outer peripheral edge of the decorative body 3321 and the crack pattern are illuminated and decorated. For this reason, at the stage where the second picture 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, the second picture 2622 is displayed, and the decoration body 3321 on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610 is illuminated. Are overlapped in a visible state, and at the stage where the third pattern 3211 is displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 by light emission, the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 and the front side of the back first light guide plate 3210 are displayed. The light emitting decorations of the decorative body main body 3321 positioned are overlapped with each other in a state where they can be visually recognized. As described above, the light emission display of the second pattern 2622 on the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission decoration of the decorative body 3321, and the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 on the back first light guide plate 3210 are overlapped with each other. Can be viewed in multiple layers, and an effect with a sense of depth can be realized.

  In addition, on the front side of the effect display device 1600, a front light guide plate 2610, a back first light guide plate 3210, and a back second light guide plate 3160 are provided in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction). However, even if light emission display is performed on these light guide plates, the screen of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear surface side can be viewed through the light guide plates. Similarly, on the front side of the effect display device 1600, a decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, a decorative body main body 3411 of the back upper movable decorative body 3410, and a decorative body main body 3121 of the back rear movable decorative body 3120. And a decorative body main body 3511 of the backside movable decorative body 3510 are provided so that they can appear. Through the watermark, the screen of the effect display device 1600 located on the rear side can be viewed. Then, on the screen of the effect display device 1600, by displaying the light emission display for the plurality of light guide plates and the light emission decoration for the plurality of movable decoration bodies, the plurality of light guide plates and the plurality of movable decoration bodies are used. It will be possible to assist in the light guiding effect.

  In a light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, after the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, for example, the decorative body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 displays the effect. Triggered by appearing on the front side of the device 1600, the state is switched in turn to a state in which the third pattern 3211 is displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210 and a state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160. ing. That is, in such a light guide effect, light emission display for a plurality of light guide plates and light emission decoration for a movable decorative body are performed in order from the front side in the front-rear direction (depth direction). Thereby, visual recognition can be smoothly shifted with respect to the light-emitting display of the light guide plate that is sequentially switched, and the player can be prevented from feeling stress. Further, in the light guide effect, it can be noticed with expectation whether or not it can be switched to the light emission display of the light guide plate located on the rear side.

  Further, in a light guide effect using a plurality of light guide plates and a plurality of movable decorative bodies, for example, when the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320 appears, the second pattern 2622 is displayed on the front light guide plate 2610. After switching in order to the state in which light emission is displayed, the state in which the third pattern 3211 is light-emitting and displayed on the back first light guide plate 3210, and the state in which the sixth pattern 3162 is light-emitting and displayed on the back second light guide plate 3160, The post-digestion hold display displayed on the decoration body main body 3511 of 3510 is changed. In addition, as the plurality of movable decorative bodies, the decorative body main body 3321 of the back right movable decorative body 3320, the decorative body main body 3411 of the back top movable decorative body 3410, and the decorative body main body 3121 of the back back movable decorative body 3120 are displayed. When appearing on the front side of the apparatus 1600, the post-digestion on-hold display is operated toward the ornament body 3511 of the backside movable decorative body 3510 on which the light emission display is performed. It acts as if the hold display has changed after digestion. As a result, in the light guide effect, whether or not any of the plurality of movable decorative bodies operates before the post-digestion hold display that is lit and displayed on the decorative body main body 3511 of the lower back movable decorative body 3510 changes. Can attract attention with high expectations.

[17. Jackpot game]
[17-1: Another example of game area]
Hereinafter, an example of the jackpot game of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 209 is a front view showing another example of a game board showing the inside of a game area where game balls circulate with the game panel made opaque in a pachinko machine. Differences from FIG. 107 will be described.

  The game area 5a is provided with a normal start port 2010 which is a start port for starting a normal lottery instead of the gate unit 2003. When the game ball B that has been hit to the right wins the general start port 2010, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and a big prize opening is made from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. A smaller predetermined number of game balls (for example, one, two, or three) at the time of winning a game ball to 2005 is paid out to the upper plate 201.

  Note that the processing by the CPU of the main control MPU and the peripheral control IC 1510a when the game ball B wins the normal start opening 2010 is the game ball B entered the gate unit 2003 except for the above-mentioned game ball payout. This is the same as the processing by the CPU of the main control MPU and the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The game area 5a is further provided with a big hit start gate portion 2009 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. The jackpot start gate portion 2009 is arranged at the approximate center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end of the game area 5a when viewed from the front. As will be described later, the big hit game starts when the game ball B passes the big hit start gate portion 2009 in the big hit start gate portion effective state. In order to smoothly shift to the big hit game in the big hit start gate portion effective state, the big hit start gate portion 2009 is on the path where the game ball B flows down in the game area 5a and various winning holes and out holes 1008 on the path. It is desirable that it is arranged at a more preceding position (that is, upstream from various winning openings and out openings 1008).

[17-2: Another example of control configuration]
FIG. 210 shows another example of a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1. Differences from FIG. 171 will be described. The main control board 1310 is connected to a universal start port sensor 3005 that detects the game ball B received in the normal start port 2010 instead of the gate sensor 2401. The main control board 1310 is connected to a big hit start gate sensor 3004 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the big hit start gate unit 2009. The detection signals from the big hit start gate sensor 3004 and the normal opening sensor 3005 are input to the main control I / O port via the main control input circuit. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the big hit start gate sensor 3004 and the universal start sensor 3005.

[17-3. Another example of jackpot determination processing]
First, another example of the jackpot determination process will be described as to differences from the jackpot determination process of FIG. If the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process in step S122 with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 211 (A). By doing so (step S122), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (first special symbol stop symbol) when the variable control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is stopped is determined (step S123). ). In step S122 for the second symbol random number, if the big hit flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU and the second symbol random number read in step S102 of the second special symbol normal process and FIG. The symbol determination table shown in B) is compared. The symbol determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, for example.

  As shown in FIGS. 211 (A) and 211 (B), the symbol determination table indicates correspondence between jackpot type, distribution, and time until the jackpot start gate portion valid state in each special random number. The “time until the big hit start gate portion valid state” is the time from when the big hit symbol stops on the symbol display until the big hit start gate portion 2009 becomes valid. In this example, the time in step S189 Is set as the waiting time to be set in the interval timer. It should be noted that the big hit start gate part 2009 is only triggered by the start of the big hit game and the operation of the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310.

[17-4. Another example of jackpot control processing]
The big hit control processing of this chapter will be described with respect to differences from the above description using FIGS. 186 to 188. When the standby time set in the interval timer has elapsed in step S401, the main control MPU sets the jackpot start gate unit 2009 to the valid state. When the game ball B passes through the jackpot start gate portion 2009 that is in an effective state, the main control MPU refers to the round distribution table shown in FIG. 212 and determines the number of rounds and a big prize corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step S123. The mouth opening pattern is determined, and the game shifts to the big hit gaming state. Further, there may be an interval of a predetermined time (for example, 0.008 seconds) from when the game ball B passes through the big hit start gate unit 2009 to when the big hit game starts (the first big win opening).

  The round distribution table in FIG. 212 shows, for example, the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of rounds, the distribution, and the big winning opening opening pattern. In the big winning opening opening pattern table shown in FIG. 213, the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in each round of each big winning opening opening pattern is described. The round distribution table and the special winning opening opening pattern table are stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, for example.

  For example, when “6R time shortening symbol 1” is stopped as the first special symbol, the big hit start gate portion 2009 becomes valid after 5.000 seconds from the stop, and the game ball B is in the big hit start gate portion in the valid state. After passing 2009, the main control MPU refers to the round distribution table, and shifts to the big hit gaming state of the number of rounds 6 and the big winning opening release pattern A corresponding to “6R shortage time symbol 1”.

  An example of the operation schedule in the special winning opening opening pattern of FIG. 213 will be described. In the example of FIG. 213, there are operation schedules a to e as the operation winning schedule 2005 operation schedule of each round in the winning opening opening pattern.

  In the operation schedule a, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.000 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule b, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 1.840 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule c, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 1.840 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule d, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (2.000 seconds) and then closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds). In the operation schedule e, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 1.840 seconds), closed for a predetermined time (for example, 2.000 seconds), opened for a long time (for example, 25.000 seconds), and then for a predetermined time ( For example, 2.000 seconds).

  It should be noted that when a predetermined time (for example, 8.000 seconds) has elapsed since the opening of the big winning opening in the operation schedule b and the operation schedule e, the timing at which the valid state flag is set in step S420 (that is, the game ball B is placed in the second receiving port 2008). When it is accepted, it is a timing at which a high probability state is controlled after the big hit gaming state is finished). The timing when the valid state flag is reset is when a predetermined time has elapsed from the setting of the valid state flag or when the round in which the valid state flag is set ends.

  In addition, when a predetermined time (for example, 8.000 seconds) has elapsed from the opening of the big prize opening in the operation schedule b and the operation schedule e (that is, when the valid state flag is set), the main control MPU performs the second reception in step S436. A process of controlling 2008 to an open state is executed. The main control MPU closes the second receiving port 2008 in step S434 when a predetermined time has passed since the second receiving port 2008 was opened, or at the end of the round in which the second receiving port 2008 was opened. The process to be controlled is executed.

  Therefore, in a round in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened according to the operation schedule e, if the game ball B is struck into the game area 5a so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), the big hit game state It is possible to shift to a high probability state after the end of. In other words, the player has “6R time-short symbol 3”, “6R time-short symbol 4”, “16R time-short symbol 5”, “4R time-short symbol 1”, “4R time-short symbol 2”, “16R time-short symbol” In the big hit gaming state corresponding to "symbol 3" and "16R short time with symbol 4", the transition to the high probability state after the end of the big hit gaming state with extremely high probability by continuously executing "right-handed" Can do.

  Note that there may be a plurality of time reduction flags in the description of FIG. For example, there may be a time-short flag A corresponding to a time-short state with a large number of continuations (for example, 130 times) and a time-short flag B corresponding to a time-short state with a small number of continuations in a time-short state (for example, 100 times). For example, if the main control MPU determines in step S425 that the second reception pass flag has been set, the main control MPU sets a high probability flag and a short time flag A in step S426, and the second reception pass flag If it is determined that it is not set, only the time reduction flag B is set in step S426.

  In addition, FIG. 187 describes an example in which the time reduction flag and the high probability flag are set after all rounds are completed. However, the main control MPU performs rounds in which the operation schedule b and the operation schedule e are performed (that is, At the end of the round in which the second receiving port 2008 is controlled to be in an open state, the processes of steps S425 to S427 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU may set the time reduction flag A and the high probability flag in advance at the start of the big hit game. In this case, if the main control MPU determines in step S425 that the second reception pass flag has been set, the main control MPU does not execute the process of step S426, and the second reception pass flag is set in step S425. If it is determined that it is not, the time reduction flag A and the high probability flag are reset and the time reduction flag B is set in step S426.

  In addition, the main control MPU may set the hourly flag B at the start of the big hit game. In this case, if the main control MPU determines in step S425 that the second reception pass flag has been set, the main control MPU resets the time flag B and sets the time flag A and the high probability flag in step S426. If it is determined in step S425 that the second reception pass flag is not set, the process of step S426 is not executed.

[17-5: Jackpot game]
The jackpot game in this chapter is explained below. When the game ball B wins the normal symbol start opening, a predetermined number (for example, one, two, or three) of game balls, which is smaller than that at the time of the big winning opening 2005, is paid out.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the jackpot start command, it displays on the effect display device 1600 a display indicating that the jackpot game has been won. When the standby time set in the interval timer has elapsed in step S401 (that is, when the big hit start gate unit 2009 is enabled), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a display prompting a predetermined operation on the effect display device 1600. . Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a so-called right-handed display to cause the big hit start gate unit 2009 to enter the game ball B and start the big hit game.

  If the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is detected before the big hit start gate unit 2009 is in an effective state and the game ball B enters the big hit start gate unit 2009, the peripheral control IC 1510a The CPU may execute an effect suggesting the number of rounds determined by the round distribution table after the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate unit 2009. It is preferable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not execute an effect that prompts an operation of the operation unit to execute an effect that suggests the number of rounds. When an effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit is executed, the player may give priority to the operation of the operation unit over the right-handed operation by the operation of the handle 182 and may cause a delay in the progress of the game. Because. That is, it is desirable that the effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit is a hidden effect.

  In the distribution pattern table of FIG. 212, the symbol type and the number of rounds correspond to each other on a one-to-one basis. In such a case, even if the jackpot start gate part 2009 is in an active state and the number of rounds before the game ball B enters the jackpot start gate part 2009 is not determined, the type of jackpot symbol Depending on the case, the number of rounds may be specified. In such a case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the effect of prompting the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect suggesting the number of rounds described above, and when the operation unit is operated, the big hit symbol You may make it perform the suggestion display (for example, 16R finalization effect etc.) of the number of rounds corresponding to 1 to 1 for a classification.

  Further, when the operation of the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is detected before the big hit start gate unit 2009 is in an effective state and the game ball B enters the big hit start gate unit 2009, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a May allow selection of music during the big hit game, or change the video displayed on the effect display device 1600 during the big hit game. In addition, when the game ball B wins at any of the start ports when the jackpot start gate portion 2009 is in an effective state, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not output the start port winning sound. When the big hit start gate portion 2009 is in an active state, it is important to give priority to putting the game ball B into the big hit start gate portion 2009 rather than winning the game ball B at any start opening. This is to convey clearly to the person.

  Further, when the game ball passes through the big hit start gate portion 2009, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display a display indicating the number of rounds determined by the round distribution table on the effect display device 1600. The display may be a display indicating a specific number of rounds, or may be an effect indicating the number of appearances such as “super big hit” and “big hit”.

  For example, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins a “big hit” with a lot of balls, the CPU once executes an effect that shows a “big hit” with few balls, and then promotes the ballad with a “big hit”. May be executed. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, before the end of the “big hit” and “super big hit” branch rounds (4 rounds and 6 rounds in this embodiment), for example, during the branch round or from the branch round An effect that indicates “super big hit” is executed during the previous round.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute an effect of recognizing that “big hit” has been promoted to “super big hit” by light emission of various light guide plates and various movable body operations. Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to be controlled to a high probability state after the big hit gaming state is determined in a specific round (4R in the big winning opening opening pattern table shown in FIG. 213) is determined. When an effect suggesting that the game state is controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probable promotion effect) is executed, it is preferable that the effect be executed before the specific round.

  Also, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, during the big hit game, the sound effect output when the game ball B wins the big winning opening 2005 and the general winning opening 2001 (not limited to the winning opening, but other general winning prizes). The sound effect output when the game ball B wins the game may be determined as the same sound effect. This makes the player feel as if more game balls have won the big prize opening 2005 than the maximum number of prizes received in the big prize opening 2005 in one round without penalizing the hall. Can do.

  Further, in this case, the sound effect output when the game ball B wins the general winning opening 2001 during the period when the big winning opening 2005 is not open (including those other than the big hit gaming state) It is desirable that it differs from the sound effect output when the game ball B wins. Further, even if the game ball B wins the general winning opening 2001, no sound effect may be output.

  It should be noted that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives the game ball B in the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, the normal start port 2010, or the like instead of the general winning port 2001 during the big hit game. The output sound effect and the sound effect output when the game ball B wins the general winning opening 2001 may be determined as the same sound effect.

  Referring to FIG. 209, the normal start port 2010 is located on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big prize opening 2005 passes in the game area 5a and on the path preceding the big prize opening 2005. (That is, upstream of the big prize opening 2005). In other words, a part of the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 is configured to win the usual start opening 2010. Therefore, even when the player performs a right-handed strike with a short firing interval (for example, 0.6 second interval which is the shortest interval) during the big hit game, a prescribed number (for example, a single winning opening 2005 is opened) 10) or more winning prizes 2005 can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the game ball B wins at the normal start opening 2010, as described above, a smaller number of game balls (for example, one or three) than the case where the game ball B wins the big winning opening 2005 is paid out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of game balls to be paid out in one round becomes excessive. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player without imposing an excessive burden on the hall. In order to further reduce the burden on the hall, it is desirable that the number of game balls to be paid out when the game ball B wins the normal opening 2010 is one. Further, it is possible to suppress the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time during the big hit game and lengthen the time in the big hit game state without excessively increasing the total payout of game balls during the big hit game. .

  However, in the round of the operation schedule in which the grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time, the number of the game balls B that are smaller than the prescribed number (for example, 10) in one opening of the big prize opening 2005 is won in the big prize opening 2005. As such, there is a risk that a complaint will be generated from the player. Therefore, in the operation schedule for opening the grand prize opening 2005 for a long time, the position of the ordinary start opening 2010, the opening time of the big prize opening 2005, and so on, so that the specified number of game balls B win the big prize opening 2005, and The probability of winning a normal symbol during a big hit game and the opening time of the second start door 2411 (specifically, for example, by setting the probability of winning a normal symbol to 0 during a big hit game, the second start door 2411 is opened. In addition, during the big hit game, it is necessary to set in advance the winning probability of the normal symbol is not 0 but the opening time of the second start door 2411 is shortened). The opening time (for example, 29.000 seconds) / launch interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) is the number of game balls B heading to the big winning opening 2005 during the opening time of one big winning opening 2005, for example, It is desirable that the setting is made so that more than half will win the big prize opening 2005.

  In addition, a starting port for performing a lottery to open a winning port with an opening device (for example, a second starting port 2004 with a second starting port door 2411, a large winning port 2005 with a large winning port door 2413), It is desirable that all winning balls have prize balls. If there is no prize ball even if the game ball B enters the starting port for performing the lottery, even if a lottery result for opening the opening device is obtained, for example, the game ball B owned by the player is In the case of the last ball, there is a situation in which the game ball B cannot be won in the open winning opening. As described above, since the starting holes for performing the lottery to open the winning opening with the opening device are all winning holes with a winning ball, in such a situation, the player newly opens the gaming ball B. It is possible to avoid the situation of buying more.

  Further, it is desirable that the normal start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 are constituted by, for example, one unit and are located in the vicinity of each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 209, the normal start port 2010 is a second start port on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big prize opening 2005 passes in the game area 5a. Arranged upstream of the door 2411.

  Although the obstacle nail is not shown in FIG. 209, the game ball B that does not enter the normal start port 2010 and flows downward in the normal start port 2010 is guided to the second start port 2004. , Obstacle nails are arranged. Temporarily, the 2nd starting port 2004 is arrange | positioned on the path | route through which the game ball B struck toward the big winning opening 2005 passes in the game area 5a, and upstream of the general start port 2010 on the said path | route. Then, when the game ball B enters the second start port 2004, entry of the game ball B into the usual start port 2010 is obstructed. There is a possibility that the opening frequency of the mouth 2004 is low. In order to prevent the occurrence of such a situation, as described above, the normal start port 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big prize opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and It is desirable that the second start port door 2411 is disposed upstream of the route. On the other hand, if the gaming machine has the idea that the player wants to enjoy the short time state for a long time, the positional relationship between the normal start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 may be reversed.

  Further, it is desirable that the number of prize balls at the normal start port 2010 and the number of prize balls at the second start port 2004 are the same (for example, one). Assume that the number of prize balls at one start port (for example, the second start port 2004) is set to a large number (for example, set to two). In this case, the normal start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 are located in the vicinity, and the player cannot easily determine which start port the game ball B has won. There is a possibility that the number of prize balls actually paid out from the pachinko machine 1 is less than the number. Specifically, for example, the player misunderstands that the game ball B has won the second start port 2004 even though the game ball B has won the normal start port 2010, that is, there are two players. However, there is a possibility that only one prize ball will be paid out from the pachinko machine 1. When such a situation occurs, there is a possibility that a complaint from the player that the number of prize balls is insufficient for the hole may occur. As described above, such a situation can be avoided by setting the same number of prize balls in the normal start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 located in the vicinity.

  In addition, although the example in which the normal start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 are configured as one unit has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the members that configure the general start port 2010 and the grand prize winning port 2005 are as follows. It may be composed of one unit. In this case, the normal start port 2010 is arranged on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big prize opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes and upstream of the big prize opening door 2413 on the path. Thus, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time during the big hit game can be suppressed, and the time in the big hit gaming state can be lengthened.

  On the other hand, the normal start opening 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B that has been launched in the game area 5a toward the big prize opening 2005 but has not won the big prize opening 2005 passes, and the big prize on the path. It may be arranged downstream of the mouth door 2413. In such a case, while the grand prize opening door 2413 is open, the game ball B launched toward the big prize opening 2005 does not go to the usual start opening 2010, but in the inter-round interval, The game ball B launched toward 2005 heads toward the usual start port 2010. Thus, the big hit game state can be smoothly advanced, and the normal lottery can be performed early in the short time state where the transition is made after the big hit game ends.

  In addition, for example, the member constituting the ordinary start port 2010 and the member constituting the center accessory 2500 may be configured as one unit, or the member constituting the ordinary start port 2010 and the big prize opening 2005 may be provided. The member which comprises and the member which comprises the center accessory 2500 may be comprised by one unit. The attachment process can be shortened by appropriately integrating at least two of the normal start port 2010, the special prize opening 2005, the center accessory 2500, and the second start port 2004.

  In addition, when winning a plurality of jackpot games across only the advantageous gaming states (high probability non-short state, low probability short state, and high probability short state) after the end of the big hit gaming state, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a When the cumulative number of game balls paid out in the multi-hit game has reached a predetermined number (for example, a multiple of 2500, or a number that is 2500 or more and the last three digits are “000”), A display indicating that the predetermined number has been reached may be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  If the second special symbol fluctuates continuously from the short-time state after the short-time state ends, and the winning game is won by the change, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins the big-hit game in the advantageous gaming state after the end of the big-hitting game. It may be considered that That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may use the cumulative payout number including the payout number of game balls in the jackpot game for the cumulative display.

  Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a cumulative display such as “Acquire 2500!” On the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined time (for example, when the cumulative number of game balls to be paid out reaches 2500). 2-3 seconds). When a new winning is made to the big winning opening 2005 while the cumulative display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is desirable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not count up the cumulative display. However, even in this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not count up the cumulative display when the count display that counts the total number of game balls paid out in one big hit game is performed, It is desirable to count up the count display.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives a jackpot end command from the main control MPU at the end of the final round of the jackpot game, and executes the ending effect of the jackpot game. Therefore, immediately before the big hit game ends (for example, when the remaining two game balls B win the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game, the big hit game ends), When the total number of payouts reaches a predetermined number as a result of winning a prize (for example, when the remaining one game ball B wins the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game, the big hit game ends) The ending effect starts immediately after the cumulative display is displayed, and there is a possibility that the cumulative display cannot be displayed for a predetermined time. However, even in this case, it is desirable for the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a to perform cumulative display without changing the display time in order to give the player a sense of excitement.

  However, when the remaining one game ball B wins the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game and the big hit game ends, the game balls are awarded to the big prize opening 2005, so that the cumulative number of payouts is a predetermined number. Is reached, the cumulative display is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. That is, the cumulative display is an effect that displays the cumulative number of payouts in a plurality of jackpot games, and is an effect that indicates that the current state is a state in which winning to the big winning opening 2005 is permitted.

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a confirms that the game ball B has won the big prize opening 2005 in a state where the big hit game ends when the remaining one game ball B wins the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game. Thus, even when the cumulative number of payouts reaches a predetermined number, the cumulative display may be displayed in an area on the effect display device 1600 that does not overlap the area where the ending effect is displayed. As long as the ending effect can be recognized, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display a part or all of the cumulative display on the area where the ending effect is displayed.

  In the description of the cumulative display above, “the state in which the big hit game is finished when the remaining two game balls B win the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the big hit game” is “the big win in the final round of the big hit game”. "The state where the remaining opening time of the mouth 2005 is included in the predetermined range (for example, more than 1.0 seconds and not more than 2.0 seconds)" “A state in which the jackpot game ends when winning a prize in 2005” may be read as “a state in which the remaining open time of the big prize opening 2005 in the final round of the jackpot game is a predetermined value or less (for example, 1.0 seconds or less)”. . Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may use not only the effect display device 1600 but also various movable bodies, various lamps, various speakers, various light guide plates, and the like for effects during the big hit game.

  In addition, although the obstacle nail is not shown in FIG. 209, the branch whether or not the right-handed game ball B wins the normal start opening 2010 is realized by the obstacle nail implanted in the game area 5a. ing. A game ball B that did not win the normal start port 2010 is led to the second start port 2004, and a game ball B that was led to the second start port 2004 but did not win the second start port 2004 is a big prize. Guided to mouth 2005. Note that the game ball B that has not won the prize opening 2010 touches the obstacle nail until it passes from the center of the members constituting the figure figure opening opening 2010 to the side of the big prize opening door 2413. There is nothing. A game ball B that has been led to the grand prize opening 2005 but has not won the big prize opening 2005 has a general prize opening 2001 whose entrance is inclined in the 2 o'clock direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front (FIG. 209). In FIG. 2, a failure nail is planted so as to be led to a general winning port 2001 on the right side of the first starting port 2002 (hereinafter, this general winning port 2001 is also referred to as the last fort winning port).

  Here, the number of winnings at each winning opening in the short-time state and the number of winnings at each winning opening in the big hit gaming state will be described. In the following description, the number of award balls when the game ball B wins the normal start opening 2010 is one, and the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins the second start opening 2004 is one. The number of prize balls when the game ball B wins the winning opening 2005 is 15, and the number of prize balls when the game ball B wins the final fort entrance is three.

  First, the number of winnings at each winning opening in the short time state will be described. In order to increase the number of fluctuations of special symbols per unit time in the short-time state compared to the non-short-time state, it is necessary that a failure nail is implanted so as to appropriately win the game ball B at the second start port 2004 There is. Further, in order to open the second starting port 2004 in the time-short state, it is necessary that an obstacle nail is planted so that the game ball B is appropriately won in the usual starting port 2010.

  When the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short launch interval (for example, the shortest interval of 0.6 seconds), for example, about 35 game balls B per minute are awarded to the normal start opening 2010. Obstacle nails have been implanted so that Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the period when a normal lottery is not performed in a time-short state can be suppressed. Therefore, the second start opening 2004 is opened moderately, and the second start opening 2004 is also moderately (for example, about 50 games per minute when the player hits the game ball B right at a short launch interval). Ball B will win.

  If the number of game balls that are paid out is larger than the number of game balls B that are launched in a short time state (the so-called payout rate exceeds 1), an excessive burden is placed on the hole. When the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short launch interval, the number of game balls B to be launched per minute is approximately 100, so that both the normal start port 2010 and the second start port 2004 are awarded. The number of non-playing game balls B will be 15 (out of 100 game balls B launched per minute, 35 game balls B will win the usual opening 2010, and the remaining 65 game balls 50 game balls B out of B win the second starting port 2004). Further, the total of the number of payouts by the game ball B to the normal start port 2010 per minute and the number of payouts by the game ball B to the second start port 2004 per minute is 85.

  Obstacle nails are planted so that the remaining 15 game balls B head to the final fort entrance. Since the number of game balls to be paid out when the game ball B wins the final fort prize opening is three, five or more of the 15 game balls B are used as the final fort prize entrance. When winning a prize, the payout rate in the short time state exceeds 1. Accordingly, the game ball B heading to the final fort winning gate (that is, the game ball B that has been hit right in the short-time state and has not won any of the normal start port 2010 and the second start port 2004). It is desirable that the obstacle nail is implanted so that the ratio of the game ball B that wins the final fort entrance to B) is less than 1/5, for example.

  If the number of payouts when the game ball B wins at the final fort entrance is one, the payout rate will never exceed 1 in the short-time state, increasing the burden on the hole. There is nothing. However, there is a player whose interest is reduced by knowing that the payout rate never exceeds 1. Therefore, the number of payouts when the game ball B wins the final fort winning entrance is more than 1 (for example, 2 or 3) in order to maintain the player with some expectation for the payout rate. It is desirable.

  Next, the number of winnings at each winning mouth in the big hit gaming state will be described. Since the general start starting port 2010 is a non-movable winning opening (that is, a winning opening that is always open), in the big hit gaming state, when the player hits the game ball B right at a short firing interval, The number of game balls B that wins the starting port 2010 is 35, which is the same as the short time state. Even in the big hit game state, the normal lottery is performed based on the fact that the game ball B wins the normal start port 2010, but the normal start lottery is not won or even if the normal lottery is won, the second start port Since 2004 does not open, it is difficult for the game ball B to enter the second starting port 2004 in the big hit gaming state.

  Therefore, almost all or all of the game balls B (65 in the above example) that have not won the normal start port 2010 among the game balls B that the player has made a right strike at a short launch interval are a big prize. Although it will go to the mouth 2005, not all of the game balls headed to the big winning opening 2005 win the big winning mouth. This is because there is an interval between rounds. For example, when the interval time between rounds is 2.000 seconds, about 80% of the game balls headed to the grand prize opening 2005 win the big prize opening 2005, and other game balls are the last fort. Obstacle nails are planted so as to go to the winning entrance.

  That is, in the short-time state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right with a short launch interval, the normal start port 2010 is 35 per minute, the second start port 2004 is 50 per minute, In 2005, 0 gaming balls B per minute and less than 3 gaming balls B per minute enter the final fort entrance. On the other hand, in the big hit game state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right with a short launch interval, the normal start port 2010 is 35 per minute, the second start port 2004 is 0 per minute, 52 balls (65 × 80%) per minute in the mouth 2005, and less than 3 game balls B per minute in the final fort winning gate.

  In other words, the number of game balls B that wins the second starting port 2004 in the short-time state and the number of game balls B that wins the big winning port 2005 in the big hit gaming state are substantially the same. Therefore, in the short-time state, the number of winning game balls B at the normal start opening 2010, the number of winning game balls B at the second starting opening 2004, and the number of winning game balls B at the final fort opening. The ratio of, is the number of winning game balls B to the general start port 2010, the number of winning game balls B to the big winning opening 2005, and the number of game balls B to the final fort winning port in the big hit gaming state It is almost the same as the ratio of winnings. In other words, in the short-time state and the jackpot game state, although the types of winning holes for which the game balls B win are partially different, the ratio of the number of game balls B that wins each winning port is almost the same.

  Moreover, as described above, the general start port 2010 is arranged upstream of the second start port 2004, but in the time-saving state, the number of game balls B that win the general start port 2010 per minute is determined. It is desirable that obstacle nails are planted so that the number of game balls B winning in the second starting port 2004 per minute is larger. This is because even if the game ball B wins the normal start opening 2010, a lottery for opening the big winning opening 2005 (that is, a special lottery for the big hit) is not performed.

  In addition, when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short firing interval in the short-time state, the total number of game balls B heading to the big winning opening 2005 and the last fort winning opening per minute (15 in the above example). In the big hit game state, the number of game balls B that wins the normal start port 2010 per minute when the player hits the game ball B with a short firing interval (35 in the above example) ) Is more characteristic. If the reverse is true, the time of the big hit gaming state is shortened, and it becomes impossible for the player to entertain the big hit gaming state for a long time, and the number of game balls B entering the second starting port 2004 in the short time state is reduced. This is because there is a possibility that a situation in which the time-short gaming state is prolonged will decrease.

  In the short time state, when the player hits the game ball B to the right at a short launch interval, the total number of game balls B going to the big prize opening 2005 and the last fort prize opening per minute (15 in the above example) ), The number of game balls B that wins the normal start opening 2010 per minute when the player hits the game ball B right at short firing intervals in the big hit game state (35 in the above example) Even if there are more, in the big hit gaming state, the number of winnings of the game ball B in one opening of the big winning opening 2005 is not a prescribed number (for example, 10) or less (in the above example, If the number of game balls B (65, but the upper limit is 90) goes to the big winning opening 2005, the number of game balls acquired by the player in the big hit game state will not decrease.

  Further, only when the game is in the big hit game state, when the game ball B wins the normal opening 2010, it is preferable that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a predetermined effect. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs, for example, the same sound as the winning sound that is output when the game ball B wins the prize winning opening 2005, or the game ball B wins the prize winning opening 2005 as a predetermined effect. A winning sound that is different from the winning sound that is output at the time of playing is output, or the effect display device 1600 is informed that the game ball B has won the normal opening 2010.

  In this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 15101a appeals to the player that the game ball B has won the normal start port 2010, so that a lot of game balls B have won the winning port in the big hit game state. The player can feel the facts, and the interest is maintained. The peripheral control IC 1510a preferably emits various lamps, moves various movable bodies, or emits various light guide plates in accordance with the above-described predetermined effects.

  In addition to this, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is also normally started when it is controlled in the big hit game state (from the start of the right-handed instruction until the start of the big hit game ending effect). When the cumulative number of winning game balls B to the mouth 2010 reaches a predetermined number, a privilege may be given to the player. The predetermined number is preferably a value smaller than the total number of game balls B that wins the big winning opening 2005 in one big hit game, such as 50. For example, in a 16-round jackpot game, the number of specified winnings per round (when the game ball B having the specified number of winnings wins the winning prize opening 2005, the opening of the winning prize opening 2005 in one round ends) Since 16 × 10 = 160 game balls B win the big prize opening 2005 in one big hit game, the predetermined number is 160 or less.

  For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may increase the number of songs in the jackpot game that can be selected at the time of winning the next jackpot, or if the special symbol variation is suspended in the jackpot game state Executes an effect that suggests whether or not the player wins the big hit, sets the stage effect (background) displayed after the big hit gaming state to be a special dedicated stage, or expects whether or not the winner is won Release the notice effect or the reach effect (that is, the notice effect or the reach effect appears only when the cumulative number of winning game balls B to the normal start opening 2010 reaches a predetermined number in the big hit game state) It is a possible production). When such a privilege can be granted, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, a message such as “If the cumulative number exceeds a predetermined number ...” on the effect display device 1600 or the like in the big hit gaming state. Still good.

[18. L5 production]
[18-1: Pseudo-continuous production]
Hereinafter, the L5 effect that is an example of the specific effect in the present embodiment will be described. First, the pseudo continuous effect will be described. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect of executing the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the variation of the decorative symbol a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator. . “Ending the decoration symbol variation” includes, for example, a mode in which the player recognizes that the variation of the decoration symbol is once completed, such as a mode in which a part or all of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. In other words, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes it appear as if a plurality of variations have been performed with a single variation of the decorative design. Note that a pseudo-continuous effect in which the operation is performed twice is also referred to as a pseudo-single sequence, and a pseudo-continuous effect in which the operation is performed three times is also referred to as a pseudo-double sequence. In addition, the second operation of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is referred to as pseudo 1 and the third operation is also referred to as pseudo 2. The number of times may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 at the start of the second and subsequent operations in the pseudo-continuous effect.

  In this chapter, it is assumed that there is only one variation pattern table at the time of jackpot, that is, the variation pattern table at the time of jackpot is common to all types of jackpots. Also, in this chapter, it is assumed that there is only one variation pattern table at the time of detachment, that is, the variation pattern table is common for divergence with and without reach. However, as described with reference to FIG. 183, the fluctuation pattern table is determined for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the design random number (first design random number, second design random number). A plurality of types may be provided. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 183, the variation pattern table at the time of detachment may be provided separately from the variation pattern table at the time of detachment and the variation pattern table at the time of detachment without reach.

  First, an example of the jackpot determination process in this chapter will be described with respect to differences from the jackpot determination process of FIG. If the main control MPU determines in step S115 that the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are out of step, the main control MPU determines that they are out of step. The big hit determination process is terminated without executing the above process.

  Next, an example of the first variation pattern setting process in this chapter will be described with respect to differences from the first variation pattern setting process of FIG. 183. If the main control MPU determines that the big hit flag is set in step S141, the main control MPU selects a big hit time variation pattern table in step S142. If the main control MPU determines that the big hit flag is not set in step S141, the main control MPU selects the fluctuation pattern table at the time of deviation in step S145 without executing the processing in steps S143 and S144.

  FIG. 214 is an example of a variation pattern table at the time of big hit. FIG. 215 is an example of a variation pattern table at the time of loss. In the variation pattern table, for example, a variation number for identifying the variation pattern, a variation pattern, an effect content executed in the variation pattern, a variation time of the variation pattern, and a distribution in which the variation pattern is selected, The correspondence of is described.

  The effect content in the variation pattern table indicates the content of the SP reach or movie reach in the variation pattern in which the SP reach or movie reach is executed. It is assumed that the expectation of big hit is high in the order of movie reach, Barbell Reach, SP reach 2, Mahjong Reach, SP reach 1, Janken Reach, and normal reach. For example, in the variation pattern of “normal reach + pseudo one sequence”, the variation of the decoration symbol is executed twice during one variation of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. This is a variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed in variation.

  In step S148, the main control MPU sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer. However, the main control MPU changes the variation time according to the determined variation pattern and the start memory number at the start of the variation. Also good. For example, when the determined variation pattern is a predetermined variation pattern (for example, out of reach) and the start memory number is large (for example, the start memory number is 3 or more), the main control MPU shortens the variation time. May be.

[18-2: About pre-reading effects]
Hereinafter, the prefetching effect will be described. The pre-reading effect is an effect that suggests the result of the special lottery for the change before the change display of the special symbol is started. FIG. 216 is an example of a prefetch effect table. The prefetch effect table shows, for example, the correspondence between the variation number and the distribution of the prefetch effect.

  In the pre-reading effect table, “none” indicates that the pre-reading effect is not executed, and “holding change” indicates a so-called holding pre-reading effect that suggests the result of the special lottery by the color of the hold display in the effect display device 1600, for example. “Stop symbol same color” indicates a so-called same color symbol pre-reading effect that stops the decoration symbol of the same color in the effect display device 1600, and “L5” indicates an L5 effect described later.

  Whether or not the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes the prefetch effect in the effect control process of step S602 according to the change number indicated by the change pattern command received from the main control MPU and the distribution indicated by the prefetch effect table, and When the prefetch effect is executed, it is determined which prefetch effect is executed. Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, has a predetermined variation pattern (for example, a variation that is pending before a target variation that determines whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect or a variation that is being performed develops to reach a predetermined variation pattern (for example, (Variation pattern in which SP reach or movie reach is executed), the execution of the prefetch effect in the target change may be prohibited regardless of the assignment of the prefetch effect table.

  Also in such a case, it goes without saying that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not have to prohibit the pre-reading effect. Specifically, for example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the hold pre-reading effect in a state where the hold display is not performed on the effect display device 1600 as during execution of SP reach or movie reach, The hold color may be changed and displayed on the stage display device 1600 when the hold display is resumed. At that time, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a special sound that indicates that the pre-reading effect is executed instead of the normal sound that is output when the pre-playing effect is not executed when the game ball B wins at the starting port. Good. Further, in this state, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the so-called same-color symbol prefetching, there is a case where the same-color symbol cannot be obtained due to the decorative symbol that stops when the reach is lost. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute a process of changing the type of prefetch effect to be executed or prohibiting the execution of the prefetch effect.

[18-3: L5 production]
Hereinafter, an example in which the L5 effect is executed as a prefetch effect will be described. The L5 effect is a look-ahead effect in which the jackpot expectation index (consisting of L1 to L5) displayed on the effect display device 1600 is promoted step by step. The big hit expectation is higher in the order of L5, L4, L3, L2, L1 (initial state). In the L5 effect, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation index displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not demoted during the L5 effect. Further, in the L5 effect, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to a specific stage, the jackpot confirmation or the probability change confirmation may be made. In the L5 effect, only the big hit expectation degree index in the middle may be the big hit fixed or the probability change fixed (specifically, for example, L4 is the big hit or the big hit fixed or the probability change fixed). However, it is not necessary to determine any of L5).

  In the L5 effect, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, a predetermined effect with a high jackpot expectation degree (barbell reach which is a movie reach in this embodiment) is executed. In addition, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, a specific effect (for example, a successful effect that can raise the barbell or a next notice effect of a specific reach effect) The barbell reach may be executed after the appearance of the advance notice) that a specific reach effect is executed.

  Note that it is desirable that the L5 effect be executed with a variation corresponding to a variation pattern in which the variation time is not shortened even when the number of start memories at the start of the variation is large. Specifically, the L5 effect may be executed only for the fluctuation pattern in which the SP reach 1, 2 and movie reach are executed, or the fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-reameration always occurs.

  However, in the case of a variation corresponding to a variation pattern in which the variation time is shortened when the number of start memories at the start of the variation is large, the Gase L5 effect may be executed. Gase's L5 effect is, for example, an effect in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted only to a predetermined value or less (for example, L3 or less) and does not develop into a reach effect, and suggests promotion of the jackpot expectation index. The indicator remains in the initial state (L1) and the production does not develop into a reach production. However, even in the Lasse production of Gase, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to a predetermined value or more, for example, an effect with a high jackpot expectation such as a reach effect or a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

  In this chapter, the jackpot expectation index is expressed by the numerical values displayed on the effect display device 1600, such as L1 to L5. However, it is not always necessary to use a numerical value. Light emission color of light guide plate and various lamps, sound from various speakers, or various effects displayed on effect display device 1600 (colors and sizes of characters and images displayed on effect display device 1600, effects such as lines) (Content)).

  Referring to the variation patterns in FIG. 214 and FIG. 215, the variation in which the barbell reach is performed is a variation with variation numbers of 10, 11, 12, 24, 25, and 26. Since the barbell reach is not executed in the fluctuation in the other fluctuation pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not promote the jackpot expectation index to L5 when executing the L5 effect on the fluctuation in the other fluctuation pattern (that is, the maximum) The production is controlled so that it is promoted only to L4.

  FIG. 217 is an example of the L5 effect promotion pattern table. The L5 effect promotion pattern table indicates, for example, the correspondence between the promotion pattern indicating the promotion timing of the jackpot expectation index in the L5 effect and the distribution of the promotion pattern. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S602 to execute the L5 effect as the pre-reading effect, the CPU selects the L5 effect promotion pattern according to the distribution in the L5 effect promotion pattern table.

  In addition, the maintenance 1 fluctuation in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is a change immediately before a change (hereinafter, also referred to as an L5 target change) determined to execute the L5 effect as a look-ahead effect, and is an L5 target change. The change that was held at the time of winning corresponding to is shown. The retention 2 variation in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is a variation that is one change prior to the retention 1 variation, and indicates a variation that was reserved at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation. The maintenance 3 change in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is a change immediately before the maintenance 2 change, and indicates a change that was reserved at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target change.

  Note that if there is no hold 3 change pending at the time of winning a prize corresponding to the L5 target change, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a assumes that there is no “at the start of hold 3 change” column in the L5 effect promotion pattern table. , Determine the promotion pattern. The same applies to the case where there is no hold 2 variation hold at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target change, and the case where there is no hold 1 change hold when winning corresponding to the L5 target change. Moreover, the L5 effect promotion pattern table according to each holding state at the time of winning corresponding to L5 object fluctuation | variation may be prepared beforehand.

  Further, when the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo-ream, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the column “at the start of pseudo 1” and “at the start of pseudo 2” in the L5 effect promotion pattern table. The promotion pattern is determined on the assumption that no column exists. When the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a pseudo one-sequence variation pattern (that is, a variation pattern that executes the pseudo 1 but does not execute the pseudo 2), the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays “ The promotion pattern is determined on the assumption that the “pseudo 2 start” column does not exist. Moreover, the L5 effect promotion pattern table according to each variation pattern of L5 object variation may be prepared in advance.

  In addition, when the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo-ream and the pattern that promotes the jackpot expectation index to L5 is selected, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the L5 target variation. Another effect may be performed in which it is determined that the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 by the time it is done. In addition, when the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern that does not execute the pseudo-ream, there is a high possibility that the variation time is relatively short. Therefore, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a dedicated effect for promoting the L5 You may perform with the start of L5 object change.

  When the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern that does not execute barbell reach, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5 from the L5 effect promotion pattern table. . In other words, in this case, in the example of FIG. 217, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects one of the promotion patterns numbered 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10. In this case, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads “when barbell reach is developed” in the L5 promotion pattern table as “when reach is developed” or the like.

  At the time of winning the L5 target variation, there is a hold corresponding to the maintenance 1 variation, the maintenance 2 variation, and the maintenance 3 variation, and the variation number of the variation pattern of the L5 coping variation is 12 (movie reach + pseudo duplex). Consider an example in which the number 5 promotion pattern in the L5 effect promotion pattern table is selected. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays the initial big hit expectation level L1 on the effect display device 1600 when the L5 target variation is won, and displays the big hit expectation level L1 on the effect display device 1600 until the end of the maintenance 3 variation. To do.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a raises the big hit expectation on the effect display device 1600 to L2 at the start of the maintenance 2 change, and displays the big hit expectation L2 on the effect display device until immediately before the start of the pseudo 1 of the L5 target change. . Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a raises the big hit expectation degree on the effect display device 1600 to L3 at the start of the pseudo 1 and raises the big hit expectation degree on the effect display device 1600 to the L4 at the start of the pseudo 2 time. The big hit expectation on the effect display device 1600 is raised to L5. Although the example of raising the jackpot expectation index at a predetermined timing has been described, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a predetermined raising effect (such as a shutter effect by the back second light guide plate 3160) at the timing, and the raising is performed. It goes without saying that the jackpot expectation index may be raised after the production.

  As shown in the promotion patterns of numbers 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10 in FIG. 217, there are promotion patterns that develop into barbell reach with high jackpot expectation even if the jackpot expectation index does not reach L5. It is preferable to do. Thereby, even if the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5, the player can have a sense of expectation for the jackpot and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. It is desirable that the total distribution of the promotion patterns that develop into barbell reach even if the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5 is 50% or less.

  In the example of FIG. 217, the jackpot expectation index at the time of L5 target variable winning in all promotion patterns is L1, but there is a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L2 or more at the L5 target variable winning. Also good.

  In the example of FIG. 217, the jackpot expectation index develops to L5 at the earliest at the start of the L5 target fluctuation, but before the start of the L5 target fluctuation (for example, at the start of the maintenance 1 fluctuation, the maintenance 2 fluctuation start). There may be a promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 at the time of the start of the change, the maintenance 3 change, or the L5 target change prize. In the case where the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 before the start of the L5 target change, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a dedicated effect when the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 before the start of the L5 target change. It may be executed from the start of the target variation.

[18-4: Specific example 1 of L5 production]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the L5 effect will be described. 218A and 218B, the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern in which barbell reach and pseudo-duplex are executed, and the promotion pattern number 3 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 is selected. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an outline of L5 effect.

  The effect display device 1600 includes a jackpot expectation index display area 1660. It is assumed that a color suggesting each jackpot expectation index is determined in advance. In the following, it is assumed that L1 is associated with white, L2 is associated with blue, L3 is associated with green, L4 is associated with red, and L5 is associated with gold.

  In the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, information indicating the current jackpot expectation index is displayed. In the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, for example, “L1”, “L2”, “L3”, and “L4” are displayed on the circle, and “L5” is displayed at the center of the circle. Assume that the highlighted jackpot expectation index at the 12 o'clock position on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 is the current value of the jackpot expectation index.

  When the current jackpot expectation index is L5, “L5” in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 remains centered and “L5” is highlighted. In the following, it is assumed that highlighting is performed using a color corresponding to the jackpot expectation index.

  In the L5 effect of the promotion pattern of number 3, the jackpot expectation index remains L1 until immediately before the start of the L5 target change. Accordingly, at the start of the L5 target fluctuation, “L1” is displayed at a position in the twelve o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660, and only “L1” is highlighted (a white star corresponding to L1). (Displayed in the figure). Note that, as the jackpot expectation index highlighting display, for example, the jackpot expectation index may be enlarged or blinked.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a pseudo-continuous symbol (“5” for the left decorative symbol in FIG. 218A, “6” for the middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol in FIG. The symbol “7”) is stopped on the effect display device 1600 in the L5 target variation. As shown in FIG. 218A, a predetermined decorative symbol combination may be a pseudo continuous symbol, or a dedicated symbol that is not included in the decorative symbol (numeric symbol) may be stopped as a pseudo continuous symbol.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in blue, which is a color corresponding to L2 which is a jackpot expectation index after promotion at the start of pseudo 1 after the pseudo continuous pattern is stopped. .

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the light emission area of the back second light guide plate 3160 to gradually increase in the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the L5 effect as in the examples of FIGS. For example, the light emitting area of the back second light guide plate 3160 may be made to emit light sequentially so that the shutter is closed. In this case, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, causes the light emitting areas to sequentially emit light in the color corresponding to the jackpot expectation index before promotion, and after all the light emitting areas emit light, You may make it light-emit in the color corresponding to an expectation index.

  Further, in the example of the L5 effect in FIGS. 218A and 218B, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes all the light emitting areas of the back second light guide plate 3160 to overlap the decorative design and the hold display on the effect display device 1600 to emit light. However, the light emitting area that overlaps the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 or the light emitting area that overlaps the hold display on the effect display device 1600 may not be emitted.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light so that the player cannot visually recognize the area on the effect display device 1600 that overlaps the light emitting area for each light emitting area in the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 in the L5 effect. You may control to make it light, or you may control to light-emit so that the area | region on the effect display apparatus 1600 which overlaps with the said light emission area | region may be visually recognized by a player.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light so that the area on the effect display device 1600 that overlaps the light emitting area is visible to the player, a predetermined display is displayed in the area visible to the player on the effect display device 1600. (For example, a predetermined character, a title logo, etc.) may be performed. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits light so that the player can visually recognize the area on the effect display device 1600 that overlaps the light emitting area, the CPU emits light to the back second light guide plate 3160 as in the example of FIG. In order to assist the displayed “Chance!” Character, the effect display device 1600 may also display the “Chance!” Character.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of pseudo 1, so that “L2” is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. The circle is rotated and “L2” is highlighted (displayed in a blue star-shaped figure corresponding to L2).

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the light emission area of the back second light guide plate 3160 to gradually decrease as shown in the examples of FIGS. 203 and 204 when the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 is stopped in the L5 effect. In addition, the light emission in the light emitting area may be sequentially stopped (for example, so that the shutter is opened).

  In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is configured such that when the jackpot expectation index is promoted (for example, when the back second light guide plate 3160 emits light, when the back second light guide plate 3160 stops emitting light, or in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660) When the circle is rotating, a display (“L2!” In FIG. 218A) indicating that the jackpot expectation degree has been promoted may be performed in an area other than the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 of the effect display device 1600.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may move various movable bodies when the jackpot expectation index is promoted, or may cause various lamps to emit light in a color corresponding to the jackpot expectation index after promotion, for example. Good. Further, when the jackpot expectation index is promoted, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may output predetermined sound effects corresponding to the jackpot expectation index from various speakers.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo-continuous pattern on the effect display device 1600 again. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in green, which is a color corresponding to L3, which is a jackpot expectation index after promotion at the start of pseudo-2, after the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped. .

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of pseudo 2 so that “L3” is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. The circle is rotated and “L3” is highlighted (displayed in a green star shape corresponding to L3).

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol in the reach state in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, after the reach design is stopped, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in gold, which is a color corresponding to L5 which is a jackpot expectation index after promotion during the development of barbell reach. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 before the start of the barbell reach, and highlights “L4” and “L5” in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 (“L4”). Is displayed in a red star shape corresponding to L4, and “L5” is displayed in a gold star shape corresponding to L5).

  Here, since the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, L4 having a lower jackpot expectation than L5 is also promoted (meaning that it has exceeded L4 for the player), and L4 is also highlighted. When it is determined that the jackpot expectation is promoted to L5, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a continues to display the index indicating the jackpot expectation until the barbell reach is started as shown in FIG. 218B. However, when it is determined that the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, after the highlight display of L5 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, a short time of about 2 seconds), the jackpot expectation index in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 The display of the index may be erased (for example, the display may be erased by an effect that the chain is popped on the area where the jackpot expectation index is displayed), and the dedicated effect may be executed.

  When the jackpot expectation index is promoted to “L5”, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a temporarily displays all the display by the effect display device 1600, light emission by various lamps, sound by various speakers, and operations of various movable bodies. May be stopped automatically. As a result, the player can be surprised and expect a big hit. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control 1510a causes the various lamps to emit light of the same color (for example, red), and then gives a predetermined pattern (for example, the sixth pattern 3162 of FIG. 141 or the third pattern of FIG. 143) to the back second light guide plate 3160. 3211 etc.) may be displayed.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts barbell reach in the effect display device 1600. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a display (“L5 promoted” in FIG. 218B) indicating the final promotion status of the jackpot expectation in an area other than the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 of the effect display apparatus 1600. Above, for example, it may be performed until the L5 target variation ends.

[18-5: Specific example 2 of L5 production]
Hereinafter, another example of the L5 effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 219A, 219B, and 219C. FIG. 219A, FIG. 219B, and FIG. 219C show that the variation pattern of the L5 target variation is a variation pattern in which barbell reach and pseudo duplex are executed, and the promotion pattern number 13 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an outline of the selected L5 effect. In addition, it is assumed that the fluctuations corresponding to the maintenance 1 fluctuation, the maintenance 2 fluctuation, and the maintenance 3 fluctuation are put on hold at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target fluctuation.

  In the L5 effect of the promotion pattern with the number 13, the jackpot expectation index remains L1 until immediately before the start of the 2nd change. Accordingly, at the start of the target 3 target change, “L1” is highlighted (displayed in a white star-shaped figure corresponding to L1) at a position in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. ing.

  It should be noted that at the timing when the jackpot expectation index is not promoted, such as at the start of change 3 of the promotion pattern, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a suggests to the player that the jackpot expectation index may be promoted. Alternatively, a promotion gaze effect that is an effect in which the jackpot expectation index is not promoted may be performed using the effect display device 1600 or the like.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a emits the back second light guide plate 3160 to green, which is a color corresponding to L3 that is a jackpot expectation index after promotion at the start of the maintenance 2 change, after the maintenance 3 change is completed. Let

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of the maintenance 2 variation so that “L3” is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660. The circle is rotated and “L3” is highlighted (displayed in a blue star-shaped figure corresponding to L3). The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, does not immediately rotate the circle so that L3 is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle, but L2 that is an intermediate stage between L1 and L3 is once on the circle. The circle may be rotated so as to be positioned in the 12 o'clock direction, and the circle may be immediately rotated so that L3 is positioned in the 12 o'clock direction on the circle.

  Note that, as described above, at the start of the change in the maintenance 2 change, the jackpot expectation index is promoted from “L1” to “L3” without going through “L2”. In such a case, as shown in FIG. 219A, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not need to highlight “L2”, which is a jackpot expectation index that has not been routed.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not highlight the jackpot expectation index that has not been routed, so that the player can recognize the process of promotion of the jackpot expectation index. In particular, for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation degree when the jackpot expectation index is promoted in order from L1 to L5 and the jackpot expectation degree when one or more jackpot expectation index is skipped and promoted to the jackpot expectation index L5 If there is, the player can estimate the degree of expectation for the big hit by recognizing the progress of the promotion of the expectation index, and thus can suppress the decrease in the game interest. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a clearly shows how the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 in the L5 effect.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts the maintenance 1 change. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not perform the promotion effect of the jackpot expectation degree index at the start of the maintenance 1 change. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a causes the back second light guide plate 3160 to emit light in gold corresponding to L5, which is the jackpot expectation index after the promotion of the L5 target fluctuation, after the maintenance 1 change is completed.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the light emission of the back second light guide plate 3160 at the start of the L5 target fluctuation, and highlights “L5” in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 (a golden star corresponding to L5 Display in the shape of the shape). In the example of FIG. 219B, since the big hit expectation index is promoted from “L3” to “L5” without passing through “L4” at the start of the L5 target fluctuation, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a “L4” in the index display area 1660 is not highlighted.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the pseudo-continuous symbol, which is a symbol indicating that re-variation in the pseudo-continuous effect starts, on the effect display device 1600 in the L5 target variation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts pseudo 1 in the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a again stops the pseudo continuous symbol, which is a symbol indicating that re-variation in the pseudo continuous effect starts, on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts pseudo 2 in the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a stops the decorative symbol in the reach state in the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts barbell reach in the effect display device 1600.

  In the L5 effect described with reference to FIGS. 219A, 219B, and 219C, the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the look-ahead effect for the L5 target change using the hold change, and the jackpot expectation is further promoted in the L5 target change. To achieve a series of effects. In addition, the L5 effect of the promotion patterns Nos. 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 10 in the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. A series of effects are realized in which the jackpot expectation is further promoted in the L5 target fluctuation pseudo-continuous effect. By realizing a series of these effects, the player can gradually get a sense of expectation for the big hit between a plurality of effects, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has a case where the jackpot expectation index is promoted in order from L1 to L5, a case where one or more jackpot expectation indices are skipped and promoted to the jackpot expectation index L5, and a case where the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 The display mode of the effect displayed on the screen (for example, the display effect “L5 promoted” displayed in FIGS. 218B and 219B) may be changed.

[18-6: Another example of L5 effect promotion pattern table]
The example in which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines all the promotion timings of the jackpot expectation level in the L5 effect at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target change using the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 has been described. The CPU may use the L5 effect promotion pattern table shown in FIG. 220 to sequentially draw a lottery promotion lottery at a predetermined timing.

  FIG. 220 is an explanatory diagram of another example of the L5 effect promotion pattern table. Differences from the L5 effect promotion pattern table of FIG. 217 will be described. The L5 effect promotion pattern table in FIG. 220 shows the correspondence between the promotion pattern indicating the promotion probability of the jackpot expectation index at the promotion timing of the jackpot expectation and the distribution of the promotion pattern.

  For example, when the number 1 promotion pattern is selected, L5 has a probability of 1/20 at the start of the maintenance 3 change, a probability of 1/10 at the start of the maintenance 2 change, and a probability of 1/20 at the start of the maintenance 1 change. The jackpot expectation index is promoted with a probability of 1/10 at the start of target change, 1/10 at the start of pseudo 1, 1/10 at the start of pseudo 2, and 1/10 at the time of development of Barbell Reach. To do.

  The promotion pattern of number 1 in FIG. 220 is difficult to win for the jackpot expectation index promotion at the time of the on-hold digestion, but is easy to win for the jackpot expectation index promotion in the L5 target fluctuation. The promotion pattern of number 2 in FIG. 220 is easy to win for the jackpot expectation index promotion at the time of the on-hold digestion, but is difficult to win the jackpot expectation index promotion for the L5 target fluctuation. The promotion pattern of No. 3 in FIG. 220 is easy to win the jackpot expectation index promotion during the pending digestion and the jackpot expectation index promotion in the L5 target fluctuation. The promotion pattern of number 4 in FIG. 220 is difficult to win the jackpot expectation index promotion at the time of pending digestion and the jackpot expectation index promotion in the L5 target fluctuation.

  In FIG. 220, only the promotion pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is not promoted at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target fluctuation is described, but the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery is also performed at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target fluctuation. There may be promoted patterns. In addition, as a pattern in which the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5, the first pattern that is promoted to L5 during the L5 target change, and is promoted to L5 after the winning corresponding to the L5 target change and before the start of the L5 target change. There is a second pattern and a third pattern that is promoted to L5 at the time of winning corresponding to the L5 target variation, but the appearance ratio is higher in the order of the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern. As described above, it is desirable that the promotion probability and the distribution in each promotion pattern of the L5 effect promotion pattern table are set. This is to keep the player's expectation for promotion of the jackpot expectation index for a long time.

  Moreover, the promotion probability and distribution in each promotion pattern of the L5 effect promotion pattern table may be set so that the appearance ratio increases in the order of the second pattern, the first pattern, and the third pattern. Even when the promotion probability and the distribution are set in this way, the player's expectation for promotion of the jackpot expectation index can be continued for a long time. That is, it is important that the promotion probability and the distribution are set so that the appearance ratio of the third pattern is the lowest.

  If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a wins the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery, the CPU may promote the jackpot expectation index in the effect display device 1600 by only one stage, or perform lottery for the number of stages to be promoted. The jackpot expectation index in the display device 1600 may be promoted by the number of stages.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may determine whether or not to finally promote the jackpot expectation index to L5 when determining the variation pattern of the L5 target variation. Specifically, for example, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects a variation pattern in which barbell reach is not performed, the CPU determines that the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5, and selects the variation pattern in which barbell reach is performed. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the jackpot expectation index is promoted to L5 at a predetermined rate.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the jackpot expectation index is not promoted to L5, and the jackpot expectation indicated by the promotion result of the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery is L5, the CPU is involved in the promotion result. The promotion effect of the jackpot expectation index is not executed. In addition, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines not to promote the jackpot expectation index to L5, the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery may not be executed after the jackpot expectation index reaches L4.

  Further, after the jackpot expectation index reaches L5, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may discard the winning result even if the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery is won, or may not execute the jackpot expectation index promotion lottery. desirable. As described above, when the jackpot expectation index reaches L5 before the start of the L5 target change, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the jackpot expectation index from the start of the L5 target change before the start of the L5 target change. You may perform the exclusive production in the case of being promoted to L5 from the time of L5 object change start.

[18-7: Specific example of L5 production end]
Hereinafter, an example of the end effect in the case where the big hit is not won in the L5 effect will be described with reference to FIG. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the L5 effect that does not win the jackpot based on the determination result notification command received in step S125, it indicates that, for example, the jackpot was not won at the end of the L5 target change. The display is performed on the effect display device 1600 (“Sorry ...” in FIG. 221).

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, so as to cover the entire jackpot expectation index display area 1660 at the end of the L5 target change, and then displays the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 in the initial state ( A state in which “L1” is displayed at a position in the twelve o'clock direction on the circle in the jackpot expectation index display area 1660 and only “L1” is highlighted is returned.

[19. Secret timer notice effect]
[19-1: Specific example 1 of secret timer notice effect]
Hereinafter, an example of the secret timer notice effect that is the specific effect of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223. FIG. 222 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the secret timer notice effect. FIG. 223 is an explanatory diagram showing a time table of secret timer notice effect.

  The secret timer notice effect is an effect with a high expectation of winning a big hit after the remaining time indicated by the timer displayed at the start of the secret timer notice effect (e.g., an effect indicating that a pseudo-ream starts, an effect in which the jackpot is confirmed, This is an effect that executes a display such as “chance!” Or a voice that raises the expectation of the big hit. Hereinafter, an example will be described in which pseudo 1 start notice effect (hereinafter also simply referred to as start notice effect) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the remaining time indicated by the timer has elapsed, and then pseudo 1 is executed. That is, an example will be described in which the effect having a high probability of winning a big hit is a pseudo-continuous effect.

  If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a refers to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU in step S601 and determines that the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the secret timer according to a predetermined distribution. Decide whether to perform the notice effect. Hereinafter, an example in which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines to execute the secret timer notice effect will be described.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a timer indicating the time until the start notice effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the change starts. In the example of FIGS. 222 and 223, the start notice effect is executed after 30 seconds from the start of change, and the pseudo 1 is started after 35 seconds from the start of change.

  For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display that counts down every time when the remaining time of the timer displayed on the effect display device 1600 elapses until 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a puts the timer in a non-display state in the effect display device 1600 when 4 seconds elapse from the start of fluctuation. From this point, the player counts the remaining time until the start notice effect with his own body clock.

  Although omitted in FIG. 222 for simplicity, as shown in the time table of FIG. 223, for example, another main notice effect such as a character effect may be executed in parallel with the secret timer notice effect. desirable.

  For example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays a predetermined character on the effect display device 1600 from the time when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, an image of the character walking on the effect display device 1600 on the effect display device 1600 when 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays, for example, an image on which the character jumps on the effect display device 1600 when 25 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation.

  Subsequently, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a again displays a timer indicating the remaining time of 3 seconds on the effect display device when 27 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change, and the character further moves from the depth direction of the effect display device 1600. An image that looks like the effect display device 1600 is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, for example, after redisplaying the timer on the effect display device 1600, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the remaining time of the timer displayed on the effect display device 1600 to 1 until 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation. Displays a countdown every second. That is, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a re-displays the timer for executing the countdown from the remaining 3 seconds on the effect display device 1600. In this case, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a redisplays the timer on the effect display device 1600, the CPU suddenly redisplays the timer (that is, without notice of redisplaying the timer). Surprise can be given to the player.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, hides the timer at the time when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (that is, when the remaining time of the timer is 0 seconds), and produces a display such as “pseudo continuous! A start notice effect to be displayed on the display device 1600 is executed, and when the character hits the effect display device 1600, an image that the effect display device 1600 appears to be broken is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, for example, at the point of 31 seconds from the start of fluctuation, the pseudo-continuous symbol (in FIG. 222, the left decorative symbol is “5”, the middle decorative symbol is “6”, and the right decorative symbol is “7”. ”) Is stopped on the effect display device 1600. Subsequently, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a starts, for example, pseudo 1 when 35 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation.

  For example, in a normal timer notice effect that keeps counting down the remaining time without hiding the timer, the player can always reliably grasp the remaining number of seconds, and thus it is difficult to feel the unexpectedness of the effect. Further, the player can infer the effect that occurs when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 seconds from the flow of other effects that are being executed while the timer notice effect is being executed. Since there is a possibility, it is difficult to feel the unexpectedness of the production (refer to the column “Time until 0 seconds remaining in FIG. 223”).

  On the other hand, in the secret timer notice effect, the timer is temporarily hidden. Therefore, in the secret timer notice effect, when the timer is once hidden (in the example of FIG. 223, after 4 seconds from the start of the fluctuation), the player counts the remaining time with his own body clock. There is a high possibility that the human body clock cannot accurately count seconds. For example, in the example of FIG. 223, when the remaining time of the non-displayed timer is 5 seconds, the remaining time in the player's body clock is 0 seconds. That is, the player's body clock is advanced faster than the actual elapsed time.

  In the example of FIG. 223, the main notice effect (character effect) is executed in parallel with the timer notice effect. The effect that is executed as the main notice effect when the player's own body clock is 0 seconds is an effect that the character jumps, that is, the player is 3 seconds before the jump effect is displayed. Is likely to have expected the timer to be redisplayed and count down. When there are a plurality of types of jump effects with different expectations, when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 seconds, the player performs a character effect with a slightly improved level of expectation (for example, a character jumps around an aura) There is a high probability that an aura jump effect will be displayed. When the big hit expectation degree of the pseudo-ream effect is higher than the big hit expectation degree of the aura jump effect, even if the aura jump effect appears, the player cannot raise the expectation for the big hit.

  However, in the example of FIG. 223, since the timer is not redisplayed when the remaining time in the player's body clock reaches 3 seconds, the player feels uncomfortable. Furthermore, when the remaining time on the player's internal clock is 0 seconds, a normal jump effect appears instead of the aura jump effect against the player's expectation, and the player feels more uncomfortable, Expectation improves at a stretch. Since the timer is always displayed in the normal timer notice effect, the player appears when the remaining time of the timer becomes 0 by the flow of the notice effect progressing in parallel with the timer notice effect. The production can be predicted to some extent. However, in the secret timer notice, the effect that appears when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0 is determined in advance, but the player's internal clock goes out of order, which is contrary to the player's expectation. Expectation can be improved.

  In addition, when the player's internal clock is progressing later than the actual elapsed time, the timer indicating “3 seconds remaining” even though the player feels that the remaining time of the timer is still sufficient. Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to feel the unexpectedness of the effect.

  In the secret timer notice effect, the time during which the timer is in the non-display state (22 seconds from the passage of 4 seconds to the passage of 26 seconds in FIG. 222) is the remaining time after the timer is again displayed (FIG. 222). Desirably longer than 3 seconds after 27 seconds at 222). The longer the timer is hidden, the greater the chance that the player's internal clock will be significantly different from the actual elapsed time, so that the player can feel the unexpectedness of the performance. Because it becomes.

  In other words, when another main notice effect (character effect in the example of FIG. 223) is executed when the timer is in a non-display state in the secret timer notice effect, the player determines the remaining time of his / her own body clock and the other time It is possible to obtain an uplifting feeling by estimating the effect when the remaining time of the timer becomes zero.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs output of effect sound by various speakers, operation of various movable bodies, light emission of various lamps, light guide of various light guide plates, and the like in the other main notice effect in the secret timer notice effect. It is desirable to execute it together. In this way, by performing various effects in the other main notice effects, the player's attention is directed to the other main notice effects, and the difference between the player's body clock and the actual elapsed time is large. This is because the player can feel the unexpectedness of the production.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the output of effect sound by various speakers, the operation of various movable bodies, the light emission of various lamps, the light guide of various light guide plates, etc. in the other main notice effect. An effect indicating that the secret timer notice effect is being executed while the timer is not displayed may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a displays on the effect display device 1600 a display such as “Timer advance notice operation” while the timer is not displayed. The effect is preferably not an effect indicating the remaining time of the timer. Thereby, even when the player is drawn attention to the other main notice effect, it can be remembered that the secret timer notice effect is being executed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a normal timer notice effect (a timer notice effect that keeps counting down without the timer being hidden) may be selectable. In this case, it is desirable that the big hit winning expectation degree in the secret timer notice effect is set higher than the big hit winning expectation degree in the normal timer notice effect. By doing so, the player can obtain a sense of exaltation at the branch point (when 27 seconds in FIG. 222 have elapsed) whether or not the timer is hidden. In addition, due to the high expectation of winning the jackpot for the secret timer notice effect, the player may feel uplifted due to the appearance of the secret timer notice effect, and the difference between the player's internal clock and the actual elapsed time may increase. This is because it becomes high, and as a result, the unexpectedness of the production can be felt.

  In order to prevent the player from feeling excessively uplifted when the secret timer notice effect appears, and to prevent the deviation between the player's internal clock and the actual elapsed time from becoming excessive, The selection ratio of the production may be set so that the ratio that the secret timer notice production appears is higher than the proportion that the production appears.

[19-2: Specific example 2 of secret timer notice effect]
224A and 224B are explanatory diagrams showing another example of the secret timer notice effect. Differences from FIG. 222 will be described. The secret timer of FIG. 224A and FIG. 224B is that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a prior notice effect that suggests that the timer is redisplayed a predetermined time before redisplaying the timer and starting the countdown again. The notice effect is different from the secret timer notice effect of FIG. It is desirable that the time for executing the advance notice effect is shorter than the countdown time after the timer redisplay (less than 3 seconds in the example of FIG. 224B).

  In the example of FIG. 224A, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a executes a prior notice effect in which the display “1) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for one second in a timer non-display state after 24 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change. To do. The prior notice effect may be an effect indicating a time count. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display the effect in the area where the timer is displayed in the effect display device 1600 in the prior notice effect, or the heartbeat sound from every other speaker every second. Or the sound which a second hand advances may be output.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may temporarily display the timer indicating the remaining time on the effect display device 1600 a predetermined number of times (for example, up to two times) during the timer non-display state period. Specifically, for example, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may display the timer again on the effect display device 1600 every 10 seconds after the timer is hidden.

  In the example of FIGS. 224A and 224B, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may redisplay a timer indicating the remaining time for one second, for example, 13 seconds and 23 seconds after the start of fluctuation. When the timer indicating the remaining time is temporarily displayed during the timer non-display state period, when the number of times of display can be selected from once or twice, one time is selected rather than two times. It is desirable that the ratio is set to be high. This is because the more the number of times the timer is temporarily displayed during the timer non-display state period, the more the player's internal clock will be out of order, and the more surprising the performance will be.

  If the player feels a great uplifting feeling due to the secret timer notice effect, there is a possibility that the difference between the player's internal clock and the actual elapsed time may become very large. The timer indicating the remaining time is temporarily displayed on the effect display device 1600, whereby the deviation is temporarily corrected.

  Note that the secret timer notice effect that temporarily displays the timer indicating the remaining time in the timer non-display state period is a secret timer that does not display any timer indicating the remaining time in the timer non-display state period on the effect display device 1600. It is desirable to select a smaller percentage than the notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, an example in which a timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the secret timer notice effect is shown. However, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may replace or add to the timer display, For example, sound indicating the remaining time may be output from various speakers.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may execute a secret timer notice effect using a prefetch effect. Assume that a secret timer notice effect is defined as a prefetch effect in the prefetch table.

  For example, when the suspension corresponding to the first variation having the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed wins, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects the secret timer notice effect at a predetermined rate with reference to the prefetch table. . When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a selects the secret timer notice effect as the prefetch effect, for example, the remaining notice time of the change being executed, the change time of the pending change, and the start notice in the secret timer notice effect of the first change The sum of the time until the effect is determined as the remaining time of the timer in the initial display of the secret timer notice effect, and a timer indicating the remaining time is displayed on the effect display device 1600. In addition, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, in the pre-reading stage (that is, after winning a prize corresponding to the first variation and before the first variation starts), before the timer is displayed, A display effect indicating that a preliminary announcement showing a low level of expectation or a low-expected announcement effect such as “A little more hot notice is available” may be executed.

  Other contents in the secret timer notice effect are the same as those in the secret timer notice effect shown in FIG. Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a may temporarily display a timer indicating the remaining time even at the start of a change in which the start notice effect in the secret timer notice effect is executed.

[20. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transparent frame-like front component member 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a is attached to the rear side so as to close the frame, and a plurality of front frame members are attached to the front surface Obstacles N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the panel plate 1110 of the transparent flat gaming panel 1100 having the gaming area 5a formed on the front surface is positioned on the upper right side with respect to the center of the gaming area 5a in front view. In the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the center of the gaming area 5 a and the opening 1112 are passed through the center of the opening 1112. The side in the direction in which the opening 1112 is eccentric with respect to a line orthogonal to the line connecting the center of the center is defined as a decorative pattern non-formation region 1102, and the opposite side is Since the decoration pattern 1150 that decorates the rear surface of the panel board 1110 is formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110 in the decoration pattern formation area 1101 as a decoration pattern formation area 1101, a panel that allows light to enter from the side surface of the panel board 1110. In a state where the panel decoration LED 1130a of the decorative board 1130 is not lit, the light from the light emitting decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1 or the effect display device 1600, the pachinko machine 1 installed in the game hall The appearance of the decoration pattern 1150 varies depending on the illumination light, light from other nearby pachinko machines, and the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is clearly different from conventional pachinko machines with a decorative sheet attached to the game panel. It is possible to show the player in the gaming area 5a of the impression (atmosphere), to attract the player's interest strongly, and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, The decoration of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  When the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is caused to emit light, the light incident from the side surface of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is reflected forward by the decoration pattern 1150, so that it can be seen through the transparent panel board 1110. Since the decoration pattern 1150 appears to shine and the rear surface of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated and decorated, the decoration pattern 1150 can be made conspicuous, the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, and the player's Interest can be attracted strongly and appeal to the player can be enhanced. Further, by decorating the decoration pattern 1150 with light emission, the appearance of the decoration pattern 1150 can be made different from that when the decoration pattern 1150 is not light emission decoration. Therefore, a gaming panel 1100 (panel) that could not be seen with a conventional pachinko machine. The decoration pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated so that the player may think that there is something good, such as the arrival of a chance. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed outside the normal light guide region 1103 and the radiation portion 1151 formed in the normal light guide region 1103 within a predetermined range from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 in the gaming panel 1100. A radiation unit 1151 and a radiation light guide unit 1152 that reflects light incident from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 forward and guides it to the radiation unit 1151 that is away from the normal light guide region 1103. Since the light is guided to the radiation part 1151 formed outside the normal light guide region 1103 by the radiation light guide part 1152 of the decoration pattern 1150, the radiation part 1151 far from the panel decoration LED 1130a can be used as a panel. Brightness similar to that of the radiating portion 1151 close to the decorative LED 1130a It is possible to emit light decoration, decorative pattern 1150 can be uniformly luminescent decorative whole, it is possible to improve the appearance of the light emitting decoration decorative pattern 1150.

  Further, since the light can be guided from the panel decoration LED 1130a to the radiation section 1151 at a far position by the radiation light guide unit 1152, the panel decoration LED 1130a is partially connected to the outer peripheral side surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Even if arranged, the decoration pattern 1150 can be illuminated and decorated uniformly. Accordingly, there is no need to dispose the panel decoration LED 1130a over the entire circumference of the panel plate 1110, and the panel decoration LED 1130a can be disposed at the upper left and lower left positions in front view where space can be easily secured. It is possible to prevent the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 from becoming small in order to secure the space for arranging the LEDs 1130a.

  Further, in the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the center and the opening of the gaming area 5a (panel plate 1110) pass through the center of the opening 1112 that is eccentrically penetrated to the upper right for mounting the center accessory 2500. The width of the panel plate 1110 is narrow on the side (upper right side) in the direction in which the opening 1112 is eccentric with respect to the line orthogonal to the line connecting the center of 1112, and the opposite side (lower left side) is the panel Since the width of the plate 1110 is wide, the wide side is used as a decorative pattern forming region 1101 and the narrow side is used as a decorative pattern non-forming region 1102, so that the wide decorative pattern forming region 1101 of the panel plate 1110 is used. Since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed on the surface, the decoration pattern 1150 becomes larger and the decoration pattern 1150 can be easily seen. 0 of decoration can be to entertain the player. Further, since the decoration pattern 1150 is not formed in the narrow decoration pattern non-formation area 1102 of the panel board 1110, the appearance in the game area 5a is not good even if the decoration pattern 1150 is not formed in the area. In other words, it is possible to avoid wasting the decorative pattern 1150 in a narrow and difficult-to-see region, and to reduce the effort for forming the decorative pattern 1150.

  Further, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed on a part of the rear surface (decoration pattern forming region 1101) of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed on the entire rear surface of the panel board 1110. Compared with the case where it makes, the effort concerning formation of the decoration pattern 1150 can be reduced, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a predetermined radius in front view centering on the specific obstacle nail N1 that affects the game content among the plurality of obstacle nails N is set as a decoration prohibited area 1104, and the decoration prohibited area 1104 is avoided. Thus, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed. As a result, the countless gaming balls B abut on the specific obstacle nail N1, and the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or tilted, so that it is impossible to provide a preset flow of the game ball B. In order to prevent this, when the specific obstacle nail N1 is struck and adjusted to a preset state, the decoration pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1 (decoration prohibited area 1104). The current distortion state of N1 can be easily seen, and the maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1 can be facilitated. Further, since the decorative pattern 1150 is not formed around the specific obstacle nail N1, even if the specific failure nail N1 is hit during maintenance, the impact transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the panel plate 1110 is not affected. It will be attenuated to some extent by the time it reaches the decorative pattern 1150 near the nail N1, and even if stress is concentrated, the force is weakened and the panel board 1110 is cracked or cracked. However, it is possible to facilitate maintenance of the specific obstacle nail N1.

  Further, since the decoration prohibited area 1104 is provided, it is possible to clarify the part of the panel board 1110 where the decoration pattern 1150 can be formed. It is possible to avoid moving away from the player, and it is possible to easily form a variety of decoration patterns 1150 and to form a decoration pattern 1150 having a high decorativeness, thereby further increasing the appeal to the player. be able to.

  In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed by avoiding the specific obstacle nail N1 by the decoration prohibited area 1104, the decoration pattern 1150 and the pattern behind the part where the obstacle nail N except the specific obstacle nail N1 is implanted Since there are also overlapping objects, the obstacle nail N that is planted so as to overlap the decoration pattern 1150 is irradiated with light by the decoration pattern 1150 that is decorated with light emission, and the obstacle nail N is irradiated with the obstacle nail N. The tip of the nail N can be shined, and the player can enjoy the light-emitting effects that could not be seen with conventional pachinko machines, such as the obstacle nail N and the tip shining.

  In addition, when the decoration pattern 1150 is illuminated with the panel decoration LED 1130a, the portion between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the front component member 1000 that is outside the game area 5a is also caused to emit light by the light of the illumination decoration. it can. Since the portion between the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the front component member 1000 can be light-decorated by the light-emitting decoration of the decoration pattern 1150, the function display unit 1400 and the certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 attached to the portion are attached. Since it is possible to irradiate the pasted certificate paper with light from the rear, the function display unit 1400 and the certificate paper can be decorated with light emission, and the function display that did not emit light with the conventional pachinko machine The unit 1400 and the certificate are decorated with a light-emitting decoration, which can have a strong impact on the player, and the fact that they are decorated with a light-emitting decoration strongly suggests that there may be something good for the player. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the decoration pattern 1150 that is always visible has a portion along the outer edge that faces the inside of the front front decoration board 3603 in the front front effect unit 3600 disposed behind the game panel 1100. The portion of the decorative pattern 1150 can make it difficult to recognize the outer edge of the front front decorative substrate 3603 when viewed through the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 has a portion along the outer edge of the front decorative substrate 3603, the decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 and the shape (decoration) of the front decorative substrate 3603 are similar. Therefore, the front decorative board 3603 and the decorative pattern 1150 can show a decoration with a sense of unity, can show a decoration with a sense of depth, and improve the appearance of the game area 5a in a front view. be able to.

  Furthermore, in a state where the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a are not emitting light, the front light guide plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back first light guide plate 3210 are transparent. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the front light guide plate 2610, the back second light guide plate 3160, and the back first light guide plate 3210 can be viewed from the front, and the panel plate of the game panel 1100 A decorative pattern 1150 formed on 1110 can be visually recognized. In this state, when any of the light guide plate LED 2612a, the light guide plate LED 3172a, and the light guide plate LED 3221a and the panel decoration LED 1130a emit light, the second pattern 2622 of the front light guide plate 2610 and the second second light guide plate 3160 Since the player can show a light emitting decoration in which the decoration of the six patterns 3162 and the third pattern 3211 of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the decoration pattern 1150 are integrated, it has a strong impact on the player. And can attract the player's interest, and can make the player think that there is something good. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a so as to be visible through the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in front view, and more than the effect display device 1600. A transparent back first light guide plate 3210 and a back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged in front, and the transparent first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 extend from the outside to the inside position. A back middle decorative lens 3202 and a back rear decorative lens 3152 are arranged. The light guide plate LED 3171a of the fifth pattern substrate 3171, the light guide plate LED 3172a of the sixth pattern substrate 3172, the light guide plate LED 3221a of the third pattern substrate 3221, and the light guide plate LED 3222a of the fourth pattern substrate 3222. In the state where no light is emitted, the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are in a transparent state, and the rear effect display device 1600 is passed through the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160. The effect image displayed on the screen can be visually recognized, the displayed effect image can be enjoyed, and the back center decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are difficult to see.

  In this state, when the light guide plate LED 3172a or the light guide plate LED 3221a and the LED 3203a, the LED 3221b, the LED 3222b, the LED 3153a, the LED 3171b, and the LED 3172b are caused to emit light, the front of the effect display device 1600 at the center in the front view game area 5a. The third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 as the specific pattern on which the specific object (broken glass) is drawn is displayed in a light-emitting manner, and the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 is surrounded by the third pattern. The unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 having the same shape as the object of the 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are illuminated and decorated, and the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 emit light. Display and unit base 3151, rear decoration len The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see due to the light emission decoration of the 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202, and the light emission decoration is performed with the third image 3211 or the sixth image 3162 that is light-emitting displayed. The unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 will be noticeable.

  That is, the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 by the back first light guide plate 3210 or the back second light guide plate 3160 and the light emission of the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202. When the lighting effect by decoration is executed, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 becomes difficult to see. Instead, the third picture 3211 or the sixth picture 3162, the unit base 3151, the back decorative lens 3152, Since the unit base 3201 and the back inner decorative lens 3202 are conspicuous, it has a strong impact on the player and can be thought of as something good for the player. Can be increased. At this time, the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are separated from the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 in the front-rear direction. And the sixth pattern 3162, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 overlap in the front-rear direction so that the overlapping part protrudes forward. Alternatively, it can be seen as if it is retracted rearward, and a stereoscopic image with perspective can be displayed by light emission, so that the player can be wondered and the back first light guide plate 3210 or the back Second light guide plate 3160, unit base 3151, back decorative lens 3152, unit base 3201, back inner decoration And the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160, the unit base 3151, the back rear decorative lens 3152, the unit base 3201, and the back middle decorative lens 3202. It is possible to entertain the player with the light-emitting effect, and to suppress the lowering of interest in the player's game.

  In addition, a transparent unit base 3151, a back rear decorative lens 3152, a unit base 3201, and a back inner decorative lens 3202 formed in the same shape as the specific target portion drawn as the third picture 3211 and the sixth picture 3162 are provided. The third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 are provided before and after the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 on which light emission is displayed, and at least three members having different positions in the front and rear direction are provided. Therefore, it is possible to further emphasize the perspective when each light is emitted, and to surely exhibit the above-described operational effects.

  Further, the inner end faces of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are inclined, and the LED 3203a, LED 3221b, LED 3222b, LED 3153a, LED 3171b, and LED 3172b are replaced with the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the rear rear decorative lens. Light is irradiated to the inside of the back middle decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 in a direction parallel to the surfaces of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 toward the inner end face of the 3152. Therefore, the light irradiated to the inside of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 is reflected forward and radiated forward on the inner end face (the outer peripheral edge facing the inner side). It faces the inside of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 The periphery can be illuminated in a band shape, making it easier for the player to recognize the shapes of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152, and the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152. And the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern of the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are enhanced by emphasizing the outer peripheral shapes of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152. It is possible to easily recognize that the position of the front and rear decorative lenses 3202 and 3152 is different between the front and rear decorative lenses 3202 and 3152, and it is possible to perform a three-dimensional pattern light emission effect with a sense of perspective. .

  In addition, the inner end faces (outer peripheral edges facing inward) of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. As described above, the back inner decorative lens 3202 is provided. Since the reflection direction (or refraction direction) is different from the flat front surface at the outer peripheral edge of the back decorative lens 3152, the illumination light in the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed and other pachinko machines Depending on the state of light irradiated from the front, such as light from the inside, into the game area 5a, the front surface of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back rear decorative lens 3152 appears to be transparent, whereas the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the back inner decorative lens 3202 The outer peripheral edge of the rear decorative lens 3152 appears to shine or appear translucent, and the shape and presence of the back inner decorative lens 3202 and the rear rear decorative lens 3152 are determined for the player. The can be easier to recognize, it is possible to enhance the decorative effect in the game area 5a by back in decorative lens 3202 and back after decoration lens 3152.

  In addition, after the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back second light guide plate 3160 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction, the objects as the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 drawn in the respective directions are time-series. Therefore, the back first light guide plate 3210 and the back first light guide plate 3210 are arranged in the time series order of the objects drawn as the third picture 3211 and the sixth picture 3162 or in the reverse order of the time series. If each of the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 of the two light guide plates 3160 is sequentially lit and displayed, it is possible to show the player a moving luminescence effect, which makes it difficult for the player to get bored. Can be entertained, and can have a strong impact on the player and make it seem that there is something good for the player. The decrease in the flavor can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying the effect image that is matched with the third pattern 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162 that are emitted and displayed, the third pattern 3211, the sixth pattern 3162, and the back side are displayed. Collaboration effect by the decorative lens 3202 or the back decorative lens 3152 and the effect image (for example, the effect that the glass is broken by the light emission display of the third pattern 3211 or the sixth pattern 3162 by the character displayed as the effect image, The effect that the character of the effect image appears due to the broken glass by the light emission display of the three patterns 3211 and the sixth pattern 3162, etc. can be performed, and it is difficult to get tired of the player by various effects. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transparent game panel that defines the rear end of the game area 5a when the back rear movable decorative body 3120 in the back rear effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is in the standby position. Through 1100 (panel board 1110), an effect display device 1600 that displays an effect image in the center of the game area 5a in front view is located, and the effect display device 1600 has an upper portion in front of the effect display device 1600. The rear rear movable decorative body 3120 of the large rear rear effect unit 3100 extending so as to straddle the display screen in the left-right direction is located. In this state, the lock member 3141 is in the locked position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the left slider 3122 of the back movable decorative body 3120 is in contact with the restriction portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 from above, and the restriction portion The movement of the back movable decorative body 3120 to the lower side than 3141c is restricted. Further, the lock member 3141 is urged from the release position side to the lock position side by the lock spring 3143 via the transmission slider 3142, and the stopper 3141 e comes into contact with the rotation restricting member 3144 to move from the lock position to the release position. The rotation to the opposite side is restricted.

  Then, the lock member 3141 is moved to the lock position by the downward movement of the slide guide 3134 by the drive of the back back drive motor 3135 of the back back movable mechanism 3130 according to the game state that is changed by playing the game in the game area 5a. If the restricting portion 3141c is moved to a position where it does not come into contact with the lock protrusion 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120, the effect display device is caused by gravity acting on the back rear movable decorative body 3120. It drops (moves) to the lower moving end (downward position) so as to cut through the front of 1600. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward after the back movable ornament 3120 is dropped, the lock member 3141 is rotated from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. Thereafter, when the back movable movable decorative body 3120 is moved upward by the slide guide 3134 of the back movable movable mechanism 3130, the lock protrusion 3122a of the back rear movable decorative body 3120 comes into contact with the guide portion 3141d of the lock member 3141, thereby locking. The member 3141 rotates to the release position side, and the back rear movable decorative body 3120 can move upward to a position beyond the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141. Then, when the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable ornament 3120 moves above the lock member 3141, the lock member 3141 is rotated to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143, and the back movable ornament 3120 is viewed from the front. It will return to the state located in the upper part in the game area | region 5a.

  Thus, when the lock member 3141 is moved from the lock position to the release position by the transmission slider 3142 of the back-back movable mechanism 3130 according to the gaming state, a large back-back movable decorative body that straddles the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction. 3120 falls (moves) so as to cut the front side of the effect display device 1600, so that the back movable decorative body 3120 blocks the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, thereby allowing the player to The movement of the back movable ornament 3120 can be noticed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back movable ornament 3120. In addition, when the large back-back movable decoration body 3120 falls, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the back-back movable decoration body 3120. It is possible to make the player strongly think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is generated, and to increase a sense of expectation for the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, the back-side movable decorative body 3120 is sized so as to straddle the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction, and both ends in the left-right direction are movably attached by the slide shafts 3132. Tends to be inclined with respect to the left-right direction (horizontal). On the other hand, when unlocking the back rear movable decorative body 3120 by the lock member 3141, the restricting portion 3141c of the lock member 3141 is opposite to the downward direction in which the back rear movable decorative body 3120 is about to move. The lock member 3141 is rotated so as to move upward, so that the lock protrusion 3122a of the rear rear movable decorative body 3120 is difficult to be removed from the restricting portion 3141c. Thereby, even if the back movable ornament 3120 tilts, the lock protrusion 3122a does not come off from the restricting portion 3141c, and the back movable ornament 3120 can be prevented from falling down on its own. Therefore, since the back movable ornament 3120 can be prevented from falling without permission, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful due to the back falling movable ornament 3120 being arbitrarily dropped. Can be released at a desired timing according to the game state and the back movable ornament 3120 can be dropped, and the effect of the movable effect using the back movable ornament 3120 can be surely exhibited. be able to.

  In addition, since the effect display device 1600 is provided, by displaying the effect image on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to entertain the player even with the effect image, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Can do. Further, the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image displays the effect image adapted to the movement of the back movable decorative body 3120, whereby a collaboration effect (for example, the effect image of the back movable ornament 3120 and the effect image) is displayed. , An effect in which the back movable ornament 3120 is moved by the character displayed as the effect image, an effect in which the character is moved by moving the back movable ornament 3120, etc.) It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by various effects and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Also, as described above, when unlocking the back movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 is rotated so that the restricting portion 3141c moves upward, so that the effect display device 1600 is displayed. Even if the weight of the back back movable decorative body 3120 increases, the lock protrusion 3122a of the back back movable decorative body 3120 is disengaged from the restricting portion 3141c. Since it can be made difficult, the back movable ornament 3120 can be sufficiently locked by the single lock member 3141. Since only one lock member 3141 is provided, it is not necessary to secure a space for providing them as compared to the case where a plurality of lock members 3141 are provided, and the lock member 3141 is provided. Can be made as small as possible, and the rear movable decorative body 3120 can be made relatively large and conspicuous.

  Furthermore, since the lock member 3141 is attached in the vicinity of the upward movement end of the back movable decorative body 3120, the lock member 3141 moves from the restricting portion 3141c (standby position) to the downward movement end (downward position). The distance can be made as long as possible. Therefore, by allowing the back movable ornament 3120 to fall a long distance, the player's interest can be easily attracted to the back movable ornament 3120 and a strong impact can be given to the player. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the lock member 3141 is attached in the vicinity of the upward moving end of the back movable decorative body 3120, a certain distance (space) is formed between the locking member 3141 (the restricting portion 3141c) and the upward moving end. Therefore, when the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position by the back movable mechanism 3130, it is possible to secure a space in which the restricting portion 3141c can move upward. The member 3141 can be reliably rotated to the release position, and the movement of the back and rear movable decorative body 3120 can be locked or unlocked by the lock member 3141.

  Further, since the lock member 3141 is provided with a guide portion 3141d extending obliquely, when the back movable ornament 3120 is moved upward and returned to the original position, it is locked by the back rear movable mechanism 3130. Even if the member 3141 is not rotated to the release position side, the lock protrusion 3122a comes into contact with the guide portion 3141d as the back movable decorative body 3120 moves, so that the lock member 3141 is automatically rotated to the release position side. Can be moved. Therefore, when the back movable movable body 3120 is returned to the original state, it is not necessary to control the back back drive motor 3135 of the back back movable mechanism 3130, and the load on the production control can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained due to instability of the production control and deteriorating the interest.

  Further, since the rotation of the stopper 3141e of the lock member 3141 to the rotation restricting member 3144 restricts the rotation from the lock position to the opposite side to the release position, the lock member 3141 contacts the restricting portion 3141c at the lock position. Even if a force acts downward from the lock protrusion 3122a side of the back movable movable body 3120, the lock member 3141 rotates to the side opposite to the release position, and the lock protrusion 3122a of the back movable decorative body 3120 Can be prevented from coming off from the restricting portion 3141c, and the back movable decorative body 3120 can be surely prevented from dropping without permission.

  Further, the rear back drive motor 3135 of the back back movable mechanism 3130 is driven to move the slide guide 3134 downward, and the lock member 3141 is rotated from the lock position to the release position via the transmission slider 3142, and then back back movable. When the slide guide 3134 is moved upward by the back rear drive motor 3135 to return the decorative body 3120 to the original state, the lock member 3141 automatically rotates from the release position to the lock position by the urging force of the lock spring 3143. Therefore, after releasing the back movable decorative body 3120 by releasing the back back movable mechanism 3130 and returning the lock member 3141 to the lock position by the back back movable mechanism 3130, the lock spring 3143 returns the lock member 3141 to the lock position. be able to. Accordingly, it is not necessary to drive (control) the back rear drive motor 3135 of the back back movable mechanism 3130 only to return the lock member 3141 to the lock position (original state), so that it is possible to reduce the load on the presentation control. It is possible to prevent the player from being entertained due to the instability of the production control due to overload, and the entertainment to be lowered.

  Further, since the back movable decorative body 3120 is moved (dropped) downward by gravity acting constantly, it is necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the back rear movable decorative body 3120 downward. In addition, the configuration related to the movement of the back movable ornament 3120 can be simplified, the configuration related to the movement can be made compact, and the back movable movable ornament 3120 can be reduced by the amount of the compact space. It is possible to increase the size, and the back movable decorative body 3120 can be made conspicuous to attract the player's interest strongly, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the back-back movable mechanism 3130 for moving the back-back movable decoration body 3120 upward is provided, the back-back movable decoration body 3120 is dropped by the lock member 3141 and the back-back movable mechanism 3130. It becomes possible to stop. That is, since the lock member 3141 and the slide guide 3134 of the back movable mechanism 3130 can be double-locked, there is a problem that the back back movable decorative body 3120 falls to the lower moving end without permission. It can prevent, and there can exist an effect similar to the above-mentioned.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game ball B is received into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of FIG. 107 as a result of lottery based on the start condition being satisfied. When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottery is won, the player can be given a profit. The display device 1600 shown in FIG. 168 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 168, a peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 168 as an effect pattern setting means and an image display control means.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means can set an effect pattern related to the lottery from a plurality of patterns based on the result of the lottery. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a plurality of types of effects based on various commands (a command corresponding to the first special lottery result or a command corresponding to the second special lottery result) from the main control board 1310. When one of the patterns is set (determined), various schedule data corresponding to the set (determined) pattern is set (determined) from a plurality of types of schedule data.

  The effect display device 1600 as the display device can display an effect image corresponding to the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Peripheral data ROM 1520a as image information storage means stores image data such as background images, character images, and design images for rendering various effect images on effect display device 1600 as image information constituting effect images. It is something that can be done.

  Peripheral control IC 1510a as an image display control means generates drawing data of an image to be drawn on effect display device 1600 as an effect image from image information stored in peripheral data ROM 1520a, and displays the effect image on effect display device 1600. It is something that can be done.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player can be made to recognize the degree of expectation of winning according to the aspect of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the effect progression process. Specifically, the decorative pattern based on the hold display is changed by changing the display mode of the hold display after the hold display before digestion is executed as the hold display until the execution of the hold display after digestion ends. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot for the change display (variable display of special symbols).

  When the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means performs the hold change suggesting effect accompanied by the gray scale effect as the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect corresponding to the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means. As the image, a special effect image subjected to a specific process different from the normal process can be generated and displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a normal effect image not subjected to the specific process It is possible to make it difficult to identify the mode. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a displays all the images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the hold change suggesting effect with the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). By converting all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the reserved change suggestion effect without the gray scale effect to gray scale, FIG. r) to a special effect image used for the suggestion of reserved change accompanying the gray scale effect shown in FIG. 195 (u), and the hold change without the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f). It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between the normal effect image used for the suggestion effect.

  While the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means progresses, the special effect image is generated and displayed on the effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means. By generating a period in which a grayscale effect is performed as a specific period to be performed (for example, a frame for one screen for a predetermined frame), an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 for this specific period It is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the winning expectation level through this, and after the end of the specific period, the winning expectation level is identified to the player through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It can be made easy. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a displays all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the hold change suggestion effect accompanied with the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). All images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the reserved change suggestion effect without the gray scale effect are converted to gray scales, and are displayed on hold. It is difficult to determine how many colors have changed from what color to what color (holding change). Thereby, in the gray scale effect, by concealing the suggestion of the expected value due to the hold display, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the expected value (expected expectation level). Then, when the peripheral control IC 1510a progresses to the effect that develops to the super reach shown in FIG. 196 (g), the display area of the effect display device 1600 displays the full color image from the image that is entirely converted to grayscale. The background image 1645, the left decorative design 1650a of the full color image, the middle decorative design 1650b of the full color image, the right decorative design 1650c of the full color image, and the first reserved display 1655a having the white color of the full color image are switched to the original full color image. The fourth hold display determined as the final color of the hold display in the case where the hold change suggesting effect shown in FIG. 194 (b) is performed from the color changed from white to the light emitting decoration of the decoration body 3511. Switch to 1655d red to return to the original color. Thereby, after the end of the gray scale effect, the expected value (expected expectation level) can be easily identified by the player by suggesting the expected value by the hold display.

  In this way, while the effect of the pattern set by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the effect pattern setting means proceeds, a special effect image is generated by the peripheral control IC 1510a as the image display control means and displayed on the effect display device 1600. By generating a specific period in which the game is continuously performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the winning expectation level through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the specific period. In addition, it is possible to make it easy for the player to identify the hit expectation degree through the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the end of the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by executing a new effect with simple control.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can adjust the volume by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during the game effect period in which the symbol variation and the big hit game are executed. When an operation effect using the rotation operation unit 302 and a drive effect using the rotation operation unit 302 are performed during the effect period, the volume change prohibition flag is set over a period longer than the period in which these effects are executed. Is turned on, and even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the volume is not adjusted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the volume adjustment not intended by the player from being performed by the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can adjust the volume by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 during the game effect period in which the symbol variation and the big hit game are executed. When an operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is performed during the effect period, the volume change prohibition flag is turned on for at least the period during which the operation effect using the pressing operation unit 303 is executed, and the player However, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the sound volume is not adjusted. According to this, when operating the press operation unit 303 for an operation effect using the press operation unit 303, the player does not intend to erroneously operate the rotary operation unit 302 located in the vicinity of the press operation unit 303. It is possible to prevent the volume from being adjusted, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interest.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the volume is adjusted by operating the rotation operation unit 302, a volume adjustment bar indicating the volume after the adjustment is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 1600, When a predetermined period has passed since the last adjustment was received, the volume adjustment bar is deleted, and the rotation operation unit 302 is operated during the game effect period in which the symbol variation or the big hit game is being executed. When the volume change prohibition flag that restricts (prohibits) the volume adjustment is turned on, the volume adjustment bar displayed when the volume change prohibition flag is turned on Even after the change prohibition flag is turned on, it is continuously displayed. According to this, even when the volume change prohibition flag is turned on while the rotation operation unit 302 is being operated during the game effect period, it is determined at what volume the adjustment is restricted. As can be seen, it is possible to continue displaying the volume adjustment bar even after the volume change prohibition flag is turned on, causing discomfort due to suddenly limited volume adjustment. Can be reduced, and the decline in the entertainment interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in the example of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal start port 2010 is on the path through which the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 in the game area 5a passes, and the large on the path. It is arranged at a position preceding the winning prize opening 2005. In other words, a part of the game ball B launched toward the big winning opening 2005 is configured to win the usual start opening 2010. As a result, even when the player performs a right strike at a short firing interval during the big hit game, it is possible to suppress the winnings exceeding the prescribed number in one opening of the big winning opening 2005. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the game ball B wins the normal start port 2010, a smaller number of game balls are paid out than when the game ball B wins the big winning port 2005. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of game balls paid out in one round of the big hit game is excessive. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player without imposing an excessive burden on the hall.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a specific effect (L5 effect), the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the look-ahead effect for the L5 target variation using the hold variation, and the jackpot expectation level is determined in the L5 target variation. A series of effects will be realized. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the specific effect (L5 effect), the jackpot expectation index is promoted in the pre-reading effect on the L5 target change using the hold change, and in the pseudo-continuous effect of the L5 target change Realize a series of performances that further increase the expectation of the jackpot. By realizing a series of these effects, the player can gradually get a sense of expectation for the big hit between a plurality of effects, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a specific effect (secret timer notice effect), an effect (timer) having a high degree of expectation different from the main notice effect is temporarily hidden on the effect display device 1600, and then sufficient After a long time, the effect having a high expectation is redisplayed on the effect display device 1600. Thereby, the player can feel the unexpectedness of the production, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, when an effect with a high degree of expectation different from the main notice effect is a timer notice effect, the timer is temporarily hidden on the effect display device 1600 and then redisplayed, so that the player's internal clock and the actual time are displayed. Since a deviation from the elapsed time occurs, the player can particularly feel the unexpectedness of the production.

[21. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the decoration pattern 1150 is configured by a plurality of linearly recessed grooves. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the decoration pattern 1150 is recessed in a dot shape. It is good also as what is comprised by the some protrusion which was comprised by several groove | channels, the thing which was comprised by several protrusions swelled linearly, the some protrusion swelled in dot shape, etc.

  In the above-described embodiment, a crack pattern is shown as the pattern (pattern) of the decoration pattern 1150. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern of the decoration pattern 1150 can be a wave pattern or a geometric pattern. , Check pattern, checkerboard pattern, scale pattern, pattern imitating the character according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, pattern imitating the item according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1, logo imitating the concept of the pachinko machine 1 A pattern that mimics the background in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment described above, only the decoration pattern 1150 is formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel board 1110 (game panel 1100). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The decoration pattern 1150 may be formed in 1101 and a decoration sheet with decoration applied to the decoration pattern non-formation area 1102 may be pasted. Or a part of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to cover the decoration pattern 1150 from the rear side after the decoration pattern 1150 is formed in the decoration pattern formation region 1101. Alternatively, a decorative sheet with decoration may be pasted on the entire surface.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a movable decorative body on which a force to be constantly moved to one side in the moving direction is applied, a force to be constantly moved to the lower side by gravity is applied. Although the rear movable decorative body 3120 is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and is attached so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and always tries to move to one side in the moving direction by the urging force of the elastic member. It may be a movable decorative body on which a force is applied, or it is attached so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a movable decorative body on which a force to constantly move upward is applied by an urging force of an elastic member. Also good.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the peripheral control IC 1510a performs the hold change suggesting effect, the final color of the circular hold display with decoration is determined, and the color of the hold display is changed from the initial color to the final color. The main control board 1310 has started to produce an effect that changes so that the expected value increases as the digestion by the main control board 1310 progresses. In addition to combining the hold display, an effect of changing the color of the hold display from the initial color to the final color so as to increase the expected value as the main control board 1310 proceeds to hold the hold display may proceed. By doing this, it is possible to hide the suggestion of the expected value due to the hold display in the gray scale effect.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the color changing time and the changing color by lottery as a mode (holding change pattern) in which the color of the hold display changes from the initial color toward the final color. It is possible to perform various commands to be transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a by determining by lottery on the main control board 1310 side or by extracting from a predetermined table on the main control board 1310 side. It may be included.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a ends the process of converting all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to grayscale by the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a when the grayscale effect ends. Thus, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a full-color image background image 1645, a full-color image left decoration pattern 1650a, a full-color image medium decoration pattern 1650b, a full-color image, from an image that is entirely converted to grayscale. The right decorative design 1650c and the first hold display 1655a having the full-color image white are switched to the original full-color image at once (switched). In this way, it is not configured to return (switch) from an image converted to grayscale to a full color image at once, but it is configured to gradually release the grayscale image and gradually return (switch) to the full color image. Also good. At this time, among the images converted to grayscale, the background image 1645, the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c are gradually released to return (switch) to the full color image. The hold display 1655a may be gradually released to return (switch) to a full color image.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the hold change suggesting effect accompanied with the gray scale effect, it is difficult to determine what color the hold display color has changed from what color (hold change). However, the present invention is not limited to such a pending change, but the expected value (expectation) can be obtained using the gray scale setting mode in one frame of screen data defining the screen described above. You may make it conceal the production regarding the degree. For example, in the case where the gray scale effect is not performed, when the expected value (expected degree) can be suggested using the button color by the effect instructing the button operation on the screen, the effect instructing the button operation is gray. By setting the scale effect, it can be difficult to determine whether the button is a red button or a blue button.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment described above, the configuration relating to the suggestion of the expected value (expected degree) is concealed using the gray scale setting mode in the screen data of one frame defining the screen described above. Not only such a gray scale setting mode but also other setting modes may be used to conceal the effects related to the suggestion of the expected value (expected degree). For example, it may be difficult to determine whether the display is a red hold display or a blue hold display using the mosaic setting mode described above.

  Moreover, in this embodiment mentioned above, it was comprised so that the production | presentation regarding the suggestion of an expected value (expectation degree) might be concealed using the gray scale setting mode in the screen data of 1 frame which prescribes | regulates the screen mentioned above. Not only the grayscale setting mode but also other setting modes are used to conceal the effects related to the suggestion of the expected value (expected degree), the expected value (expected degree) that becomes a big hit is different for each setting mode. You may do it. For example, the expected value (expectation) that is a big hit for the effect set in the mosaic setting mode described above as another setting mode is compared with the expected value (expectation) that is a big hit for the effect set in the grayscale setting mode. Can be set high.

  Further, in the present embodiment described above, in the hold change suggesting effect accompanied with the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u), all images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are gray. Although all the images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the reserved change suggestion effect without the scale effect are converted to the gray scale, the gray scale effect is obtained. As for the background image 1645, the left decorative symbol 1650a, the middle decorative symbol 1650b, and the right decorative symbol 1650c, the one-frame screen data defining the above-described screen is used to produce a full color image without using the gray scale setting mode. In the 1-frame screen data that defines the screen described above for the hold display It may be recommended a performance by the gray scale image by using the grayscale setting mode. Thereby, a gray scale effect can be performed with respect to a partial area of the display area of the effect display device 1600, which is an area to be held and displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, one effect display device 1600 is provided on the game board 5 as an effect display device. However, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided on the game board 5, in addition to the game board 5. A plurality of effect display devices may be provided in the vicinity of the pressing operation portion 303 of the door frame 3 or the door frame right side decorative body 419 shown in FIG. In this case, for example, when performing the hold display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the display of the effect display device 1600 in the hold change suggestion effect with the gray scale effect shown in FIGS. 194 (r) to 195 (u). As all the images to be displayed in the area, all the images to be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIGS. 194 (c) to 195 (f) in the reserved change suggestion effect without the gray scale effect are grayscale. On the other hand, with respect to other effect display devices that do not perform such hold display, an effect with a full color image is recommended without a gray scale effect.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the color of the hold display is changed, the sound effect corresponding to the color of the hold display is displayed on various speakers (for example, the vibration speaker 354 provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4, the top). The central speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, etc.) may flow, but the same sound effect may flow when changing the color of the hold display. . In this way, in grayscale production, it can be difficult to determine from what color the hold display color has changed due to the sound effect, so the grayscale production has ended and developed into super reach. When the hold display hidden by the gray scale effect is switched to the final color of the hold display in the effect to be performed, the expected value is released, so that a more innovative effect can be provided to the player.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the color of the hold display is changed, as the sound effect corresponding to the color of the hold display, for example, when the color of the hold display is white, the sound effect flows as “pico”. If the color of the hold display is blue, the sound effect will flow “Piece”, if the color of the hold display is yellow, the sound effect will flow “Pe, Pico” and the color of the hold display will be red In this case, the sound effect flows as “pico-pico”, but when changing the color of the hold display, a sound effect that is difficult to distinguish may be played. For example, in addition to the reference time (1 second) as the time for playing the sound effect “pi”, the hold display color is increased or decreased from white to red in units of 0.2 seconds. Alternatively, the number of repetitions of the sound effect “pi” may be increased or shortened from white to red, or the sound effect may be reduced as the sound effect corresponding to the color of the hold display. The time for playing “pi” may be combined with the number of times the sound effect “pi” is repeated. In this way, in grayscale production, it can be difficult to determine from what color the hold display color has changed due to the sound effect, so the grayscale production has ended and developed into super reach. When the hold display hidden by the gray scale effect is switched to the final color of the hold display in the effect to be performed, the expected value is released, so that a more innovative effect can be provided to the player.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example. However, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to a pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, such as a slot machine (rotating type) The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine) or a fusion gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (one that performs a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a swing type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 208 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 208, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. Front door 6002 and main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, the front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a key hole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. In the protruding portion, a medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a storage and settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. The bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage settlement button 6022, and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been. The main control board 1310 is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) that is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window are provided. You can see through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, an effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, translucent symbol bands on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information are affixed to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from top to bottom from the display window described above. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Peripheral control unit 1500 is based on various commands from main control board 1310, such as operation control of a plurality of movable effects, drawing control of effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above. As described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are all made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). When the various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are respectively fixed to the back surface side of the metal plate with a metal pan-screw, they are grounded to these grounds (GND). It is configured to be a ground (GND).

  The main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of medals as game media into the medal slot 6008, and starts to display symbol information variation based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right Based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time, the change display of symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls thrown in the ball slot 6008 ′ as a game medium to operate the start lever 6014. The symbol information variation display is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit granting state (big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 1300 ... Main control unit, 1310 ... Main control board, 1500 ... Production control unit, 1501 ... Cover body, 1502 ... base body, 1503 ... wiring cover body, 1510 ... peripheral control board, 1520 ... peripheral data ROM board, 1530 ... liquid crystal output board, 1600 ... effect display device.

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area;
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Lottery means for performing a lottery for a big hit based on a game ball entering a predetermined start opening provided in the game area;
Advantageous game state control means for controlling to an advantageous gaming state in which the variable prize opening is opened when a result that is a big hit is obtained by lottery by the lottery means;
A first number of game balls are paid out based on a game ball entering a predetermined winning opening provided at a position where a game ball launched toward the right region of the game area can enter, and the game A second number of game balls that is greater than the first number based on the number of game balls entering the variable winning opening provided at a position where game balls launched toward the right region of the area can enter. A game machine comprising a payout means for paying out
The predetermined winning opening is provided at a position to suppress the number of game balls heading to the variable winning opening,
When the jackpot lottery result is obtained by lottery by the lottery means, determine one advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states,
The predetermined starting port is a first starting port into which a game ball launched toward the right region of the gaming area enters and a second starting ball into which the game ball launched toward the left region of the gaming area enters. A gaming machine having a start opening.